Marine ftiohgical Laboratory Library e, Massachusetts OF (EXPLORATION OHOMPSON MONTGOMERY (1907-1956) architect, nepherf of Oiamson MontQmcru (1813-1912), mrtsttflfttor, and (prucilla Wratttin ^Montgomery (1874-1956), MBL librarian. er son* (ontQomcr^, MfD. W tyumond ( a D a m a a -'-:; = ; ICERS <>!'' Till-. Jeannette Arctic Expedition COPYRIGHT SECjREO 1882. AMES. CAN PUBUS- ARTQTVPE BIERSTAOT OUR LOST EXPLORERS: THE NARRATIVE OF THE JEA1ETTE ARCTIC AS RELATED BY THE SURVIVORS, AND IN THE RECORDS AND LAST JOURNALS OF LIEUTENANT DE LONG. REVISED BY RAYMOND LEE NEWCOMB, NATUBALIST OF THE EXPEDITION. WITH GKAPHIC DESCRIPTIONS OF ARCTIC SIBERIA, THE LENA AND ITS DELTA, THE NATIVE AND EXILED INHABITANTS OF THE COUNTRY, ETC. ; AND MR. NEWCOMB'S NAR- RATIVE OF A WINTER OVERLAND JOURNEY FROM THE ARCTIC OCEAN TO ST. PETERSBURG. ALSO AN ACCOUNT OF THE JEANNETTE SEARCH EXPEDITIONS, THEIR DISCOVERIES, THE BURNING OF THE RODGERS, &c., &c. WITH AN INTRODUCTION BY Rev. W. L. GAGE, D.D. MAPS, PORTRAITS, AND NUMEROUS ENGRAVINGS. PUBLISHED BY 8UBSCE1PT1ON ONLY. HARTFORD, CONK: AMERICAN PUBLISHING CO. W. H. THOMPSON. 404 ARCH ST., PHILADELPHIA, PA. 1883. Copyright, 1882, AMERICAN PUBLISHING COMPANY, HARTFORD, CT. INTRODUCTION. The Arctic Ocean has been for years the nursery of heroic deeds. And had the results of enterprise been even less than they have been in that region of frost and ice. and months-long night, what has been shown there of that which is noblest and most ad- mirable in man would have been worth all that it has cost. The story of war and of battle brings to light much bravery, much en- durance, often much magnanimity; yet the record is stained with so much of bloodshed, and of cruelty, that not infrequently it seems more like a transcript of the baser human passions than of heroic courage and noble achievement. And Arctic discovery, too, is full of pain, for its course is tracked with hardships, and its field is sown with graves. Yet there is BO much of brightness, of hope, of mutual helpfulness, and of novel experience in the record, that we turn to the stories of polar adventure with the same zest with which boys breathe in the probabilities and glorious reckless- ness of such adventurers as Tom Sawyer. The book now before the reader falls not a whit behind its predecessors. Indeed, as an unbroken current of hardship, dis- appointments, perils, and final disaster, uncheered with scarce a gleam of that success which was fondly hoped at the outset, the work is without a rival. From the time when this little company of about one-third of a hundred souls, became entangled in the ice masses off Herald Island and Northeastern Siberia, and then em- bedded in the floes, on and on, through the long winters of 1879, 1880, and 1881, and through the brief summers of 1880 and 1881, down to the discovery of some of the survivois, and in their im- mense and unparalleled feats of courage, strength, and endurance in crossing the ice-fields after the Jeannette went down, till they reached the Siberian villages and towns, there is one continuous strain of heroism, one incessant and good-humored story of that which is best and most hopeful in the human soul. And so the book becomes in its revelations of character, a work of singular TV INTRODUCTION. -and thrilling interest. Those sturdy men of many nationalities and many languages, embracing not only the best known European people, but the Chinese and the North American Indians, all work- ing in harmony, and for the common good; those rude and primi- tive Tunguses of Northern Asia, hospitable and kindly; the Cos- sacks, and even the exiles who had been driven to Siberia for their offences, wanning into charity and hospitality towards the sufferers from a distant land ; the zeal of the surviving men of the Jeannette to learn, to the last particular, the fate of DeLong and of Chipp; the earnestness and eagerness of the officers to attain to all possible scientific results; the loyalty of all to their superiors in office, and the fidelity to the great fact of law, all this invests the book with a delightful and incessant charm. And as the interest of the world grows breathless to catch the last words of this intrepid band, and the remotest whispers of their fate, the sense of their endurance, their courage, and their high and manly hope, becomes more inspiring. No audience is larger than that which now awaits each voice that can tell us of the fortunes of the Jeannette and her crew. The discovery of the dreadful fate which met the DeLong party comes to us as the crowning agony of a long series of distresses. But while such disasters win universal sympathy, the story of such a retreat as that of the boat- loads of men whose untiring efforts during the summer of 1881, after they left the Jeannette, this volume records, will be read with the interest which is only given to deeds of sustained courage and manly striving. A nd we have no fear that the modest tale will fail of finding its thousands of readers. CONTENTS. CHAPTER I. THE JEANNETTE AND HER CREW VOYAGE TO THE ARCTIC OCEAN. pA.es. The Pandora bought, renamed, and fitted out Officers and Crew Departure from San Francisco Anequin and Alexai Arrival at Northeastern Siberia Good-bye to Civilization Last tidings of the Jcanuette ................... 17 CHAPTER II. A SEARCH FOR MISSINC WHALERS AND THE JEANNETTE. The Mt. Woolaston and Vigilant, Reminiscence of Captain Sailing of the Corwin Indian Village at St. Michaels Bear- hunters of Alaska The starved Islanders Deserted Villages - Capture of whisky-trading schooners Cruise in Arctic waters Interesting incidents The northern pack and its fatal drift. . . '38 CHAPTER III. SEARCHES FOR THE JEANNETTE SECOND CRUISE OF THE CORWIN. Search Expeditions of 1881 -- The .Icannette Relief-Board The Cor- win starts north Landing of search party on Siberian coast Fate of the lost whalers discovered Exploration of Herald Island Professor Muir's narrative Landing on Wrangel Island -Wreck of the Webster The Golden Fleece and Ray's Expedi- tion Excursion to the Reindeer Chukches The Diomedes An Esquimaux Long Branch No traces of the missing explorers. . . 39 CHAPTER IV. SEARCHES FOR THE JEANNETTE CRUISE OF THE RODGERS. The Mary and Helen renamed the Rodgers Officers and crew Departure from San Francisco The 180th Meridian Description of the Bay of Avatcha, Petropavolvsk, and Commander's Island - Slaughter of sea-bears at Copper Island Voyage to Cape Serdze -Visit to a Ckukcke village Wrangel Island explored An ex- citing bear-hunt Waring's adventures Putnam's winter camp The Rodgers goes into winter quarters in St. Lawrence Bay. . . 54 CO' yi CONTENTS. CHAPTEE V. SEARCHES FOB THE JEANNETTE CRUISE OP THE ALLIANCE. PAGE. The Steamship Alliance and her officers The start from Norfolk Navy- Yard Voyage to Iceland and Norway Exciting news Voyage to Bear Island and Spitzbergen The midnight sun as seen near Horn Sound White whales Walrus hunters at Bell Sound Beyond the 80th Parallel In a fog A fairy-like scene View from the crow's nest Exciting times at Dane's Island Return to Hammerfest, and home A phenomenal cruise Results of the Voyage 71 CHAPTER VI. PLANS FOR AN INTERNATIONAL SEARCH. Ko news from the Jeannette Lost in the Arctic Lehigh Hunt's Expedition Action of London Geographical Society Reminis- cence of the Franklin Search Plans of operation Opinions of Arctic travelers 79 CHAPTER VII. FIRST TIDINGS FROM THE EXPLORERS. Startling news from Irkutsk Arrival of some of the Jeannette's crew on the Siberian coast Official telegrams Prompt action of Russian officers Second Cutter missing A season of sus- pense "By Baikal's Lake." .83 CHAPTER VIII. THE SIBERIAN TUNDRA. A land of desolation The Tundra in summer An animated scene Arctic moss Graphic description of the Tundra in winter Dreariness, cold, and solitude Frozen in mammoth and rhinoce- ros Curious legends of the natives Fossil ivory The "isle of bones." 91 CHAPTER IX. THE LENA RIVER AND ITS DELTA. A mighty river Its head-waters and tributaries Ledyard's travels, and voyage down the stream Hospitable Russians Valley of the Lower Lena, and its inhabitants Description of the Delta Im- mense sea-coast Seven great arms of the Lena A wonderful sight The Vega and Lena A disappointing pilot Johannesen's voyage up the river Amusing incidents Curious customs and ceremonies Ludicrous thanksgiving service Extinguishing a clerk.' 98 CONTENTS. Vll CHAPTER X. ENGINEER MELVILLE'S NARRATIVE. PAGH. Melville in command of whale-boat His story of the voyage and sinking of the Jeannette, the retreat south, the separation of the boats, and the lauding of his party The discovery by natives, who conduct them to a village where startling news from Ninder- inaun arrives Searches for De Long The survivors at Yakutsk. Ill CHAPTER XI. LIEUTENANT DE LONG'S RECORDS. Copies of four records found in huts along the North channel of the Lena, which were left there by De Long as he retreated southward. 136 CHAPTER XII. EXPERIENCES OF NINDERMANN, NOROS, AND LEACH. Verbatim copy of Nindermann's letter written at Buluu Noros's story of his parting with I)e Long when he and Nindermann were sent on for relief --The narrative of Mr. Leach 130 CHAPTKi; XIII. YAKUTSK. The 'City of the Yakuts'- -The Cossack con<|uernrs of Siberia The Province of Yakutsk Natives, Russian peasants, and exiles Yakuts and Tonguses Ostyak tents AYinler dwellings Cus- toms of the country Priests The ' Pole of Cold ' Interesting notes of travelers A story of Russian jealousy Ledyard's eulogy of women Life at Yakutsk 140 CHAPTER XIV. IRKUTSK. Tlie capital of Eastern Siberia A elieerful resii rig -place Descrip- tion of the city and its suburbs Lake Baikal Valley of the Angara Account of the great lire of 1879 The fire brigade - Ludicrous scenes and incidents Religious processions Mr. Jackson's journey to Irkutsk Meeting with the Jeannette crew. 154 CHAPTER XV. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER's NARRATIVE. The story of the expedition Sailing of the Jeannette Daring the icepack Frozen in Drifting Life on ship A break-up Anequin's discovery Tremendous pressures Severe gales A bad leak Starting the pumps Hunting excursions Chipp's experiments Exciting bear chases De Long's adventure. . . 169 Vlll CONTENTS. CHAPTER XVI. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE (CONTINUED.) FAGB. The Jeannette in winter quarters Constant danger Bear-hunting on the floes Melville's Canal Scurvy Discovery of Jeannette Island An excursion to Henrietta Island A curious mistake Mount Sylvie Breaking up of the ice An even keel A fas- cinating danger The hunters' recall A fatal nip Abandoning the ship Encamped on the ice Sinking of the Jeannette. . . 191 CHAPTER XVII. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWEIl'S NARRATIVE (CONTINUED.) Preparations for a long journey Sleds, boats, and outfit Order of march The start southward A discouraging outlook Start- ling discovery Ferrying the fissures The hospital tent Hero- ism of men Lund ahead A dash for the shore Annexation of Bennett Island Land-slides Duubar's exploring trip 207 CHAPTER XVIII. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE (CONTINUED.) Launching the boats Start for Bennett Island Deserting dogs Working south between ice-fields Fatal delay at Ten Day Camp Among the New Siberian Islands Hunting on Thaddeoffsky A terrible situation Halt on Kotelnoi Hunting parties Stal- bovoi Hunting on Semeuoff ski Last interview with Chipp A start for Siberia Fearful gale, which separates the boats Launching a drag An eventful night Another day and night. 228 CHAPTER XIX. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE (CONTINUED.) Off the coast Attempts to reach shore Enter and proceed up a river A night of agony in a hunting-camp A delightful Sunday Reconnoitering First meeting with natives Piloted south by Cut-eared Wassili At Spiridou's village The voyage continued. 238 CHAPTER XX. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE (CONCLUDED.) Arrival at Geemovialocke The chief's house Visited by a Rus- sian exile Attempt to proceed Return to the village Decayed geese Sojourn at the Tunguse village A native feast day Arrival of another exile Entertained at Kusmah's house The exile starts for Bulun Danenhower's search for De Long Start- ling news Melville starts to search for De Long Arrival of Cossack commander Journey to Bulun and Yakutsk 250 CONTENTS. i \ CHAPTER XXI. LIEUTENANT DE LONG'S LOG-BOOK. PAGE. A copy of the Jeannette's log kept by the commander from May 17th to June 12th, 1881, when tlie ship sunk .......... 2H2 CHAPTER XXII. A ROLL OF HONOR. Iteport of the Ispravnik of Verkhoyansk Nicholai censured Gen- erous natives, exiles, and officials Danenhower's letter. . . . CHAPTER XXIII. MR. NKVvioMi:'- N\I:K \IIVE. Incidents of the voyage north Ougalgan Inland Kolyutschin 15ay Skating off Herald Island Adventure with hears Singular phenomenon Sea gulls - Grand auroral display ( 'liri-tuia>- and New Year's entertainments Indian siiperstiiions At the pumps Dangerous excursion Kniomolo^ical specimens ...... 277 CHAPTER XXIV. MR. NI'.XM iiMI'.'s NAKKATIVE (CONTINTKD.) Conflictof the Hoes .leannelle Min-irel Troupe Christmas enter- tainment Facsimile of programme Mr. Collins's poem A dream of home; |)i Reindeer Tunguses A night attack Curious scenes and inci- dents along the road by night and day Odd customs 332 CHAPTER XXVIII. MR. NEWCOMU'S NARRATIVE (<'ONTrM-KJ>.) Approach to Yakutsk The Mecca of my hopes Hospitable recep- tion Sight-seeing An old fortress Life at Yakutsk Evening recreations New Year's day The Russian Christmas Churches and priests Curious tire-engines A peculiar people The start homeward Mining the army' -Reception at Irkutsk Dr. Ledyard Life in the metropolis Arrival of Jackson Noros returns east A sample of the 'boys.' 343 CHAPTER XXIX. MR. NEWCOMB'S NARRATIVE (CON-TINTED.) Leave Irkutsk Meet Harber and Seheutze Seamen turn back Journey through Siberia Sights at Tomsk The Siberian women -Omsk Life on the Kirghcsian steppes Easter Sunday at Throisky Village entertainments Russian superstitions A wedding Fanciful dresses A capsize The Ural River Osk The Ural Mountains Fine views Kirghese hunters Cossack villages Orenburg and the 'iron horse' An interesting city Ride along the Volga Agricultural scenes Moscow St. Peters- burg Interview with the emperor and empress Cronstadt Hull Liverpool 'Home again.' :5r,3 CHAPTER XXX. DE LONG'S FATE DISCOVERED THE GRAVES ON THE LENA. The search renewed Melville at Cath Carta Visit to Cape Bykoff Fearful storms An account of the search for and finding of De Long and his men The rille in the snow 'All dead' Removal of the lost explorers Description of their mausoleum- Inscription on the cross The tragedy on the Delta Strange incidents The nightly alarm fire De Long's last effort. . . . 366 CONTKNTs . xi CHAPTER XXXI LIEUTENANT DE LONG'S DIARY. PAQB A melancholy relic Copy of De Long's diary extending from October 15th to the end A terrible story of hardships, sufferings, and death, and of heroic bravery and Christian resignation. . . . :!7v CHAPTER XX XII. NEW SKAKi IIKKs IN TIIK KIKLD. The search for Chipp Traveler* from the Ka-t and tin- West- Berry, Hunt, and Gilder llarhcr and Schciit/e'-, t \pedition- Preparations at Vitimsk Hunt and Bartlett join Harher Meeting of steamers Homeward journey of the returning explorers. . . ;i'J4 CHAITKR XX XIII. BURNHs*. ul- Tlli-: ];,,!, |.;K-S AN [CE-FLOE Ti: \.KDY. Tlie llodgers at St. Laurence Hay ' Fire '' Burning of the Ship Escape to the shore A irrand sight At home \\itli the Chuk- ches Grace's narrative Putnam mi-sing Alarming discovery Drifting on tlie ici Putnam's -ml iVn- ......... 401 rll.MTKK XXXIV. MIT. \MdNi; Till < in Killl - Hunting for a living Fi-lier\\ omen, medicine-men, dwelling*, cus- toms ami supeisiitioi^ \"i>ii to Reindeer Chukches Death of a girl Life at Camp Hunt Three stran^-r- Zane's adventui-' - Kt treat south Arrival of the North Slur ;iml Corwin Rescue of the castauay- Lo-- of Ihe Xorth Star ......... 414 niAi'TKi; xxxv. Mi:. (MI.UKK's TRAVELS IN Xorth A genuine ' poorga' Anight in the snow The Chukehe caravan A brilliant sight Orna- mental bells Lost in a snow-storm Carried over a precipice Badly frozen Loss of dogs On tlie borders of civili/.ation A night in a deserted hut An abandoned village Picture of life in a cottage Down the Kolyma Arrival at Wanker's house- Surprising changes An old hypocrite The powerful stranger Escape from Wanker Friendly villagers Arrival at Nishni Kolymsk Journey to Middle Kolymsk Description of the town and its people Curious sights Antiquated implements Inside the houses Interesting exiles An unpardonable offence A. Xll CONTENTS. PAOB convenient religion Pictures of saints Household devotions 'Dear little Nanyah' and her guardian A beautiful sight - 'Vodka,' and the custom of the country Journey to Verkhoy- ansk 428 CHAPTER XXXVI. THE STORY OP THE FORLORN HOPE. Additional particulars respecting the parting of Nindermann and Noros from De Long, and of their journey to Bulun. . . . . 449 CHAPTER XXXVII. ENGINEER MELVILLE'S NARRATIVE (CONTINUED). The voyage from Sernenoffsky and separation of the boats The November search for De Long Opinion as to Chipp's fate Find- ing of the first cutter 462 APPENDIX. An account of the arrival and reception of Melville and his com- panions 470 LIST OF ENGRAVINGS. PAOB. PHOTOGRAPHIC PORTRAITS OF THE OFFICERS OF THK ARCTIC STEAMER JEANNETTE, . . . Frontispiece. GROUP OF EXPLORERS IN ARCTIC COSTUME, . . 17 ALEXAI AND ins WIFE TIIKIK LAST INTERVIEW, 24 ESQUIMAUX FAMILY NEAR CAPE PRINCE OF WALES, ... 36 TATTOOED WOMAN OF ST. LAWRE.NCK ISLAND, ... 88 THE CORWIN SEARCH I'A.ITY SLEDGING ON Til K SIBERIAN COAST, 44 A BIRD NURSERY, . . . ... 47 PETROPAVLOSK REPULSE OF THE ALLIES, . ... 57 COMMANDER'S ISLANDS SLAUGHTER OF SEA-BEARS, . . 58 CHUKCIIKS VISITIN; THE KODGERS IN -KIN BOATS, . . 60 INTERVIEWING A DENI/EN OF \\KA.\GEL LAND, . . 62 PREPARING FOK WINTKK, . 70 Ill'T OF WRECKED NORWEGIANS AT BEAR ISLAND, 73 GLACIERS AT BELL SOUND, SPITSBERGEN, . . 74 SAMOYEDES OF ARCHANGEL 78 THE "RESCUE," .... 82 LIMIT OF TREES IN SIBERIA 92 MAMMOTH SKELETON IN THE MUSEUM AT ST. PETERSBURG, 95 NATIVE OF THE TUNDRA, WITH SIBERIAN RHINOCEROS-HORN, . 96 SIBERIAN RIVER BOAT, 99 YAKUSTK, EASTERN SIBERIA, IN THE SEVENTEENTH CENTURY, 101 THE VEGA AND LENA SALUTING CAPE CHELYUSKIN, . . . 104 LANDING A SEA-SICK OFFICIAL, 109 WINTER YOURT, . . 110 THE JEANNETTE FASTENED TO A FLOE 113 GRAVES IN THE PRIMEVAL FORESTS OF SIBERIA, .... 124 LIEUTENANT DE LONG AND HIS MEN WADING ASHORE, . . 126 THE PARTING ON THE LENA, 133 SIBERIAN VILLAGE CHURCH, . . . ..""'. 141 SIBERIAN PEASANT, WITH SAMOVAR, . 142 OSTYAK TENTS MADE OF BIRCH-BARK, . ... 143 NATIVE GIRLS OF YAKUTSK IN WINTER COSTUME, . . 146 YAKUTSK IN OUR DAYS, ... 147 A WINTER JOURNEY AMONG THE DRIFTS, . . . 153 (xiii) XIV LIST OF ENGBAYINGS. LAKE BAIKAL, EASTERN SIBERIA, IN WINTER, . . . l.V> VIEW IN IRKUTSK, . . 157 A CITY ON FIRE, 101 EXILED CRIMINAL IN CHAINS, . . 106 LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER TELLING ins STORY, . . 168 NORDENSKIOLD'S WINTER QUARTERS, KOLYI TSCIUN BAY, . . 172 WHALERS STOPPED BY THE ICE, 174 SKATING ON THE YOUNG ICE, ... . . 176 THE ICE IN MOTION, 178 ARCTIC AURORAS, 185 DE LONG'S ADVENTURE A MUTUAL SURPRISE, . . . 187 IN THE CROW'S-NEST, 190 BEAR-HUNTING ON THE FLOE, 193 JEANNETTE ISLAND, 194 ARCTIC GLACIER, . 197 THE JEANNETTE CREW ABANDONING THEIR smr, . . . 203 THE SINKING OF THE JEANNETTE, ..'.... 206 FIRST CAMP AFTER STARTING SOUTH, . ... 213 VIEW OF BENNETT ISLAND 220 EXPLORATION OF BENNETT ISLAND, . . ... 221 WORKING SOUTH THROUGH THE ICE, 223 THADDEOFFSKY ISLAND, 226 STOLBOVOI ISLAND, 230 THE SEPARATION OF THE BOATS, 234 CHILD IN ARCTIC RIG 237 FISHERMAN'S HUTS, 249 WINTER RESIDENCE OF THE RUSSIAN EXILE, .... 253 ARCTIC YOUNGSTER, 261 OUTLINES OF JEANNETTE ISLAND 263 EFFECTS OF A NIP, . 269 ON THE RETREAT, 273 GLAUCOUS- WINGED GULLS, 278 WALRUS, 281 EFFECT OF ICE PRESSURES, 283 "MORE FRESH MEAT," 289 AN ARCTIC SKETCH, 291 CONFLICT OF THE FLOES, 292 THE JEANNETTE IN HER LAST DOCK, 301 A VISION OF HOME, 303 OLD-WORLD POLAR DRESS FROM A PAINTING IN THE STOCKHOLM MUSEUM, 307 A SUCCESSFUL HUNTER, 309 ANNEXATION OF BENNETT ISLAND, 310 CAIRN ON BENNETT ISLAND, 313 SEAL AND SEAL-HOLE, . 314 LAND-SLIDE AT BENNETT ISLAND, .... . 315 LIST OF KN<;I;AVIN<;S. xv ARCTIC DUCKS, 317 LOG CABIN ON THE LENA, 319 SIGHTING THE FIRST NATIVES, 321 OUK DEPARTURE FROM GEKMoV) ALOCKE, 330 YAKUT HUNTER, 331 GOOD-BYE TO BULUN :;:::: NOVEL DESCENT OP THE MOUNTAINS, 338 REINDEER TUNGUSES AND M \IMKK TENT, 340 RUSSIAN KIBITKA, :ir,' RUSSIAN PRIEST, :M'> SURVIVORS OF THE EXPEDITION AT YAKUTSK FROM A rnoxo- <. KUMI 347 -M MMKU YOTRT, ;!.").' Jr MI'ING CRADLE-HOLES, :!,"H A Sim. 1:1 \N SIMNM.K, '. 356 A Rl'SMA.N WKI>I>IN. I'XKTY, 358 A SIIJKKIA.N TAKANTA-S ;;.VJ THE GREAT BELL OK .Moscow, :;i;:; BOUNDARY STONK BETWEEN EUROPE ANI> A.8LA :!i;."> THE RIFLE IN TIII-: SNOW, :;r>! MELVTLLE DISCOVERING l>i. I.OM; AND HIS CUMI-AMONS, . .370 TlIK TOMB ON THE I,KN \ ',',',] \l.\\ \\n|:i.l> l-nl.Ml DKKSS 378 A TIME OK TKolT.LK 382 "Siiii A ]>KIM;Y, AVRKTCIIED NH.IIT," :;^:> r.ruiAi, OF KKICKSON IN 1111. I i:\\ 387 I'.i I;MNC OF Tin: RODGF.KS .Km RODGERS SI \\IIN ATl'K.MI-riM: TO RESCUE PUTNAM, . . . -HO ( III KCHE COUNTRY HAKI > 415 ClIUKl 111. WOMAN ANGLINC 416 TIIK STAI;OST OF TIIK REINDEER. CHUKCHES, .... 418 A ClIUKfllE DWELLING, 420 INTKKIOK OF TENT, 4v!l MAN AND WOMAN OF TIAPKA, 425 SEALS SPORTING, 427 CAPE NORTH 440 BEAKER SPONGES FROM SEA-BOTTOM AT MOUTH OF THE KOLYMA, 445 MAPS, PLANS, ETC. MAP OF EASTERN SIBERIA, SHOWING EXPLORERS' ROUTES, . . 16 MAP OF THE LENA DELTA, 16 PLANS OF THE BOATS, 228 WASSILI'S CHART, 246 FAC-SIMILE OF ENTERTAINMENT PROGRAMME, . . . 294, 295 PLAN OF DE LONG'S LAST CAMPING PLACE, . . 374 CHAPTEK I. THE JEANNETTE AND HER CREW THE VOYAGE TO THE ARCTIC OCEAN. rTlHE American Arctic Expedition, commanded by Licu- -1- tenant George W. DeLong of the United States Navy, which left San Francisco, July 8th, 1879, was projected by James Gordon Bennett, proprietor of the New York Herald. After the return of the last of the two successful expeditions \vhich he had sent to Africa under Henry M. Stanley, Mr. Bennett longed for new worlds to conquer, and decided to send out, at his own expense, an expedition to attempt to reach the North Pole by way of Bering's Straits. Lieuten- ant DeLong became interested in the undertaking, and the Pandora, owned by Captain Allan Young, was selected and bought as a suitable vessel to convey the explorers. The Pandora was built in England in 1862. She was a bark-rigged steam yacht of 420 tons burden, with an engine of 200 horse-power, and a wide spread of canvas. She was strongly constructed, and had seen considerable service in the northern seas. In 1873 she conveyed her owner to the Arctic regions for the purpose of searching for records of Sir John Franklin's expedition ; and in 1876 Captain Young cruised in her about the northern part of Baffin's Bay, having been deputed by the English Admiralty to search for Captain Nare's expedition. By special act of Congress the vessel was allowed to sail under American colors, to assume a new name the Jean- nette and to be navigated by officers of the United States Navy, with all the rights and privileges of a government 2 18 THK JKANNETTK ARCTIC KXPEDITION. vessel. The Secretary of the Navy was authorized to accept and take charge of the ship for the use of the proposed expedition, and to use any material on hand in fitting her for the voyage; but upon condition that the Department should not be subjected to any expense on account thereof. The Jeannette was taken from Havre, in France, through the Straits of Magellan to San Francisco, by Lieutenant DeLong, with Lieutenant Danenhower as navigating officer, and there delivered to the naval authorities at Mare Island. After a thorough examination it was deemed advisable, on account of the hazardous nature of the contemplated voyage, that her capacity to resist the pressure of the ice should be increased. " This conclusion," says the Secretary of the Navy, " was precautionary, merely, inasmuch as she had been well constructed, and was believed to possess ordinary strength." A large amount of work was subsequently done upon the ship at the expense of Mr. Bennett. She was furnished with new boilers ; iron box beams were put in abaft and forward of the boilers to strengthen her sides ; trusses were strengthened ; additional wooden hooks were introduced and fastened through and through ; her extreme fore end, to the extent of about ten feet from the spar deck down, was filled in with solid timber and caulked; additional strakes and planks six inches thick were introduced to strengthen her bilge ; and her deck frame was renewed wherever required. The cabin and forecastle were padded with layers of felt to keep out the cold, and the poop deck was covered with several thicknesses of stout painted canvas. Boats, tents, extra sails, two extra propellers, extra pumps, a distilling apparatus, a hoisting engine rigged on the spar deck to be employed in warping, all kinds of machinery that might possibly be of use, and everything that could be devised to give safety to the explorers and efficiency to the expedi- tion, were provided. The vessel was fully provisioned and equipped for a three years' voyage. niTH'KRS AND MKX. 19 The following letter was written by Lieutenant DeLong just before the expedition started: AIM TIC STKA.MER JEANNETTE, SAX FKAXCISCO. CAL., JULY 8th, 1879. Hon. R. W. THOMPSON, Secretary of the Navy : SIR, I have the honor to inform you that the Jeaiiueite. being in all respects ready for sea, will sail at three o'clock this afternoon on her cruise to the Arctic regions. I have also the honor to acknowledge the receipt of your orders of the Istli of .June in relation to the movements of the Arctic expedition under my command; and while I appreciate the grave responsibility intrusted to my care, I beg leave to assure you that I will endeavor to perform this important duty in a manner calculated to reflect credit upon the ship, the navy, and the country at large. I beg leave to return thanks for the confidence expressed in my ability to satisfactorily conduct such a hazardous expedition, and 1 desire to place upon record my conviction that nothing ha* been left unprovided which the enterprise and liberality of Mr. .lames (Jordon Heimetf and the experi- ences of our Arctic predecessors could suggest. Your obedient servant, GEORGE W. DELONG, Lieutenant United States Navy, commanding Arctic steamer Jeannette. The officers and crew of the Jeannette were as follows : Lieutenant George W. DeLong, U. S. N., Commander. Lieutenant Charles W. Chipp, I". S. N., Executive Ollieer. Lieutenant John W. Danenhower, U. S. N., Navigator. George W. Melville, Chief Engineer. J. M. Ambler, Surgeon. Jerome J. Collins, Meteorologist. Raymond L. Newcomb, Naturalist. William M. Duubar, Ice Pilot. James H. Harriett, First-class Fire- man. John Cole, Boatswain. Walter Lee. Machinist. Alfred Sw< > -\ man, Carpenter. George Laudcrback, Walter Sliarvell, Firemen. George W. Boyd, Adolf Dressier, Hans H. Erickson, Carl A. Gortz, Nelse Iverson, Peter E. Johnson, George H. Kuchne, Henry H. Kaack, Herbert W. Leach, Frank Mansen, Win. F. C. Nindermann, Louis J. Noros, Edward Star, Henry D. Warren, Henry Wilson, Seamen. Ah Sam, and Charles Tong Sing (Chinese). Cook and Cabin Stewards. 20 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Lieutenants DeLong and Chipp were officers of the U. S. steamer Juniata on her northern cruise in search of the crew of the lost Polaris. Mr. Melville was engineer of the steamer Tigress when she went north on the same errand. All of the crew were volunteers, selected with great care from many applicants. Ninderman was a member of the Polaris ice-drift [tarty. A complimentary reception was given by the California Academy of Sciences to the officers of the Jeannette, a feu- days before their departure. The meeting was largely at- tended, and many eminent scientists of the Pacific coast were present. In response to an invitation to address the audi- ence, Lieutenant DeLong spoke as follows : k ' When the officers of the expedition which I have the honor to command were invited to be present this evening to listen to the discussion of the Arctic problem, I replied for them and myself that nothing would give us greater pleas- ure than to be present. At the same time, however, I asked that we might be excused from any active participation in the discussion until after our return from within the Arctic circle. This humble peculiarity of ours, it would seem, is not to be tolerated ; and however unfit I am to reply with any degree of propriety to the very kind remarks that have been made to us this evening, it seems that it is one of the duties that is forced upon the commander of the expedition, as well as a great many other duties. As far as this part of the expe- dition is concerned, there is really very little to say. By the act of Congress it has been placed under the charge of naval officers, and it has, since the passage of the act of Congress, received the fostering care and encouragement of the Navy Department. It is peculiar as being the first expedition fitted out to penetrate the highest regions of the north byway of Ber- ing's Straits. Ships have heretofore passed through Bering's Straits, rounding Point Barrow, and going to the northward to rescue and relieve Sir John Franklin ; but this is the first purely polar expedition that has ever been despatched by way of Bering's Straits. LIEUTENANT DKLON<;> SJ'KKCH. ~2[ " I dare say that after we have loft San Francisco, in our passage to the northern seas, we shall experience very much the same difficulties and hardships and trials that have been experienced by everybody who has gone before us. It is one of the most difficult things --in t'act.it is an impossible thing for one starting out on an expedition of this kind to say in advance what he is going to do. The ground which we are going to traverse is an entirely new one. After reaching the seventy-first parallel of latitude we go out into a great blank space, which we arc going to endeavor to de- lineate and to determine whether it is water or land or ice. You will excuse me, therefore, from attempting to explain what we are going to do. If you will be kind enough to keep us in memory while we are gone we will attempt to tell you what we have done on our return, which. I dare say, will be more interesting than attempting to tell yon what we hope to do. [ can only return to you my sincere thanks for the kind reception you have given us and for the interest you manifest in our peculiar undertaking." On the -')0th of .June the San Francisco Chamber of Com- merce, specially convened for the purpose of expressing the deep interest felt in the expedition by that body, adopted the following resolutions : "Whereas the San Francisco Chamber of Commerce is desirous of expressing its deep interest and good-will toward all measures calculated to forward and extend any scientific, explorations likely to benefit the commerce, navigation, or agricultural interests of our country; therefore, on behalf of the mercantile industry of the Pacific slope of the United States of America, be it "Resolved: That we earnestly offer our cheering words of hearty approval to encourage the well-planned American Arctic expedition about to prosecute from our Pacific coast a continuance of that noble work of polar exploration so gal- lantly inaugurated and fearlessly advanced by the nations bordering on the Atlantic. On behalf of our city, as a future 22 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. seat of national wealth and extended commerce, we desire to foster scientific enlightenment; and this Chamber views with marked interest an enterprise of national importance, sailing from its Golden Gate, fully equipped with a picked band of brave and resolute men possessed of Arctic experience, whom we feel are capable of winning a successful and glorious rec- ord for the nation whose banner floats over them, and whose blessing goes with them. While recognizing with admiration the fact that this expedition is wholly paid for and supported by private munificence, we rejoice that this enterprise is offi- cially endorsed by the United States government, who accord it the national rights necessary to proper discipline, and the suitable dignity intrusted by a great and growing nation whose knowledge it will increase, and to whose honor it will redound. Asa national work it will extend the geograph- ical survey and topographical knowledge of our northern boundary; in the interests of commerce, navigation, and na- tional agriculture it may determine laws of meteorology, hydrography, astronomy, and gravitation, reveal ocean cur- rents, develop new fisheries, discover lands and people hith- erto unknown ; and by extending the world's knowledge of such fundamental principles of earth-life as magnetism and electricity, and various collateral branches of atmospheric science, solve great problems important to our common humanity. "Resolved : That as the well-merited offering of an appecia- tive nation, our people would most heartily approve of and endorse the use of a national vessel to convoy the Jeannette to her most northern port of departure, whence, leaving the shores of solemn pine, she will traverse the northern seas alone, followed by the earnest hopes of friends to progress and the world of science. "Resolved : That we tender to her brave and accomplished commander, Lieutenant George W. DeLong, United States Navy, to his efficient staff of able specialists in various de- partments of science, and to his hardy and gallant crew, one DEPARTUIU-: FCOM SAX FRANCISCO. 23 and all, our hearty good wishes for their safe return, and t/ lj for the entire success of the American Arctic Expedition from the Pacific." The departure of the Jcannette from San Francisco, on the 8th of July, 1879, \vas a notable event in the history of that city. As the vessel moved slowly toward the Golden (late, the friendly waving of hats and handkerchiefs from the wharves, the shipping, and Telegraph Hill, told the ex- plorers that the good people of the city, as well as the men of the sea, were giving them a hearty send-off. A salute of ten guns fired from Fort Point greeted them at the Narrows, and several steamboats crowded \\ith spectators, and the white-sailed craft of the San Francisco Yacht Club convovcd . the Jeannette till she was out on the bosom of the broad Pa- cific, and fairly started on her voyage to the unknown north. Mrs. DeLong, the devoted wife of the commander, remained on her husband's ship till the \u*\ moment, and received his parting farewell as he assisted her from the Jeannette's boat to the deck of the last ret iirniui;- craft. The Jeannette proceeded direct to Ounalaska, one of the Aleutian Islands, and anchored in the harbor of lllionlionk, August 2d. This place is the headquarters of the Alaska Commercial Company, and its au'ent and other oflicials showed the explorers much kindness and attention. Addi- tional stores and supplies of coal and fur from the store- houses of the company were taken on board. On the 6th of August the .feannette resumed her course, and on the 12th of Auuiisl, anchored opposite the little set- tlement and blockhouse known by Americans as St. Michael's, Alaska, and by Russians as Michaelovski. The explorers were welcomed by Mr. Xewmann. agent of the Alaska Com- mercial Company, and by Mr. Nelson, an employee of the Smithsonian Institute and observer of the U. S. Signal Ser- vice, who were philosophical enough to live contentedly in that isolated [dace. A drove of about forty trained dogs, three dog-sleds, and fur clothing were here taken on board 24 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. ship, and two native Alaskans, named Anequin and Alexai, were hired to accompany the expedition as dog drivers and hunters. Alexai was a married man, and both could speak a little English. " Mrs. Alexai," wrote Mr. Collins, " a chubby-faced, shy, but good-humored looking young female, came on- board to see her husband off on his long cruise. She behaved with great propriety under the circumstances. Alexai behaved also with stolidity tempered by affection for his spouse. THE LAST INTERVIEW. They sat together, hand in hand, on some bags of potatoes near the cabin-door, and probably exchanged vows of eternal fidelity. I was greatly touched, and got up on the bridge with my sketch-block, on which I outlined their figures. I had to take them as they sat with backs toward me, for Mrs. Alexai was too modest to face the pencil. Before leaving the ship Captain DeLong gave the bereaved one a cup and saucer with gilt letters on it. She seemed overpowered with LAST WORDS FROM THE EXPLORERS. 25 emotion at the possession of such unique treasures, and at once hid them in the ample folds, or rather stowage-places, of her fur dress." On the 18th of August the schooner Fanny A. Hyde, con- veying- coal and extra stores for the expedition, arrived from San Francisco, and on the evening of the 21st both vessels resumed the voyage northward. As they started out, the guns at the old Russian fort and at the Agency of the Wes- tern Fur and Trading Company belched forth a parting salute. On the 25th the Jeannette arrived at St. Lawrence Bay, East Siberia, some thirty miles south of East Cape, where DeLong learned from the natives that a steamer, supposed to lie the Vega, had gone south. The schooner arrived the next day, and her stores were transferred to the Jeannette. In a letter dated August 26th, Engineer Melville wrote home as follows : " We did not send our convoy back from St. Michael's as we expected, because we were too deeply laden already to take on our stores. It was very fortunate for us we had her to carry our extra coal and stores over here, for on the wa\ we were caught in a terrible gale of wind, and. owing to the condition of the ship, and deeply laden as we were, the sen had a clean sweep over us. It stove in our forward parts. carried away the bridge, caved the bulkheads, and in fact just drowned us out. Had we the other stuff on board we must have foundered, or else got it overboard in time. We leave here for East Cape to-day, having taken on board all our stores, and we are -in even much worse sea-condition than we were before ; but we think that maybe, when we get into the ice where the wind can't raise a sea, we will be all right." From St. Lawrence Bay the Jeannette continued her jour- ney alone. Just before starting, Mr. Collins, as special correspondent of the New York Herald, wrote to that journal as follows : 21 ' THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. All before us now is uncertainty, because our movements will be governed by circumstances over which we can have no control. If, as I telegraphed, the search for Nordenskiold is now needless, we will try and reach Wrangel Land, and iind a winter harbor on that new land, on which, we believe, the white man has not yet put his foot. At the worst, we may winter in Siberia, and ' go for ' the Wrangel Land mys- tery next spring. I am in great hopes we will reach there this season. " We are amply supplied with fur clothing and provisions, so that we can feed and keep warm in any event for some time. Our dogs will enable us to make explorations to con- siderable distances from the ship and determine the charac- ter of the country. Feeling that we have the sympathy of all we left at home, we go north, trusting in God's protection and our good fortune. Farewell." After rounding East Cape, Lieutenant DeLong touched at Cape Serdze, on the northeast coast of Siberia, and left his last letter home. It was dated August 29th, and reached Mrs. DeLong over a year afterward. In this letter he ex- pressed his intention of proceeding to the southern end of \Vrangel Land, touching on the way, if practicable, at Kol- yutschin Bay, where the natives informed him Nordenskiold had wintered. " If," he wrote (referring to the probability that a ship would be sent to obtain intelligence of him the following year), "the ship comes up merely for tidings of us, let her look for them on the east side of Kellet Land and on Herald Island." On the 2d of September, 1879, when about fifty miles or so south of Herald Island, Captain Barnes, of the American whale-bark Sea Breeze, saw the Jeannette under full sail and steam, and attempted to communicate with her, but both vessels were in heavy ice, and a dense fog was setting in, which prevailed up to the following day. These vessels, having approached to within less than four miles of each other, held their courses without communication. On the NORTHWARD HO ! 27 following day, September 3d, 1879, Captain Kelley, of the bark Dawn, Captain Bauldry, of the Helen Mar, and several oth- ers of the whaling fleet, then somewhat northward of the Sea Breeze, saw smoke issuing from a steamer's smoke-stack, in range of Herald Island. The Jeaimette, having pressed forward, was hull down north of these whalers; hence they only saw her black smoke. She was standing north. The weather was quite clear at this time. These were the hist tidings of the Jeannette, or any of her crew, received for over two vears. tt Lieutenant DeLong's plans were to reach Wrangel Laud the first season, spend the winter in exploration there, and then to push on northwardly ;is i'ar as possible. "1 shall go," he said, before start intr. "to the extreme limit of possi- ble navigation that 1 am aide to attain. If the current takes me to the west, you will hear of me through St. Petersburg; but if it takes me eastward and northward, there is no sa\- ing what points I may reach : but I hope to come out through Smith's or Jones's Sound." From Ounalaska Lieutenant DeLou^ sent to his friend, Lieutenant Jacques, a long letter, teeming witli the interest and enthusiasm his great work had inspired. "We are started," he wrote, k ' and we shall try to do our best. We have a good, solid ship, and everything that money and ex- perience could provide. We go to Ounalaska, thence to St. Paul's Island, thence to St. Michael's, and thence to as high a latitude as God will let us reach in two years-- keeping the third year in reserve to get back. Keep us in mind, old fellow, and pray for my success, for my heart is set on this thing. Ninderman is with me, and keeps the bridge watch. Have a good time, and be careful of your health, and I pray God to bless you." CHAPTER II. A SEARCH FOR MISSING WHALERS AND THE JEANNETTE. (CRUISE OF THE CORWIN, 1880.) IN the autumn of 1879, two whaling ships, the Mt. Wol- laston, commanded by Captain Nye, and the Vigilant which, with a score of others, left San Francisco in the spring failed to return, and were reported as having been seen entangled in the ice by Captain Bauldry, whose bark, the Helen Mar, was the last to get away. Another vessel, the Mercury, was also caught in the ice, and her crew were rescued by the Helen Mar. Tempted by favorable weather and the hope of success in catching whales, these vessels had prolonged their stay in the Arctic Sea till after the middle of October, and Captain Bauldry escaped with difficulty, forcing a passage through the new ice which formed rapidly around him. A sudden change of wind drove the missing whalers northwesterly into open water, while a heavy body of ice south of them prevented all escape. Their crews numbered about twenty men each, and the desperate condition in which they were placed may be inferred from the fact that during the eight previous years no less than thirty-three vessels, out of the small fleet there engaged in whaling, had been caught in the pack and drifted to the northeast, carrying with them sixty men who had remained by their ships in the vain hope of saving them, and of whom nothing has since been heard. Durjng the same period, over thirty other whalers of the same fleet had also been crushed or otherwise wrecked. The following reminiscence of Captain Nye is furnished by Mr. William Bradford, the eminent marine artist : (28) REMINISCENCE OF CAPTAIN NYE. 29 "A short time before Lieutenant DeLong's departure I suggested to him that we call together all the whaling cap- tains then in port most of whom I knew well persqnally- and avail ourselves of whatever information their experience might afford and suggestions they might have to make. J 1< accepted the idea and arranged the meeting, and they all attended. One by one they gave their opinions, mainly upon the point of their greatest interest, the probable direction of the winds and currents at the time when Lieutenant DeLong expected to reach AVningel Land. But there was one among them who kept ominously silent, not venturing an opinion, or offering a suggestion. 1 finally said : 'Captain Nye has not given us his opinion, and we would like to hear from him.' He said : ' (Jentlenien, there isn't much to be said about this matter. ' Yon, Lieutenant DeLong, have a very strong vessel, have you not? Magnificently equipped for the service, with unexceptionable crew and aids? And yon will take plenty of provisions, and all the coal yon can carry?' To each of these questions, as it was asked, Lieutenant DeLong replied a lilirmat ively. 'Then,' said Captain Nye, 'put her into the ice and let her drift, and you may uet through or yon may u'o to the devil, and the chances are about equal/ Poor Captain Nye ! He ventured in there after Lieutenant DeLong into those same Arctic regions, in the prosecution of his enterprise as a whaler and was never heard of again. lie was from New Bedford, Mass., was one of the oldest, lira vest, and best men in the service, and there was no man sailing to the frigid seas who knew more of their perils than he who made that ominous forecast of the probable fate of the Jean- nette, if not of her commander.'' Much anxiety for the missing barks was felt in San Francisco, and merchants and citizens of that city petitioned the Secretary of the Navy to send out a government vessel to search for the whalers, and also for the Jeannette, as in the opinion of returned whalemen Captain DeLong had not succeeded in reaching AYrangel Land when winter set in. Subsequently, Captain C. L. Hooper, of the revenue cutter 30 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Corwin, was ordered on a trip northward to search for tidings of the missing vessels. He Avas also instructed to cruise in the waters of Alaska for the enforcement of the revenue laws, to visit St. Lawrence Island, where many natives had died of starvation, and to endeavor to suppress the traffic in whiskey, which was the principal cause of so much misery. Captain Hooper sailed from San Francisco, on his mission of good-will, May 22d, 1880. After touching at Ounalaska, June 9th, the Corwin met heavy ice pitching and grinding along the edge of the pack, and found refuge in a good harbor on the north coast of Nunivak Island, off a native settlement. " The inhabitants," says Captain Hooper, " all ran away to the hills as we approached, but on the next day we suc- ceeded in capturing them one man, three women, and three children. They were very much alarmed, and evidently thought they were to be killed. A present of some tobacco soon quieted their fears, and the man was persuaded to come on board, and seemed very much interested in all he saw. A looking-glass astonished him more than all the rest. At first he was alarmed at it, and then, after over- coming his fears, was greatly amused. He did not know the taste of brandy or whiskey, and when offered some made a wry face and spat it out in evident disgust. Hav- ing lived away from civilization, his tastes had not been educated to such a degree. He put his hands upon the stove, and seemed astonished that it burned him, and even tried it a second time to make sure. The houses of the settlement, ten in number, were built of mud and all con- nected by a subterranean passage. They were arranged in a circle, with a common entrance to the passage in the center." Following the track of the Jeannettc, Captain Hooper next visited St. Michaels, June 22d, where he met Messrs. Newman and Nelson, two Americans residing there. " These gentlemen," wrote Hooper, "live quite comfortably. They THE CORWIN AT ST. MICHAELS. 31 have about a dozen log-houses, which they use for dwellings and storehouses, enclosed in a stockade. Some of the more civilized natives are employed as domestics. An Indian village about half a mile from the trading-post consists of about thirty houses and a dance-house. These houses con- tain two rooms. The first, or outer one, is built half under ground and has a frnme roof covered with earth. The inner room is entirely under ground, and is readied through a small opening in the back of the front room. These natives are a lazy, worthless people. The only sign of civilization noticeable among them is their fondness for whiskey and tobacco." Two weeks later Captain Hooper again visited St. Michaels, and found the place much changed in appearance. The snow and ice were all gone, the hillsides were covered with wild flowers, and the air was thick with mosquitoes. The traders of the two companies located here had also arrived from the different trading-posts of the interior, some of which are 2,000 miles from the coast. These traders come to St. Michaels every spring as soon as the ice leaves the rivers: they bring in Ilie furs purchased during the winter. get a new supply of trade goods, and return apparently satisfied with their lot. "I was," says Captain Hooper, "particularly impressed with the line physique of the Indians whom they brought down with them. They are very much superior to the co;is! Indians, resembling more in appearance the Indians seen on the plains, having piercing black eyes, long, muscular limbs, and erect figures, showing courage, strength, and endurance. " These Indians live by hunting bears, moose, wolves, and reindeer, and trap mink and foxes. In the summer they hunt with guns ; in the winter, when game cannot run fast on account of the snow, the bow and arrow are used. Black bears are killed with a knife or spear. It is considered dis- graceful to shoot them. When an Indian meets a black bear, he approaches within a few feet ; the bear stops, faces him, and rises on his haunches, prepared to give him a hug. The o2 THE JKANNKTTE AIK.TIC EXPEDITION. Indian then draws his knife with great deliberation, and ad- dressing the bear says: 'I know yon are not afraid; but neither am I. I am as brave as you arc/ Then advancing cautiously, he improves the first opportunity when Bruin is off his guard to give him a thrust with the knife in a vital spot, and the savage has one more deed of valor to boast of to his friends Avhen they gather in their dance-house to 'ung-to-ah,' a ceremony which consists of dancing around the fire and relating, in a kind of song or chant, to the music of a drum, their deeds of daring in the past, and indulging in promises of still more glorious ones in the future. "The result of the conflict, however, is not always entirely in the Indian's favor; the bear sometimes gets the best of it, and handles the savage very roughly. We saw several natives who bore the marks of very severe scalp wounds re- ceived in encounters with bears." After his first visit to St. Michaels, Captain Hooper steamed westward to St. Lawrence Island, to investigate the reported wholesale starvation of the natives during the two or three preceding winters. " We stopped," he says, " off the first village, about mid- night of June 2oth, and found the village entirely deserted, with sleds, boat-frames, paddles, spears, bows and arrows, etc., strewn in everv direction. We found no dead bodies, V probably missed them in the faint twilight, as we subsequently learned at the west end of the island that they had all died. From the number of houses, boats, etc., we estimated the number of those who had died to be about fifty. " On the 2t>th we followed along tiie north side of the island, examining the villages as we came to them. At Cape Siepermo we found the village deserted, not a sign of life re- maining. I counted fifty-four dead bodies, and as these were nearly all full-grown males, there can be no doubt that many more died. The women and children doubtless died first, and were buried. Most of those seen were just outside the village, with their sleds beside them, evidently having been dragged out by the survivors, as they died, until they, be com- THE STARVED ISLANDERS. 38 ing too weak for further exertion, went into their houses and, covering themselves with skins, lay down and died. In many of the houses we saw from one to four dead bodies. " About fifteen miles west of Cape Siepermo we found another village, also entirely deserted. Here we saw twelve dead bodies, all full-grown males. As at the other villages, the women and children had probably been buried, as we saw none. The number of dead at this place was estimated at thirty. At a large settlement on the northwest end of the island, which we next visited, we found about three hundred natives alive. Two hundred had died, and the entire popu- lation had barely escaped starvation by eating their dogs and the walrus-hides covering their boats ;md houses. At a set- tlement on the north \vest end the natives said a laru'e num- ber had died, but how many they could not tell. They said the weather was cold and stormy for a long time, with great quantities of ice and snow, so that they could not hunt wal- rus and seal: and as they make no provision for the future, but depend upon what they can get from day to day, of course failure means starvation. "These people live directly in the track of vessels bound into the Arctic Ocean for the purpose of whaling or trading. They make houses, bouts, clothing, etc., of the skins of wal- rus and seals, and sell the bones and ivory to traders for rum and breech-loading arms. As long as the rum lasts they do nothing but drink and light. They had a few furs, some of which we tried to buy to make Arctic clothing; but, notwith- standing their terrible experience in the past, they refused to sell for anything but whiskey, rifles, or cartridges." It is gratifying to know that Captain Hooper succeeded in capturing two whiskey-trading schooners, and that they were dealt with according to law. The season for northern search having now arrived, Cap- tain Hooper passed through Bering's Straits into the Arctic, Sea, and made five distinct attempts to reach high latitude, but. without extraordinary success. On the 20th of August 34 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. he was within three miles of Herald Island, and on the llth of September he was within twenty-five miles of Wrangel Land ; but even these positions were only attained after steaming long distances through labyrinthian lanes, and coming in contact with large bodies of floating ice. The Corwin sailed hither and thither, across the open por- tions of the Arctic basin, and much interesting information relating to the native tribes, natural history, and geology of the region was gathered ; but no trace of the Jeannette or missing whalers was found, and at the close of the Arctic summer the Corwin returned to San Francisco. The following extracts are from Captain Hooper's account of his voyage : "In that part of the Arctic visited by the Corwin the ice is quite different from the ice in the vicinity of Greenland. No immense icebergs raise their frozen peaks hundreds of feet in the air. The highest ice seen by us during the sea- son would not exceed fifty feet in height. The average height of the main pack is from ten to fifteen feet, with hummocks that rise twenty or thirty feet. The specific gravity of sea ice is 91 ; hence only about a tenth is visible above the surface of the water. A field of twenty feet in height may have a depth of nearly two hundred feet. This enormous^ thickness is caused by one layer of ice being forced upon another by the action of wind and current. The greatest thickness it attains by freezing is about eighteen feet. At that depth ice ceases to be a conductor of tem- perature. "Along the edge of the pack, during the summer, is gen- erally found a belt of drift ice varying in width according to the direction of the wind. When the wind blows off the pack, drift ice is frequently found fifteen or twenty miles from the main body. At times the pack itself opens in leads, by which it may be penetrated for several miles. In venturing within the limits of the pack, however, a sharp watch must be kept on the movements of the ice, and a re- treat made at the first indication of its closing. THE NORTHERN PACK. 85 " A vessel beset in the pack is as helpless as if she were far inland, while there is imminent danger of being crushed at any moment. When the wind blows on the pack, the drift ice becomes as close ns the pack itself. In addition to the constant twisting, turning, breaking, and piling up of the ice, the whole body has a northern set, moving very slowly, but none the less surely. " Having visited every part of the Arctic that it was pos- sible for a vessel to reach, penetrating the icy regions in all directions fifty to one hundred miles further than any vessel succeeded in doing last year, without being able to find the slightest trace or gain the least tidings of the missing whalers, we were forced to the conclusion that they had bcm. crushed and carried north in the pack, and that their crews had perished. Had any of them survived the winter it seems almost certain that they would have been found either by the Corwin or by some of the whalers, all of whom were on the lookout for them during the summer. It was thought possi- ble that the crews might have escaped over the ice and reached Herald Island, but a sight of the perpendicular sides of that most inhospitable-looking place soon banished even this small hope. " I have no fears for the safety of the officers and crew of the Jeannette. The fact that they have not been heard from seems to indicate that the vessel is safe, and that they consider themselves able to remain another year at least." Many of the desolate places which the Corwin sighted or touched at had been visited and named by English naviga- tors in search of Franklin. A correspondent of the New York Herald speaks of some of them as follows : " Notable among those on the Asiatic coast is Emma Har- bor, Plover Bay, Siberia, where Captain Moore wintered in the Plover in 1848-49. It is surrounded on nearly all sides by lofty, barren mountains, whose summits, reaching into the clouds, give them an air of desolate grandeur. Their geolo- gical formation is quite remarkable, seemingly nothing more than colossal piles of broken bowlders and fragments of rock. 36 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. "On the American side, the western extremity of the New- World, Cape Prince of Wales, terminates as a bold, ragged promontory, whose celebrated peak, being joined to the main- land by a low ridge of hills, gives it at a distance the appear- ance of standing alone in the ocean. ESKIMO FAMILY NEAR CAPE PRINCE OF WALES. " Near the head of Kotzebue Sound we found on Chamisso Island, about two hundred feet above the sea level, an astro- nomical station, composed of a mound of earth and stones, on the top of which was a wooden shaft about twelve feet high, and bearing carved inscriptions of several English ships Blossom, Herald, Plover. To these was added the 'Corwin 1880.' Near by was another shaft with the names of some Russian vessels. " About forty miles south of Bering's Straits is a remarka- ble rocky island, named King's Island by Captain Cook. Its cliffs, almost perpendicular on all sides, rise to the height of 750 feet. It is surrounded by bold water, enabling ships to AN ESQUIMAUX EYRIE. 37 approach to within a very short distance of the shore. This Arctic Gibraltar minus the fortifications has a ragged out- line, and its surface is composed principally of stone covered with mosses and lichens, but neither tree nor shrub nor grass is to be found. Noticeable on the most elevated points are a number of stone columns resembling the remains of a Druidical place of worship, or the ruins of some old feudal castle. " But the most noteworthy feature of the island is the village, composed chiefly of houses excavated in the rocks on a slope of somewhat less than forty-five degrees, and from one to two hundred feet above the sea. At a distance it looks not unlike the resort of some of the sea-fowl who choose these isolated spots to hatch and rear their young. The wonder naturally arises, what are the attractions and capabilities of such a place, that the simple-minded Esqui- maux should select it as an abode ? All of which can be answered in one word walrus. Near the village is a cave, used by the natives as a store-house or crypt for food, the en- trance to which is not unlike an immense gable window. " More space might be devoted to a detailed description of what may not inappropriately be called an Esquimaux eyrie, rivaling in interest the lacustrine villages of Switzerland, so remote and unique is its position ; but we will only conclude by saying that the traveler and the archaeologist may go far in their journeyings and researches before finding a place that shall equal in grotesqueness this far away Walhalla of the walrus family." The fact that nothing was heard of the Jeannette during the season of 1880 did not cause general serious apprehen- sions for her safety, and some Arctic navigators considered it a good omen a promise that the expedition would be a successful one, and that the purposes for which it was sent out would be accomplished. On this subject Lieutenant Weyprecht, of the Austro-Hungarian Arctic expedition of 1872, wrote as follows : "I cannot see any reason for being more anxious about 38 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. the Jeannette now than on the day when she entered the ice. A ship, whose object is discoveries in uninhabited re- gions, cannot be expected to remain in communication with home. I know the Jeannette to be well adapted for Arctic service, and she is provisioned for three years, so Mr. DeLong has no reason to linger about the outer ice for the benefit of those who are expecting news. The absence of news, and the failure of the Corwin to obtain information, must be contemplated as a symptom of success, the Jean- nette having probably wintered in regions inaccessible to trading ships. With all the resources at his disposition, Mr. DeLong cannot be expected to return so early without hav- ing completely fulfilled his task, if not compelled by very pressing motives, such as scurvy among his crew, or the loss of the ship." TATTOOED WOMAN OF ST. LAWRENCE ISLAND. CHAPTER HI. SEARCHES FOR THE JEANNETTE 1881. (SECOND CRUISE OF THE CORWIN.) AS the spring of 1881 drew on without bringing any news of the Jeannette, it was deemed wise to carry out some concerted plan of action for the discovery of the whereabouts of the ship and her crew. Petitions for government aid and action were presented to Congress, and Hon. Charles P. Daly, President of the American Geographical Society, in an eloquent letter to the President of the United States, urged the sending out of a search expedition. Subsequently, early in March, Congress authorized the Secretary of the Na.vy to expend $175,000 for a suitable ship audits equipments, to be manned wholly by volunteers from the navv. and to be sent north to search for the Jeannette. A little later, Secretary Hunt convened at the Navy Depart- ment a board of officers, to whom the duty was intrusted of suggesting and advising as to the best plan for conducting the government sea relies for the Jeannette. The Jeannette Relief Expedition Board was composed of Rear-Admiral JolmRodgers, Captain James A. Greer, Lieu- tenant-Commander Henry C. White, Lieutenant William P. Randall, Lieutenant R. M. Berry (recorder), Paymaster Al- bert S. Kenny, and Surgeon Jerome S. Kidder. They were officers of great experience, and most of them had been identified with earlier Arctic expeditions and explorations in that region. After thoroughly investigating the whole sub- ject, they made a full report, in which they stated their views as to the direction of the search, and the best means for car- rying it out. (39) 40 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. During the summer of 1881, three well-appointed expedi- tions in the Corwin, the Rodgers, and the Alliance sailed northward from the United States expressly to search for the Jeannette. Two other expeditions, also, which went out primarily for scientific purposes, were instructed to keep a sharp lookout for the Jeannette, and to consider it an im- portant part of their duty. The first of these was under the command of Lieutenant Greely, with a station at Lady Franklin Bay, in Smith Sound ; and the second was located at. Point Barrow, the northern extremity of Alaska, under command of Lieutenant Ray. Nor were the Search Expeditions of 1881 confined to the United States. England was represented by Mr. Leigh Smith, a private gentleman, who, in his little yacht, the Eira, gallantly took upon himself the task of searching in the re- gion of Franz Josef Land; an exploring expedition under Dutch auspices, in the ship Wilhelm Barentz, volunteered to make the search for the Jeannette a part of its programme ; Russian men-of-war were directed to do what they could for the discovery and relief of the lost explorers ; the nomad inhabitants of Northern Siberia were requested to be on the lookout for any survivors of the expedition who might reach their coast ; and M. Soulkowsky, a Russian, traveled over- land from Irkutsk to Bering's Strait, through Siberia, on the same errand. The first Jeannette Search Expedition to leave the United States in the year 1881, steamed out of San Francisco harbor in the revenue steamer Corwin, on the 4th day of May. The occasion was one of much friendly interest, and thousands of people assembled to witness the departure of the explorers. The officers of the Corwin on this voyage were as follows : Captain Charles L. Hooper, Commander. First Lieutenant, W. J. Herring. Second Lieutenant, E. Burke. Third Lieutenants, O. B. Myrick, George H. Doty, Wm. E. Reynolds. Chief Engineer, J. T. Wayson. Assistant Engineers, C. A. Laws, E. Owen. Surgeon, Irving C. Rosse. Scientist, Professor John Muir. SECOND CRUISE OF THE CORWIN. 41 Ten days after leaving San Francisco the Corwin was within sight of the Aleutian Islands, and a little later was anchored in the bay at the southern end of Ounalaska, to the leeward of a high mountain. The natives came out from the shore to welcome back the little cutter which had visited them the preceding year. The next halt was made at Seal Islands, May 23d ; ice was sighted on the 24th ; and the Corwin arrived at St. Lawrence Island on the 28th. The natives appeared to be well sup- plied with food, but lamented the non-arrival of trading ves- sels with whiskey, as in former years. The voyage was re- sumed the same night. Having been informed that a story was in circulation among the natives along the coast to the effect that a party of seal-hunters, while on the ice near Cape North, in Novem- ber, 1880, had discovered and boarded two wrecked vessels (supposed from the description given of them to be the missing whalers, Mount Wollaston and Vigilant), Captain Hooper resolved to fit out a land party to follow the coast north and west, to investigate this report, and search for the Jeannette. He stopped at St. Lawrence Bay to procure dogs for the party, but the natives would neither sell nor lend any. When told of the object of the excursion, they shook their heads, and said : " No use ; all dead " ; and would have nothing to do with it. At a village a little beyond Cape Serdze, Captain Hooper was more successful. "Following the coast," he says, "'to the westward, we came to a settlement of Chukches, behind an island called by the natives Tupkan, which is about one mile long, one- fourth of a mile wide, and 150 feet high. It lies a mile off shore. Along the coast we found a rim of ice from five to thirty feet high, and extending from two to ten miles off shore. At our landing-place it was quite narrow, but so rough and hummocky that it seemed to us impassable, and we were about to give up the attempt and return to the ships when we saw some natives going in the direction of the vessel, about a mile further north. Taking our boat we 42 THE JEANXETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. rowed to a point opposite them, and getting out on the ice we waited for them to approach, which they did with some caution, as if they were not quite sure what our intentions were. However, a few words from our interpreter, Joe, and a present of some tobacco, soon quieted their fears and established friendly relations between us. At first they denied all knowledge of the report in regard to the wrecks, but subsequently, having acknowledged that they had heard of it, they told so many wonderful tales that we were in- clined to doubt them all. "After some persuasion and promises of liberal re\vards, two of them consented to accompany us if we would shoot walrus for their families to subsist upon during their absence. This we readily promised, provided we could find the walrus : but as none were in sight, and we could not spare the time to hunt for them, we compromised by giving them a few pounds of tobacco. One of them proved to be such a. great talker that Joe, who was a man of very few words, said, ;ifter listening to him awhile, ' I think its more better we don't take this fellow; too much talk,' and in deference to Joe's wishes the loquacious Tupkan was left behind. The other, a large, quiet, good-natured fellow, accompanied us, and was found useful, although given to romancing. He seemed to think we were in search of information which it was his special province to supply, and some of the flights of imagination he indulged in were truly surprising, consider- ing that he had never received any of the advantages of a civilized education." The Corwin now steamed northward through a lane of open water, between the pack and the shore ice, until June 1st, when, in latitude 68 10' north, longitude 176 48' west, the end of the lead was reached. They had run up this lead for over one hundred miles, and it had been foggy or snowing most all of the time since they entered it, so that often they could not see more than the length of the vessel. The Corwin now stood to the eastward under sail. No land could be seen, a dense snow-storm prevailed, and a hard PLOVER BAY. 43 gale from the north brought down large quantities of ice. During the night the rudder was broken off by coming in contact with heavy ice. The next day the explorers steamed southeast along the edge of the shore ice, keeping a sharp lookout for land. The lead was closing rapidly behind them, and there was dan- ger of being frozen in. Toward night it stopped snowing, and an island was in full view. The ship w;is stopped, and the land party, consisting of Lieutenants Herring and Rey- nolds, one seaman, and two natives, were put ashore. They took with them twenty-five dogs, four sleds, a skin boat, pro- visions for two months, etc. They Avere directed to go as far westward as Cape Yakan, if possible-, and to rejoin the Cor- win at Cape Serdze. After seeing the party fairly started, the Corwin was headed south for Plover Bay, Sil>cri;i. The approach to this place, and the appearance of the coast, is thus described :- " In the afternoon of the 12th the sea became smooth and glassy as a mountain lake, and the clouds lifted, gradually unveiling the Siberian coast up to the lops of the mountains. First the black bluffs standing close to the \\ atcr came in sight, then the white slopes, and then one summit after an- other until a continuous range, forty or fifty miles long, could be seen from one point of view, forming a very beautiful landscape. Smooth, dull, dark water in the foreground ; next a broad belt of ice, mostly white like snow, with numer- ous masses of blue and black shade among its jagged, up- lifted blocks. Then a strip of comparatively low shore, black and gray; and then back of that the pure, white moun- tains, with only here and there dark spots, where the rock faces are too steep for snow to lie upon." After visiting St. Michael's, Norton Sound, Captain Hoop- er returned to Cape Serdze, and took the land excursionists on board. ' They had been absent twenty-eight days, and had been along the Asiatic coast to a place called Cape Wanker- em, where they found the parties who had boarded the wreck, and obtained from them a number of articles taken from it, 44 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. which have since been identified as belonging to the missing whaling-bark Vigilant, and others to Captain Nye, of the Mount Wollaston, which would seem to indicate that both crews had been on board the Vigilant. It is not unlikely that, both vessels being caught, it was decided by their cap- tains, who were both skillful sailors and men of great courage and energy, to unite their forces on the best vessel, and that a subsequent break-up of the ice released it, and enabled them to reach some point near where the wreck was discovered before again becoming embayed. SLEDGING ON THE SIBEKIAN COAST. " The statement made by the natives was, that they were out sealing on the ice, when, seeing a dark object, they ap- proached it, and it was found to be the hull of a vessel, with masts, bulwarks, and boats gone, and the hold partly filled with water. In the cabin were four corpses, three on the floor and one in a berth. After taking what they could carry home, night coming on, they left the wreck, with the inten- tion of returning in the morning ; but during the night the wind, which had been from the northward, changed to south- west, and the wreck was not seen again, having drifted away or sunk. " The sledge party had also met traveling parties of Chuk- EXPLORATION OF HERALD ISLAND. 45 ches from the vicinity of Cape Yakan, on their way to East Cape, and from them learned that no white men had been seen on the coast. These people are constantly travel- ing back and forth, and it would be almost impossible for any one landing on the coast to escape their notice." From Cape Serdze Captain Hooper went to Cape Lisburne, a bold, rocky promontory on the northwestern coast of Alaska, to get a supply of coal from a mine in that vicinity. He then headed northwesterly, and succeeded in getting within half a mile of Herald Island. The ship was an- chored to the shore ice July 30th, and a party immediately landed. Professor John Muir, the scientist of the expedition, describes the exploration of the island as follows : " After so many futile efforts had been made to reach this little ice-bound island, everybody seemed wildly eager to run ashore and climb to the summit of its sheer granite cliffs. At first a party of eight jumped from the bowsprit chains and ran across the narrow belt of margin ice, and madly began to climb up an excessively steep gully, which came to an end in an inaccessible slope a few hundred feet above the water. Those ahead loosened and sent down a train of granite bowlders, which shot over the heads of those below in a far more dangerous manner than any of the party seemed to appreciate. Fortunately nobody was hurt, and all made out to get down in safety. " While this remarkable piece of mountaineering and Arctic exploration was in progress, a light skin-covered boat was dragged over the ice and launched on a strip of water that stretched in front of an accessible ravine, the bed of an ancient glacier, which I felt assured would conduct by an easy grade to the summit of the island. The slope of this ravine, for the first one hundred feet or so, was very steep; but, inasmuch as it was full of firm, icy snow, it was easily ascended by cutting steps in the face of it with an axe that I had brought from the ship for the purpose. Beyond this there was not the slightest difficulty in our way, the glacier having graded a fine, broad road. 46 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. "Kellet, who discovered this island in 1849, and landed on it under unfavorable circumstances, describes it as an inaccessible rock. The sides are, indeed, in general, extremely sheer and precipitous all around, though skilled mountain- eers would find many gullies and slopes by which they might, reach the summit. I first pushed on to the head of the gla- cier valley, and thence along the backbone of the island to the highest point, which I found to be about one thousand two hundred feet above the level of the sea. This point is about a mile and a half from the northwest end, and four and a half from the northeast end, thus making the island about six miles in length. It has been cut nearly in two l>v the glacial action it has undergone, the width at this lowest portion being about half a mile, and the average width about two miles. The entire island is a mass of granite, w T ith the exception of a patch of metamorphic slate near the center, and no doubt owes its existence with so considerable a height to the superior resistance this granite offered to the degrad- ing action of the northern ice sheet, traces of which are here plainly shown. . . . This little island, standing, as it does, alone out in the Polar sea, is a fine glacial monument. "The midnight hour I spent alone on the highest summit, one of the most impressive hours of my life. The deepest silence seemed to press down on all the vast, immeasurable, virgin landscape. The sun near the horizon reddened the edges of belted cloud-bars near the base of the sky, and the jagged ice-bowlders crowded together over the frozen ocean stretching indefinitely northward, while more than a hun- dred miles of that mysterious Wrangel Land was seen blue in the northwest a wavering line of hill and dale over the white and blue ice-prairie and pale gray mountains beyond, well calculated to fix the eye of a mountaineer; but it was to the far north that I ever found myself turning, where the ice met the sky. "I would fain have watched here all the strange night, but was compelled to remember the charge given me by the captain, to make haste and return to the ship as soon as I EXPLORATION OF HERALD ISLAND. 4 should find it possible, as there was ten miles of shifting, drifting ice between us and the open sea. I therefore began the return journey about one o'clock this morning, after tak- ing the compass bearings of the principal points within sight on Wra.ngel Land and making a hasty collection of the flowering plants on my way. . . . ^.f A BIRD NURSERY. "Innumerable gulls and murres breed on the steep cliffs, the latter most abundant. They kept up a constant din of domestic notes. Some of them are sitting on their eggs, others have young; and it seems astonishing that either eggs or the young can find a resting-place on cliffs so severely precipitous. The nurseries formed a lively picture, the parents coming and going with food or to seek it, thou- 48 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. sands in rows, standing on narrow ledges like bottles on a grocer's shelves, the feeding of the little ones, the multitude of wings, etc." Another member of the exploring party described his experiences as follows : " Selecting what was conceived to be the most favorable spot for ascending the cliff, several persons made the attempt, occasionally detaching huge bowl- ders, which came bounding down like a bombardment, and recalling some old army experiences. The attempt had to be abandoned after getting up a few hundred feet. In com- pany with several others, the writer tried what seemed to be a more practicable way a gully filled with snow up which we had gone scarcely a hundred feet when, looking back with affright and forward with despair, we literally backed down with failing hearts and trembling limbs. In the meantime the skin boat had been brought over the ice; and, one of the men pointing out another place where he thought we might ascend, it was the work of but a few minutes to cross a small bit of open water which led to the foot of a steep snow-bank, somewhat discolored from the gravel brought down by melting snow from above. We climbed several hundred feet up the snow and ice, having to cut steps before reaching the top. It was like scrambling over the dome of the Washington capitol with a great yawning cliff below. A ravine was next reached, through which tumbled, with loud noise and wild confusion, over broken rocks and amid some scant lichens and mosses, a mountain stream of pure water, which had hollowed out a shaft or tunnel, forming a glacier mill or moulin. It was over the roof of this tunnel that we had passed. "All sense of fatigue vanished on reaching this summit. The grand view there revealed like an apocalypse made one halt with feelings of mingled delight and astonishment. In front the midnight sun shone with gleaming splendor, color- ing all the waste of ice, sea, and granite. To the left Wrangel Land appeared in well-defined outline, and to the northward an open sea led we knew not whither. From the A CAIRN ERECTED. 49 middle of the island two or three points of the land bore southwest by west deceptively. In shape the island is something like a boot, with a depression at the instep. In the extreme west were seen a number of jagged peaks and splintered pinnacles of granite, some of them resembling giant remains of ancient sculpture, all worse for exposure to the weather." The island was searched carefully for traces of the miss- ing ships, but none were found, or anything to indicate that the island had ever before been visited. The only signs of life seen, excepting the birds, were a small fox and a polar bear. On a high promontory, at the northeast point, a cairn was erected, in which was placed a bottle containing written information and a copy of the New York Herald. After leaving Herald Island, July 31st, the Corwin cruised for several days off the coast of Wrangel Land, following along the edge of the ice-pack, running into leads, and trying to reach the land, but never being able to approach nearer than twenty miles. As it was impossible to effect a landing until there was a decided change in the condition of the ice, Hooper withdrew southerly, moving through floating ice, and reached the mouth of Wankerem River, on the Siberian coast. While skirting along the coast they fell in with a number of wandering Yoraks, who had herds of reindeer. The 10th of August found the explorers again on the edge of the ice-pack, off the south end of Wrangel Land. On the evening of the llth they entered a lead, and had approached to within eight miles of land, when a dense fog stopped fur- ther progress. The next morning, after squeezing through heavy ice for two hours, they reached a small space of open water, and anchored about three hundred feet from the beach. The cutter was lowered, and Captain Hooper, Lieu- tenant Reynolds, Engineer Owen, and others started for the shore. The party landed, and looked anxiously around for traces of the missing seamen, but they looked in vain ; their own 4 50 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. voices alone broke the solitude. On a high cliff Lieutenant Reynolds set up a pole of drift wood, to which was attached an American flag, and a bottle containing a record of the visit. The country was taken possession of in the name of the United States of America, and rechristened New Columbia. As the flag fluttered in the breeze a salute was fired from the ship, and cheers were given by the crew and the land party. " The great distance to which slight sounds are sometimes transmitted in the Arctic regions is remarkable. Amid the grim silence of Wrangel Land, at a time when the air was acoustically opaque for that latitude, the voice of the boat- swain giving orders two miles away was distinctly heard by the land party, while laughter and words spoken above the ordinary tone were heard with such amazing distinctness as to suggest telephonic communication." The river where the Corwin anchored was named Clark River, in honor of Mr. E. W. Clark, the Chief of the Revenue Marine. It was about one hundred yards wide, and deep and rapid, and from the top of the cliffs near by it could be seen extending back into the mountains a distance of forty miles. The mountains, devoid of snow, and seen under very favorable circumstances through a rift in the clouds, ap- peared brown and naked. " Our stay on shore," says Captain Hooper, " was necessa- rily short, on account of the strong northerly current which was sweeping the ice-pack along with irresistible force. At half-past nine A.M., being unable to hold our position any longer, we commenced to work out toward the lead, which we reached at eleven A.M. We examined the shore line with our glasses while approaching and leaving the land, north and south, and saw nothing but perpendicular cliffs of slate, from one to three hundred feet high, the sloping banks of the river being the only place for miles where a party travel- ing over the ice would be able to affect a landing." Captain Hooper now sailed to the eastward, and on the 16th reached Point Barrow, where he found a portion of the crew of the whaling-ship Daniel Webster, which had been WRECK OF THK WEBSTER. 51 crushed by the closing of a lead, to the north end of which it had sailed. The captain of the Webster only realized his danger when it was too late. In half an hour after the lead began to close behind him, his ship was crushed, and thrown over on the ice, a wreck. The crew escaped to the shore, and some of them had gone overland to Icy Cape. Nine of the crew were taken aboard the Corwin. Leaving Point Barrow, August 18th, the Corwin ran south- erly to Plover Bay, Siberia, a distance of 600 miles, and ar- rived there the 24th. The Golden Fleece was anchored in the harbor, having on board Lieutenant Ray and his party, bound for Point Barrow to establish a signal station, and from them Captain Hooper first learned of the assassination of President Garfield. The natives were very friendly, and reported that the Rodgers had been there eight days previous, and that a Russian man-of-war had gone up the coast. An excursion up the bay is thus described by the Herald correspondent : " Having turned over to Lieutenant Ray two of our dog-sledges and a quantity of furs, we towed his ves- sel to sea, and returning took the steam-launch, with two natives, and started up the bay to visit some Reindeer Chuk- ches, about twenty miles off. Soon the busy little launch was spinning through the water, and the rhythmic grind of her machinery greatly astonished the natives. I asked one of them, by way of banter, ' Why don't you people build a boat like this ?' To which he replied, pressing his hand on his forehead, 'Ah, too much think --too much think." " Arrived at the deer-man's, we found his house, or rather his ovoidal tent, between two high mountains, and at the foot of a valley, which extended back in the clear air many miles of picturesque distance amid other mountains, remarkable if not unique on account of their desolate grandeur. On mak- ing known the object of our visit, the old man despatched two of his sons, lithe, nimble fellows, who started off in a trot, each with a long spear, over the mountains in the di- rection of the deer pasture. As they were gone some five or six hours, I amused myself in the meantime by climbing 52 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. over 2,000 feet up the steep side of the nearest mountain. It may be the amusement of a small mind, but it was great fun to detach several large bowlders of a ton or more and see them go tearing and thundering down the rocky incline. Among other things there was noticeable on the side of this mountain a tunnel under the snow of several hundred feet in length. It had been caused by a brisk stream, and reminded one of a sewer some eight or ten feet in height. " After exploring this somewhat curious sight, my atten- tion was next directed to the herd of deer coming slowly down the valley. Pretty, quiet, meek-looking animals they were as they stood chewing their cuds, and allowing them- selves to be photographed without the least fear. So tame and gentle were they that I patted and stroked a number of them. The herd, numbering something less than two hun- dred, were of different colors, several being perfectly white, and others fawn-colored, while several were spotted like cir- cus-horses, and most of them were shedding the hairy muffle from their horns, which, in several instances, was hanging in shreds, and obstructing their eyesight. " Selecting two young males from the herd, they were killed and skinned, and one of the young men, stripping himself to the waist, and being assisted by two others, took the carcasses to the boat for us ; and after paying him in tobacco, flour, and several small articles, we hastened down the bay as fast as the little launch could run." August 27th found the Corwin returning northward. A short stop was made at the Diomedes on the 28th. Over the tops of these islands hung dense, misty clouds, unmoved by a sharp northeast gale, which seemed only to have the effect of producing the phenomena known as cloud banners. Among other things seen at the Diomedes was a collection of ivory carvings toys, spinning-tops, chairs, etc. As the boat approached shore a number of girls stopped playing, and sat their dolls up in a row, so that they might get a good look at the strangers. At noon, on the 30th of August, the blue peaks of Wran- AN ESQUIMAUX LONG BRANCH. . r >S gel Land were again in view ; but progress toward them was stopped by ice when twenty miles distant from land. Daring the flight the Corwin stood along the ice-pack, and the next morning found her hove to off Herald Island. A fierce gale was blowing, during which the iron ice-breaker was lost ; and as the oak sheathing was entirely gone around the bows (leaving nothing to break ice with but three-and- oiie-half-inch Oregon fir plank), it was not deemed prudent to venture into the ice again. The gale lasted several days, and, after it had subsided, the Corwin cruised leisurely east- ward, into the vicinity of Kotzebue Sound. Near the entrance of Hotham Inlet is an Esquimaux Long Branch, where the natives resort in summer for trade and pleasure, and about six hundred were there assembled when the Corwin arrived. " Here the Captain and the Herald correspondent, enter- ing into competition with the natives in several kinds of athletics, and coming out ahead, were invited to shoot with a bow and arrow at a mark which had been missed several times. It was not an archery club, composed of young ladies and spooney men, against which we had to contend, but the real live, primitive man, who procured his dinner by means of the spear and feathered shaft. So the captain, resolving himself into a toxopholite, and pulling himself together for a mighty effort, discharged his arrow, and. through pure accident, succeeded in driving it into the tar- get the first shot of course refusing to shoot a second time to the great surprise of the unsuspecting bystand- ers." On the 14th of September the voyagers left the Arctic sea and started for home. At St. Michaels they were obliged to take on board the already over-crowded ship a party of shipwrecked men, who, after twenty-one days of privation, had reached St. Michaels from Golovin Bay. On the 21st of October they arrived at San Francisco. CHAPTER IV. SEARCHES FOR THE JEANNETTE 1881. (SUMMER CRUISE OP THE RODGERS.) ON the 16th day of June, 1881, two United States steam- ships, commanded and manned by officers and seamen of the United States navy all of whom had volunteered for the perilous service started north to join in the search for DeLong. One of them the Alliance went from Nor- folk navy yard, on the Atlantic, and the other one the Rodgers steamed out through the Golden Gate of the Pacific coast. Only three months before her departure, the Rodgers was known in San Francisco as the Mary and Helen, a staunch and ice-tried steam-whaler of 420 tons. She was built in Bath, Maine, in 1879, was bark rigged, and carried a great spread of canvas. Her length was one hundred and fifty- five feet, breadth of beam thirty feet, depth sixteen feet. She -was bought by the Secretary of the Navy for $100,000, and re-named the Rodgers, in compliment to the distin- guished naval officer who was the president of the Jeannette Relief Board. The Rodgers was overhauled and strengthened at the navy yard, Mare Island, and ample provisions and supplies for her own crew during a long voyage, and for the relief of any ship- wrecked seamen who might be fallen in with, were taken on board. The command of the expedition was given to Lieut. Robert M. Berry, a native of Kentucky, an officer in whom the Navy Department had the greatest confidence. All of the officers, as well as the crew, were volunteers ; and, as on previous occasions, when bold and hazardous services have been required of our naval officers, it was difficult for (54) CRUISE OF THK RODGEBS. 55 the Department to make a selection out of the many gallant men who volunteered for this adventurous expedition. The officers and crew of the Rodgers were as follows : Lieutenant Robert M. Berry, Commander. Master Howard S. Waring, Master Charles F. Putnam. Ensigns, Henry .1. Hunt, George M. Stoney. Surgeons, Meredith D. Jones, Joaquin D. Castillo. Engineer, Abraham V. Zane. Pay Clerk, W. H. Gilder. H. P. DeTracey, Joseph F. Quirk, W. F. Morgan, Frederick Brucli, Joseph Hodgson, W. Rohde, Frank Burk, Hans Schumann, Fred Smith, Patrick Cahill, George Gardner, S. W. Morrison, Richard Bush, Julius Huebner, Jacob Johansen, Thomas London, Frank McShane, Frank F. Mi-lm, Olaf Petersen, Otto Polte, Owen McCarthy, W. H. Derring, Edward O'Leary. Dominic Booker, steward. Robert Morelli, Wm. Grace, cooks. Mr. Gilder, the pay clerk, who was also the special corres- pondent of the New York Herald, accompanied Lieutenant Schwatka on his overland journey in King- William's Land in 1879, and was the historian of that expedition. Frank F. Melm was also a member of Schwatka's party. The crew were fine-looking, hardy men, and most of them crossed the continent by railroad to join the expedition. A short time before starting on his voyage Lieutenant Berry received a letter from the Hon. W. H. Hunt, Secreta- ry of the Navy, from which the following is an extract :- "In the pursuit of your adventurous and arduous voyage you carry with you the sympathy and entire confidence of the department. Nothing that can be done to contribute to your well-being and success shall be omitted. As soon as you are fully ready you will sail. " The eyes of your fellow countrymen, of the scientific men of all the world, and especially of those interested in Arctic explorations, will follow you anxiously on your way through the unknown seas to which you go. May Heaven guard and bless you and your officers and men, and crown your heroism with success and glory." The Rodgers was escorted out to sea by a fleet of pleasure yachts, steamboats, and tugs. Thousands of eager specta- 56 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. tors witnessed her departure, waving handkerchiefs and giv- ing cheers, while the whistles of the steamers in the harbor and factories along the shore sounded out their noisy farewell. On the 27th of June the Rodgers was on the Pacific- Ocean, one thousand miles from San Francisco. " On the 29th," wrote a correspondent, " we sighted Oimalaska's high mountains, and on the next day passed within fifty miles of Umnak, and saw the peak of its snow-crested volcano, 5,000 feet high, burst through a cloud and tinged with the glory of the setting sun. It was a gorgeous spectacle. Near it we saw the smoke arising from one of the burning volcanoes of the Four Mountains. The following day we passed into Bering's Sea. " On the 14th of July we crossed the 180th meridian, and were in east longitude. Here is where the mariner takes up one day when sailing toward the west, or drops one if going east. As we were to recross the same meridian in a few days, Lieutenant Berry concluded that we might as well retain our old reckoning. The only difference it made was that we found the religious people of Petropavlovsk holding service on Saturday instead of Sunday, and we were con- stantly in doubt as to whether to-day was really to-day or to- morrow.' : The Rodgers arrived at Petropavlovsk July 19th, and found anchored there the Alaska Commercial Company's steamer Alexander, Captain Sandman, and the Russian corvette, the Strelock, commanded by Captain DeLivron. DeLivron informed Lieutenant Berry that he had been di- rected to assist the searchers for the Jeannette in every way in his power; and during the stay of the Rodgers the Rus- sians extended to her officers the most cordial hospitality. At this place a native was hired as dog-driver, and forty- seven dogs were taken on board, w r hose howls for many hours afterward were something to be remembered by nil who heard them. Petropavlovsk (Ports of Peter and Paul) is the capital of PETROPAVLOVSK. 5T the Kanichatdales, and the only town on the eastern coast of the Kamchatka peninsula. It is situated on the right shore of the splendid Bay of Avatcha, which may claim, with that of San Francisco, to be one of the finest harbors in the world. This little town of 500 inhabitants points with pride to its two monuments of Bering and La Perouse ; and its old forti- fications, now covered with grass and flowers, serve to recall the defeat of the English and French allies, who attacked the village during the Crimean war. REPULSE OP THE ALLIES. It was from Avatcha Bay that Captain Vitus Bering, the first Russian navigator of the strait which bears his name, sailed, in June, 1741, on his last voyage. After discovering the American coast, and the magnificent peak which he named Mount St. Elias, scurvy broke out among his crew, and his ship drifted about at random until November, when it was wrecked on the uninhabited island which still bears his name. Bering and many of his men died on this island. 58 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. in December, and the survivors, thanks to the invincible en- ergy and sanguine disposition of Steller, the physician of the expedition, escaped to Kamchatka, the next summer, in a little ship which they built from the wreck of the St. Paul. Bering Island lies to the northeast of Avatcha Bay, and, together with Copper Island and some small islands and rocks lying round about, forms a peculiar group of islands, separated from the Aleutian Islands proper, named, after the rank of the great seafarer who perished there, Commander's Islands. Though belonging to Russia, the American Alaska SLAUGHTER OF SEA-BEARS. Company has acquired the right of hunting there, and main- tains on the main islands two commercial stations, which supply the inhabitants, several hundred in number, with provisions and supplies ; the company buying of them in ex- change, furs principally the skin of an eared-seal (the sea- cat or sea-bear), of which from 20,000 to 50,000 are killed annually in this region. Some Russian officials are also set- tled on the island, to guard the rights of Russia, and pre- serve order. Leaving Petropavlovsk, July 24th, the vessels in the har- AT ST. MK-HAKL'S. 59 bor dipping their flags as a parting salute, the Rodgers headed for St. Michael's, Alaska, and came to anchor toward night, August 3d, under the shelter of Stuart Island, in Nor- ton Sound, to wait for daylight, as the wind was blowing a gale, and the sea was running high. "The next morning," wrote the Herald correspondent, " we got under way and steamed slowly on our course, in a dismal rain and fog. The lead was kept going constantly, the quartermaster calling in a dreary, monotonous voice the depth of water found at each cast of the lead. Again we were compelled to drop anchor on account of shallow water and the concealment of the few known landmarks under the mist. About eleven o'clock the fog lifted a little, and we could see the small settlement of St. Michael's about seven miles distant, and shortly afterward dropped anchor beyond the point of land that forms a shelter for the harbor, a few antiquated iron guns bellowing forth a salute. The fort of St. Michael's, as it is called, is an enclosure of dwellings and warehouses, the interstices iillod \vith a high wooden fence, that was originally erected as a protection against the as- saults of hostile Indians. The fence of the present day is, however, maintained rather as a shelter against the wind than to guard against savages." From St. Michael's Lieutenant Berry crossed over to Plover Bay, Siberia, and then proceeded north to St. Law- rence Bay, where he found the Strelock anchored in the harbor. After taking on board two Cliukches, as hunters and dog-drivers, the Rodgers again started north August 19th, accompanied by the Russian corvette. The next day was stormy, and the wind blowing so hard that it was diffi- cult to make any headway against it. The Strelock was seen working in shore, but was soon lost sight of, and was seen no more by the crew of the Rodgers. The following morning was clear and pleasant, and Cape Serdze Kainen soon appeared in view. " When we came near the land," says the correspondent, " a skin boat filled with Cliukches came alongside for the purpose of trading. 60 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. They took us to a place which proved to be Kolyutschin Island and bay, where there is a large Chukches settlement. The village consisted of seven large circular dome-like tents, of about twenty feet in diameter, made of seal-skins sewed together, and supported by an intricate arrangement CHURCHES BOATS. of poles of drift-wood. On the side opposite the entrance were arranged three or four sleeping apartments, shut off from the main tent and each other by curtains of reindeer skins. These were the separate tenements of as many fam- ilies, the savage semblance of flats in an apartment-house. The skin drapery of several of these rooms was raised, and upon the beds, which were also of reindeer skins and cov- ered the entire floor of each, sat women engaged in house- hold duties or attending to the wants of a colony of dirty, half nude children. "We sailed the same evening for Herald Island, and at seven P. M., August 23d, obtained our first view of Cape Hawaii, Wrangel Island, about twelve miles distant to the northwest, with the ice extending about ten miles oft the shore. The next morning botli Wrangel Island and Herald Island were in plain sight, and we arrived off the latter at EXPLORATION OF WRANGEL ISLAND. 61 noon the same day. A boat was sent on shore to search for tidings of the Jeannette and missing- whalers. An examin- ation of the western extremity of the island was made, and the remainder scanned from the summit of the highest land with glasses without discovering any traces. "The island was found to be a narrow ridge, between five and six miles long, and not over a quarter of a mile wide at the base. The crest of the western half of the island was so narrow that one could straddle it, while the eastern por- tion was lower and more rounded at the top. The island is not more than about six hundred feet high at the highest point, but from it, the atmosphere being perfectly clear, we could see a long distance. Wrangel Island was in plain view, but no land could be seen to the northward of it as far as the eye could reach. " After the return of the boat we steamed along the south- ern shore of the island without discovering any cairn, and then headed for Cape Hawaii. We sighted the cape at ten A. M., August 25th, and shortly after made the ice along the starboard beam, densely packed; skirted it, and at four P. M. discovered from the masthead a lead, and followed it in. At ten P. M., having passed through about ten miles of ice, we dropped anchor about half a mile from shore in six fath- oms of water. Two boats were lowered at once, and sev- eral of the officers landed on a low, gravelly beach, and gave three hearty cheers, which were responded to by those on board. Two sky-rockets were sent aloft, and when the party returned, one of the officers cut a Christmas cake in honor of the event." Early the next morning, 26th, a boat was sent in to exam- ine a lagoon which had been seen by the landing party, and at its mouth was found an excellent small harbor. The ves- sel was moored in this harbor, and preparations made for the exploration of the island. Three search parties were organized. Lieutenant Berry, Surgeon Jones, and four men were to proceed overland to the northern coast; Master Waring was to go north in a 62 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. whale-boat and skirt the eastern coast; and Ensign Hunt, with a whale-boat, was to explore the southern coast. The boat parties were provided with fifteen days' provisions, and instructed to enciAle the island if possible. The three par- ties got off August 27th, between three and four P. M., and three cheers were given by those remaining on board as each one left the ship's side and started upon its separate route. INTERVIEWING A DENIZEN OP WRANGEL ISLAND. The vessel was left in charge of Master Putnam, who was also intrusted with the magnetic observations, assisted by Ensign Stoney, to whom was assigned the task of surveying the harbor and adjacent coast lines. "The next day, Sunday, the 28th of August," says the correspondent, "was one of the most delightful days ever experienced in this land of storms. " About six o'clock, September 3d, we were about to sit A BEAR HUNT. 63 down to dinner, when two white objects were seen on the mainland near the shore, which the glass showed to be a she bear and her cub. In a short time the dingy was lowered, and two of the officers jumped in, armed with rifles, and were rowed ashore against a strong gale. When the boat struck the beach all jumped ashore and started in pursuit, headed by Mr. Tracey, the carpenter, who, though drenched to the skin in effecting a landing, abated not his energy in the chase. After going several miles with little prospect of coming up with (he game, all returned to the ship except the carpenter, who, pointing ahead and shouting, ' Excelsior,' kept up the pursuit. Success attended his efforts, and he returned at ten o'clock at night, after traveling about ten miles and killing both bears." At eleven o'clock the same night a voice from the sand epit hailed the ship, and was recognized through the howling of the gale as that of Captain Berry, who had just returned from his inland journey. He was accompanied by one of the men, and said the others of his party were suffering from lame feet, and had lagged behind. A boat crew, in charge of Mr. Hodgson, pulled to the beach and started tc find the wayfarers. A severe snow storm and hard gale tended to make the search a difficult one ; but they returned at three o'clock in the morning with two of the men (Dom- inic and Peterson), who were found sleeping about five miles from the ship. As nothing had yet been seen of Dr. Jones, Ensign Stoney, with a boat's crew, landed at the head of the bay, some four miles from the ship, and searched the shores for several miles in each direction. They got back to the ship in the afternoon. Meantime Dr. Jones, accompanied by Melms, had reached the harbor and been taken on board ship. He had passed the night without much discomfort, under a shel- ter which Melms had constructed. Lieutenant Berry had reached a point about twenty miles inland, where, from a mountain 2,500 feet high, he was ena- bled to see open water entirely around the island, except 64 THE JEANNE'FTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. between west and south-southwest, where his view was obstructed by a high range of mountains, which, however, appeared to terminate the land in that direction. The inte- rior was found to be entirely devoid of animal life and of other plants than those growing near the coast. Two ridges of mountains followed the trend of the northern and south- ern shores, between which a rolling country existed, trav- ersed by small streams, evidently fed by the melting snow from the mountains. Master Waring was accompanied on his expedition by Dr. Castillo and a crew of five seamen. He started off toward the east with a breeze which sent him swiftly along under reefed mainsail; but the wind soon died out, and he encamped on shore for the night. After rounding Cape Hawaii, the following morning, 28th, he pulled up to a small island near the mouth of a creek, where were the skeletons of a whale and walrus. "His attention was attracted by some pieces of wood sticking up in the sand, evidently by intention, and he then noticed footprints leading to the cliff near by. Following them, he came upon a flag-staff, from which drooped what appeared to be a United States flag, and attached to the staff was a bottle containing documents which had been left by the officers of the Cor win." After leaving copies of the originals, which were brought away, Waring continued on, and in the afternoon " rounded a point marked by a perpendicular column of rock about one hundred feet high. Here heavy pack ice was encountered, extending as far to the eastward as he could see. Near the shore it was somewhat broken, and permitted his advance through a narrow channel where only short paddles could be used. At a quarter to six o'clock the ice drew so close that he was compelled to haul up on the beach and encamp for the night. The next day, 29th, the ice still held him, and, accompanied by Dr. Castillo, he scrambled to the top of a hill north of his camp, from which his eyes were rewarded by observing the trend of the coast toward the west. This he found to be the extreme northeast cape, and no land could MASTER WAKING'S ADVENTURES. 65 be seen to the northward. Toward the west the land was low near the water, and ran out in long, low points, forming deep bays, which held the ice packed in dense masses against the shore. " The following morning the weather was clear, and Her- ald Island appeared in plain view from the beach. By nine o'clock the ice opened sufficiently to allow the boat to move slowly by the aid of paddles, and, after six hours' hard work, they had rounded the cape, and made about five miles to the westward. " At five o'clock another effort was made to proceed, but after laboring an hour and a half, and narrowly escaping being crushed by two large masses, by backing out from be- tween them just as they came together with a force that no boat could have withstood, a narrow lead let them in to the beach. Within five minutes after they landed not a vestige could be seen of the opening by which they had so narrowly escaped. Nothing but a grinding and crunching sea of ice met the view." The next day, 30th, opened with a strong northerly wind and flurries of snow. The ice remained densely packed against the shore opposite the camp, and a reconnoissance along the beach showed that it was in the same condition both to the northward and westward. September 1st was a gloomy day for the party ; no move- ment of the ice occurred to indicate the liberation of the boat, and its abandonment and a march overland to the ship seemed the only alternative. Early the next morning a party went westward about fif- teen miles to a point from which they could see the land trending to the south and west. Preparations were made for abandoning the boat, which was hauled high up on the beach and turned bottom side up. The boat mast was erected on a neighboring hill, and a record deposited indi- cating the route taken by the retreating crew. " A dismal snow storm was prevailing when, at five o'clock 5 66 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. on the morning of the 3d inst., they started upon their journey. It was intensely cold, and the wind blowing in squalls. Their course was directed toward the eastern coast, where they could find shelter behind the hills, and driftwood from which to make a fire and cook some food on reaching camp at night. The traveling, with heavy loads on their backs, was intensely disagreeable, while, to add to their dis- comfort, the snow changed to rain, which drenched their clothes and increased the weight of their burdens. The route lay over a series of hills, which were very fatiguing to men unaccustomed to land journeys. At night they rested only a few hours, when it was too dark to see to travel. " As soon as it was sufficiently light to see, they started again, with sore and stiffened limbs, and feet torn by the sharp stones that covered the ground. At seven A. M. they reached the beach, where a rousing fire was started and a hot breakfast prepared, which put new life into the weary travelers, and then, through the snow and rain, they plodded until reaching the head of the bay, where they were over- joyed to find a boat, which had gone there to bring in the skins of Mr. Tracey's bears. An hour later they were welcomed on board ship. "Almost at the same time that Waring started toward the east with a fair wind, Ensign H. J. Hunt pulled away upon his course to the westward. He was accompanied by En- gineer Zane, and his crew consisted of five men. It was hard pulling against the wind, and at nine o'clock, when he encamped for the night, he was not more than about nine miles from the harbor. The oars were brought into requi- sition the following day, but the progress was not very rapid. " During the day they saw what looked like a cairn upon the beach, and Hunt landed to examine it. His praiseworthy curiosity came near bringing him into trouble, however, for he found himself within about six feet of a huge polar bear taking a siesta, before he was aware of it. As the ponder- ous brute raised his head and turned toward the intruder, ENSIGN HUNT'S EXPEDITION. 6T they gazed at each other in a dazed sort of way for a few minutes, when Hunt cut short the interview' by facing about and starting for the boat at a marvelous speed, shouting loudly for his rifle. In the meantime the bear arose in a dignified and leisurely manner, and slowly walked toward the sea, when Plunt sent a bullet through him that caused him to turn again for the beach ; another shot brought him to the ground, and a third so disabled him that Johansen ran up and gave him the coup de grace with the muzzle of his rifle at the animal's ear. "The third day out they rounded the southwest point of the island, and their course lay somewhat east of north. The wind was strong and carried away their main boom. Plenty of ice was encountered the next day, and, though working hard, they only succeeded in making about four miles upon their course by paddling and hauling. Next day they could only proceed by towing along shore and cutting a way through the ice, and were finally compelled to tie up in lee of a large piece of ice and bail out. They had finally, however, accomplished about four miles after a hard day's work. Day after day this labor was repeated until they reached the northern point of the island, where they en- countered a succession of sand spits running toward the north and east beyond the mainland, and with miles of open water between, which proved to be only shallow lagoons, where they constantly grounded, and extricated themselves with difficulty. In some instances the spits extended be- tween twenty and twenty-five miles from the land. " September 5th, they reached the most northerly point of Wrangel Island, and could distinctly see the northeast cape bearing to the southward and eastward of their posi- tion ; but the same heavy pack that brought Waring' s party to grief, baffled their most strenuous efforts to encompass the island. Often, while working through the ice, they found themselves compelled to follow leads that carried them far out from the land, and closed behind them. Sometimes midnight found them still at their oars, or wading through 68 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. lagoons, sounding in that way for a channel to reach the land, or cross the water in the direction of their course. The run home, when reluctantly enforced, was made in five days. The 10th of September, the day assigned for re- porting back, had passed, and the day of grace was drawing to a close, when a little whale-boat was seen beating in from the south and west, and we were soon cheering the returned explorers as they drew along side. The result of their labor- was perfectly satisfactory, as they had reached positions within easy view of each other's furthest points, and, though no traces that we could identify as of the Jeannette or the lost whalers were found, an accurate survey had been made of this land, and its character ascertained. The necessary scientific data had been collected, and a harbor found which may sometime be of inestimable value to ice-imprisoned whalemen. Along the sand spit, near the Rodger's harbor, as well as on the entire coast of Wrangel Island, is strewn drift- wood, among which may often be found utensils of wood, made by the natives of the Siberian or American coast, and some are of very ancient date, as are attested by their ven- erable appearance. A number of specimens were gathered by members of the expedition as relics. Among them can be recognized portions of vessels and articles of civilized man- ufacture, but whether keeping the sad tale of wrecks and human suffering, or merely washed from the deck of some passing whaler, it would be difficult to tell. The explorers left Rogers Harbor, September 13th, and the same evening visited the bay, where the whale-boat had been left, but were unable to get near the land owing to ground ice and shoal water. An attempt was made to examine Herald Island, but no landing could be effected. The ship was then headed due north, and, on the morning of the 16th, ran into loose ice, and soon came up to a dense pack. A lead to the northwest was entered, but it ended in an impenetrable pack, with smooth, new, unbroken field ice beyond, as far as the eye IN HIGH LATITUDE. 09 could reach. A retreat into open water was effected, and the pack ice was skirted to the eastward. On the 17th another lead was entered, and the ship forced its way through floating ice for fifteen miles, when, at five p. M., a dense pack was again encountered. As darkness came on the ship was secured to a floe. During the night the temperature fell to eight degrees below freezing, and new ice, from one to three inches thick, was formed, cement- ing the floes together. At three A. M., 18th, the ship was cast loose, and, after steaming for more than an hour through the ice which had closed around it, a lead was reached which brought the explorers to open water. Another lead was entered and followed to its end on the 19th. Having now reached latitude 73 deg. 44 min. north, longi- tude 171 deg. 48 min. west, without discovering any traces of land; and, finding that the main pack from that point trended well to the southeast, Lieutenant Berry returned to Wrangel Land, and, on the 22d, succeeded in picking up the abandoned whale-boat. He then headed to the north and west, and reached a position, the latitude of which is 7^5 deg. 28 min. north, and the longitude 179 deg. 52 min. cast. It was now late in the season, and, as a longer stay would have endangered the ship, Lieutenant Berry turned south to search for winter quarters. The Siberian coast was sighted just east of Cape Jakan; but a strong northwest wind was blowing at the time and a heavy sea running, so that it was not possible to send a boat on shore. Berry then coasted to the eastward, examining the shore from the ship. Toward evening the wind freshened, and falling snow shut out the land altogether. After standing off from the coast and laying to for forty- eight hours without any improvement in the weather, Lieu- tenant Berry gave up the attempt to examine the shore at that place, and headed for Tiapka Island, situated about twenty iniles west of Cape Serdze, where he succeeded in 70 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. putting up a house ; and at this place he left Master Putnam in command of a party, consisting of Surgeon Jones, Pay- Clerk Gilder, Petersen, Melms, and Constantine Taternoff. The party was fully supplied with Arctic clothing and pro- visions for one year, besides a large quantity of pemmican. They had also a boat and a supply of dogs and sledges, with which they were expected to make journeys westward along the shore of the Arctic Ocean. Lieutenant Berry and the balance of the officers and crew left Putnam's winter camp October 8th, and steamed southeasterly to St. Lawrence Bay, experiencing stormy and thick weather throughout the voyage, and a violent gale from the westward on the 13th and 14th. In a letter to the Secretary of the Navy, written at St. Lawrence Bay, October 16th, 1881, Lieutenant Berry said : " I shall now proceed to put the ship into winter quarters here, and render all as comfortable as possible. Our provi- sions have all proved to be of excellent quality, and we are in every respect well provided for the winter. All well on board." CHAPTER V. SEARCHES FOR THE JEANNETTE 1881. (CRUISE OP THE ALLIANCE.) THE sending out by the Secretary of the Navy of a United States ship to cruise in the waters of Spitzber- gen in search of the missing expedition, was one of the results of the labors of the Jeannette Relief Board. It was supposed that if DeLong had landed on Wrangel Land and sledged his way to the Pole, he would return by the way of Smith's Sound or Spitsbergen, where he would be likely to meet whalers and walrus-hunters much sooner than he would if he returned to Wrangel Land, as the first- named places are several hundred miles the nearest to the Pole. An expedition in that direction, to ask the co-opera- tion of the whalers and walrus-hunters, and to bring homo the Jeannette's men if they were found, was accordingly decided on. The steamship Alliance, having been designated for the service, was hastily equipped at the Norfolk navy yard, and started on her long voyage June 16th, 1881 the same day on which the Rodgers left San Francisco. Drawing away from abreast the famous frigate Kearsarge, which fought the rebel cruiser Alabama outside Cherbourg, she passed gracefully down the stream, while the sailors of the receiving-ship Franklin and other war-vessels manned the rigging and cheered her adventurous crew. The officers of the Alliance were as follows : Captain George H. Wadleigh, Commander; Lieutenant C. H. West, Executive Officer; Lieutenant C. P. Perkins, Navigator; Lieutenant Elliott, Master Schwenk, Chief -Engineer Burnap, Surgeon Eckstein. The crew numbered nearly two hundred men. Mr. Hany (71) 72 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Macdonna accompanied the expedition, and from his very interesting letters to the New York Herald the following account of the voyage is principally compiled. The Alliance touched at St. Johns, N. F., and her officers there gave a farewell breakfast to Lieutenant Greeley's party, who were awaiting transportation to their station at Lady Franklin Bay, to which place they were subsequently taken by the steamer Proteus. Starting onward, June 29th, the Alliance proceeded to Reykjavik, Iceland, and was the first American man-of-war to enter that harbor. The Icelanders were much interested in their visitors, and particularly so in the colored men among the crew, several of whom went galloping through the town on ponies, to the great delight of the youth of the ancient capital. " One of the negro sailors who went ashore became a. victim to the seductions of Danish whiskey. For two days he was missing 1 , and the master-at-arms went ashore and advertised a reward of ten dollars for the lost man. The town turned out tofind him, and he was found. Subsequent to this, every time a negro seaman appeared on shore he was hunted as a lost man or as an escaped curiosity from a museum." From Iceland, the Alliance went to Hammerfest, Norway ? the most northern city of Europe. "Here," wrote Mr. Macdonna, "we heard of the shooting of President Garfield. The first news we had of the event was from a captain who came up from Tromsoe, and told some one on board that the president was recovering slowly. " 'You mean the president's wife, don't you?' said the party informed. 'She was quite ill when we left the States.' " 'No; I mean the president himself,' said the skipper, wiih decision. 'He has been shot, and it is feared lie may die.' "'When was he shot? Who shot him? What for? How did it happen? Where was he shot?' and a volley of other questions were launched at the almost bewildered captain, who could give no further information than that President OFF THE SPITZBERGEN COAST. 78 Garh'eld had been shot by some one where he did not know, and for what he could not tell. He had just one cheerful fact, that the President was recovering." HUT OF WKKCKl-:;> NORWEGIANS, BEAR ISLAND. On the 29th of July the travelers left Hammerfest and started north. On the second day out they sighted Bear Island, and endeavored to work around to the westward of it, but were stopped by ice. Turning back, they cruised westward, but what seemed an impenetrable barrier of ice opposed their passage to the north. They then returned to Bear Island, and finally made their way slowly north to Spitzbergen and along its western coast. When near Horn Sound they had their first view of the midnight sun. It was on a clear, bright night, with not a fleck of cloud as big as a mustard-seed in the amber sky. In the clear water astern, several white whales sported about. "The sun looked like a great disk of molten gold, which seemed, through the smoked snow-glasses, to throb and pul- sate, sending waves of light from its center to its rim. 74 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. These soft rolling ripples of light seemed to depart from the periphery with irregularity, although they started from the center as if a pebble had been dropped there. Sometimes they would depart from the rim with the same regularity as they started; and then again they seemed to hurry off on one side and delay on the other, giving the sun, for an instant, an oblong appearance. This midnight sun was not alone sensible to the eye; one could feel its rays, which burned the skin with the copper warmth of Indian summer days." At Bell Sound, where they arrived August 3d, three wal- rus-hunting schooners were anchored in the gale that was GLACIERS AT BELL SOUND. blowing on a lee-shore, just in front of a magnificent gla- cier; and, viewed across the bay, they seemed mere specks against the marble-white face of the towering ice. A whale- boat was sent to one of them to deliver circulars respecting the Jeannette; and then the Alliance steamed onward to Green Bay, Ice Fiord, where a Norwegian steamer and sev- eral sailing vessels were anchored. Another vessel, which had been wrecked only two days previously, lay stranded on A FAIRY-LIKE SCENE. 75 the shore near by. The sunshine was warm and bright, the bay was clear of ice, and the mountains around were decked in green. Continuing on to a position northwestward of Spitzbergen, the ship again approached the ice-pack, and steamed slowly forward in a dense fog. As it grew colder the fog condensed on the ship's rigging, froze, and hung in fringes of icicles from every rope. About ten P. M. the fog suddenly disap- peared, and the soft sunlight illuminated the glistening- fringes of icicles, and seemed to change them into raining diamonds. The scene was dazzling and fairy-like. The ship was now at the foot of the ice-pack, and the navigator announced a latitude of 80 deg. min. 55 sec. north, longitude 11 deg. 22 min. east. "The effect of this news on a company of men who were informed before they left the States that they could not get to Iceland, and when they got to Iceland were told they would never reach Spitz- bergen, and who in Norway were pleasantly smiled at and told they would be back there again in a fortnight, was quite exhilarating." ."We were," says Mr. Macdonna, "in fact, 590 geograph- ical miles from the North Pole ; but who that lias seen this desert of ice, piled up in hummocks and forced into moun- tainous ridges by a force that the mind cannot comprehend, will venture an opinion as to the years of dreary endeavor yet to be endured before man shall reach that supreme spot ? " Of all the desolate sights the human eye has rested on, this desert of ice, stretched out like a gaunt, bleached beg- gar, hand to heaven, is the most subduing. Even the sea loses its music as it beats against the barrier. It moans monotonously and melancholy all the dreary years, and frets against a hydra-like impediment that, in centuries flown, was overcome and overcome only to present itself again, season after season, rejuvenated and incorrigible. The dominion of the ice is not disputed here." From his elevated position in the crow's nest Captain 76 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Wadleigh could see no opening to the north or northeast, and, after moving up and down the edge of the pack for a few hours, he turned back and anchored near Dane's Island, off the northwest coast of Spitzbergen, August 6th. "Dur- ing the second day of the stop at Dane's Island loud noises were constantly heard, which reverberated through the val- leys inland and over the great interior sea of ice, until lost in the distance. The lirst noise was like the rattle of artil- lery, and then it boomed along to thunder loudness, and so decreased again. Investigation proved that the noise pro- 'ceeded from the great glaciers abutting into .South Gat, and those around in Smeerenburg Bay, twenty miles away. The third day of the stop here, in addition to other excitements, afforded one from danger of being run into by icebergs, that came rushing down with the swift current through the Gat. "The Alliance remained in South Gat until the 12th, when, having completed the collecting of 'specimens' and done much dredging for deep-sea organisms, Com- mander Wadleigh weighed anchor and sailed north again. For six weary days we groped about in the fog, which came down upon us as soon as we were off shore, occasionally meeting great isolated ice-floes, which caused considerable anxiety. On the seventh day out the 19th of August we encountered the first heavy snow-storm, accompanied with a brisk breeze and considerable floating ice. "The 21st came clear and bright, with a cloudless sky and warm sunlight, and from the crow's nest the ice-pack could be seen far away on the northern horizon. Com- mander Wadleigh resolved to make for the ice again; and during the afternoon we fell in with the advance floes just south nl' the eightieth parallel. Several promising openings appeared, however, and, as it was suggested by the ice pilot that there was open water beyond this belt to the north, the captain resolved to make an attempt to reach it. He only succeeded in making twelve miles through the ice, however, when the way was bloeked again by the solid pack, in which not an opening could be .seen. Far as the eye could reach A PHENOMENAL CRUISE. 77 to the northward, one flat, monotonous expanse of ice was all that could be seen, with here and there a seal or a walrus basking in the sun."' From this position, in latitude 80 deg. 10 min. north, Cap- tain Wadleigh turned back and went to Hammerfest for a supply of coal. On the 16th of September he again started north, and proceeded to Spitzbergen, cruising under sail, and getting as far north as 79 deg. 36 min. The weather for several days was a succession of gales, snow, sleet, and dense fogs. On the 25th he headed for Reykjavik, and arrived there October 10th. Five days later he started homeward by way of Halifax, and reached New York in November. Mr. Macdonna considers the cruise of the Alliance the most phenomenal one ever made in the Arctic seas. He declares that the ship was utterly unfit for the dangerous work mapped out for her, and that no sufficient preparation for the voyage had been made notwithstanding which, she reached the highest point ever attained by a man-of-war. This success he regards as an evidence of good luck rather than anything else, and he thinks that experience in Arctic explorations is no guarantee against failure. "If," he wrote, " Commander Wadleigh had had a ship that could have withstood the ice, there is no doubt, under the favorable cir- cumstances, that we could have carried the American flag beyond the eight first parallel of latitude. Tempting as was the chance, Commander Wadleigh did not take the risk ; for had any accident overtaken the ship, its results would have been without parallel in the history of Arctic naviga- tion. Never before has any ship with two hundred souls on board ventured so far north as the Alliance; and, with such a number to feed, in case the ship was lost and the crew compelled to winter, famine would have had a race with scurvy for the men and officers." In summarizing the results of the voyage Captain Wad- leigh says : " At sea, near the land or ice, a careful watch has been kept for anything that would throw any light on 78 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. the object of the cruise, and fishing vessels have been com- municated with and furnished with a description of the Jeannette. The ship's position in a sealed bottle has been thrown overboard every day, the temperature and specific gravity of the water noted every two hours, and all observa- tions made as carefully as possible with the means at our disposal. Great interest in the search has been shown by the officers and generally by the crew ; and I think it my duty to ask the attention of the department to the unusual expense to which they have been subjected. The ship has been particularly fortunate in having the services of Lieu- tenant C. H. West, executive officer, Lieutenant C. P. Per- kins, navigator, and Chief-Engineer Burnap. I take plea- sure in commending them to the department for the very efficient manner in which their duties have been performed." SAMOYEDES OF ARCHANGEL. CHAPTER VI. PLANS FOR AN INTERNATIONAL SEARCH IN 1882. ri lIIE several United States expeditions which went north -i- to search for the Jeannette in the year 1881 had returned home or gone into winter quarters, and not the slightest clue to the whereabouts of the missing ship or to the fate of the adventurous men who sailed in her so gaily out through the Golden Gate nearly two and one-half years previously had been discovered. As cold weather came on the thoughts of all friends of humanity turned painfully northward, in sympathy with DeLong and his men, who, if still alive, seemed doomed to pass a third weary and sunless winter amid the cold, darkness, and desolation of the remorseless frost-land which held them in its icy grasp. Meantime new plans for solving the mystery which sur- rounded the lost explorers were being projected and dis- cussed both at home and abroad, and it was felt that, owing to the failure thus far of all attempts to gain any informa- tion respecting them, nothing less than international search could cover the field. The fact that Leigh Hunt had not returned home and might himself need relief, and gratitude for the part taken by the United States in the search for Franklin, served to intensify the feeling of the English people. The Colonial Department addressed a letter to the governors of the Hud- son Bay Company, urging upon them the importance of a thorough search by the trappers and employees of the com- pany along the northern coast of North America ; and the Geographical Society of Great Britain was actively engaged in devising plans for relief expeditions. At a meeting of the society, held in the London University, December 12th, 1881, Mr. C. R. Markham, C. B., spoke as follows : (79) 80 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. "The deepest sympathy has been felt here for the miss- ing expedition. We cannot forget the noble way in which Mr. Grinnell and the United States government and people came forward, not merely with sympathetic words, but active deeds, during the search for Sir John Franklin and his ill- fated but heroic followers. I was myself on board one of the English searching ships that were moored to the ice-floe barring the way westward on September 10th, 1850, and well remember our feelings of grateful admiration when the two gallant little American schooners, the Advance and Rescue, put out their ice anchors alongside us and remained there during a gale of wind, and then beat up through the fast- closing ice to the western end of Griffith Island, in company with our squadron.* DeHaven, Dr. Kane, and the others nobly represented the feeling of their country that feeling of generous sympathy which is filling our hearts now, and making us as anxious for news of the Jeannette as Amer- icans were then about the fate of Franklin. ^'The American people may be assured that not only do English geographers feel the deepest sympathy for the gal- lant explorers on board the Jeannette, but that we shall gladly and actively do what lies in our power to make the search complete, and give any aid that may, after due con- *Thc Englishman's memory is good, as the following extracts from Dr. Kane's history of the First United States Expedition, commanded by Lieutenant Edwin DeHaven, -will show. These extracts are copied from "The Frozen Zone and its Explorers," published at Hartford : "September 10. Here we are again all together, even Ommanney with the rest. The Resolute, Intrepid, Assistance, Pioneer, Lady Franklin, Sophia, Advance, and Rescue; Austin, Ommanney, Penny, and De- Haven, all anchored to the 'fast 'off Griffith's Island, the way to the west completely shut out. "September 13, 10 A. M. We are literally running for our lives, sur- rounded by the imminent hazards of sudden consolidation in an open sea. All minor perils, nips, bumps, and sunken bergs, are discarded. We are staggering along under all sail, forcing our way while we can. "4 P. M. We continued beating toward Griffith's Island, till, by doub- ling a tongue of ice, we were able to force our way. The English seemed to watch our movements, and almost to follow in our wakea compli- ment, certainly, to DeHaven's ice-mastership." LOST IN THE ARCTIC. 81 sideration, appear likely to be useful. The debt of gratitude which we owe to the nation which sent the Rescue and Advance to search for Franklin can never be forgotten." The probability that DcLong would retreat to the must of Northern Siberia, in case of disaster to his ship, had been repeatedly affirmed by Mr. George Kennan, author of "Tent Life in Siberia," who has traveled over four thousand miles in sledges in Northeastern Siberia. As early as November, 1880, Mr. Kennan suggested that the Secretary of the Navy should request the governor of Eastern Siberia to take measures to have natives of the North Siberian coast look out for the Jeannette and her crew; and, in subsequent let- ters, he earnestly urged the importance of making prepara- tions on the coast for the prompt discovery and relief of the Jeannette's survivors, in case they landed there. Lieutenant Howgaard, a Danish naval officer who had made the northeast passage with Nordenskiold, also believed that the Jeannette should be looked for in that direction, and was actively engaged in collecting funds to enable him to go over the track which he had sailed in the Vega, for the purpose of searching the northern coast of Siberia. He laid his plans before the Royal Geographical Society, at their meeting above referred to, December 12th, and soon afterward started for the United States on the same errand. 'For a second time," wrote a correspondent of the New York Herald, "in the history of polar research, an expedi- tion is probably lost in the Arctic. There is to lie another great Franklin search, with this difference, that was an English and American search of a limited segment of the polar circle ; this will be a universal search of the whole border of the 'unknown region,' participated in by nearly all the civilized nations of the earth. The whole Siberian coast will probably be searched by Captain Berry, Nordenskiold, Lieutenant Howgaard, and the Russians. The Russian international polar station, at the mouth of the Lena or at the New Siberian Islands, will be very important; for I 6 82 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. believe De Long built cairns and left notice of his progress there, if he was not prevented from landing by heavy weather or ice. Spitsbergen and Nova Zembla will be inter- national stations, and England will search Franz Josef Land on all its coasts and sounds with a large government expe- dition, for the Jeannette and for Leigh Smith. Five hun- dred whalers, walrus-hunters, and sealers will search for the Jeannette at the edge of the pack in all the seas that they frequent, from the Kara Sea to Spitzbergen and East Greenland, up Lancaster Sound, and in Bering Sea. Lieu- tenant Ray, at Point Barrow, will probably be able to search half way to the mouth of the Mackenzie River, and Lieu- tenant Greely, at Lady Franklin Bay, will probably go northwest to Cape Joseph Henry." Only three days after the above extract was published, tidings of the missing explorers startled the civilized world and rendered further search for the Jeannette unnecessary. CHAPTER VII. FIKST TIDINGS FROM THE EXPLORERS. A LMOST two and one-half years had elapsed since the -^-JL sailing of the Jeannette, when, near the close of the year 1881, dispatches from an inland Siberian city, coming nearly ten thousand miles by. telegraph and cable, via St. Petersburg, London, and Paris, were received by the New York Herald, as follows : LONDON, December 20th, 1881. The Central News' London correspondent has called at the Herald office, and has given us a copy of a telegram from the Central Neu*s' St. Petersburg correspondent, which reads as follows : "Gouverncur SibeVie Orientale annonce bateau polaire Americain Jeannette trou,ve'. Equipage secouru." [The Governor of Eastern Siberia announces that the American polar vessel Jeannette has been found, and that its crew has been saved.] PARIS, December 20th, 1881. Our St. Petersburg correspondent telegraphs this morning, that General Ignatieff has just received the following tele- gram, which I transcribe literally : "IRKUTSK, Dec. 19th, 6.55 p. M. " The Governor of Yakutsk writes, that on the 14th of September three natives of Hagan Oulouss de Zigane, at Cape Barhay, 140 versts north of Cape Bykoff, discovered a large boat with eleven survivors from the shipwrecked steamer Jeannette. They had suffered greatly. The Adjunct of Chief of the District was immediately charged to proceed with a doctor and medicines to succor the survivors at Yakutsk, and to search for the rest of the shipwrecked (83) 84 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. crew. Five hundred rubles have been assigned to meet the most urgent expenses. The engineer, Melville, has sent three identical telegrams, one addressed to the London office of the Herald, one to the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, and the third to the Minister of the United States at St. Petersburg. The poor fellows have lost every- thing. Engineer Melville says that the Jeannette was caught and crushed by the ice on the 23d of June, in latitude 77 degrees north, and 157 degrees east longitude. The sur- vivors of the Jeannette left in three boats. Fifty miles from the mouth of the Lena they lost sight of each other during a violent gale and dense fog. Boat No. 3, under command of Engineer Melville, reached the eastern mouth of the Lena on the 12th of September, and was stopped by icebergs near to the hamlet of Idolaciro-Idolatre. On the 29th of October there also arrived at Bolenenga boat No. 1, with the sailors, Nindermann and Noras. They brought the inform- ation that Lieutenant DeLong, Dr. Ambler, and a dozen other survivors, had landed at the northern mouth of the Lena, where they are at present in a most distressing state, many having their limbs frozen. An expedition was imme- diately sent from Bolonenga to make diligent search for the unfortunates, who are in danger of death. No news has as yet been received of boat No. 2. In the communication addressed to Mr. Bennett, Melville adds a request that money should be sent immediately, per telegraph, to Irkutsk and Yakutsk. Will you urgently request that 6,000 rubles be transmitted immediately to the Governor of Yakutsk for researches for the dead and assistance and care, as well as for the return and conveyance of the shipwrecked men to the house of the governor. There is a surgeon who will bestow upon them all possible care. (Signed) PRESIDENT PEDASCHENKI." LONDON, December 22d, 1881. The following telegram was received at the London office at twenty minutes past two this morning : LIST OF THE THREE BOATS' CREWS. .% li IRKUTSK. December 21st, 2:05 P. M. " Jeannette was crushed by the ice in latitude 77 deg. 15 miu. north, longitude 157 deg. east. Boats and sleds made a good retreat to fifty miles northwest of the Lena River, where the three boats were separated in a gale. The whale- boat, in charge of Chief-Engineer Melville, entered the east mouth of the Lena River on September 17th. It was stopped by ice in the river. We found a native village, and as soon as the river closed I put myself in communication with tlie Commandant at Bolonenga. On October 29th I heard that the first cutter, containing Lieutenant DeLong, Dr. Ambler, and twelve others, had landed at the north mouth of the Lena. The Commandant at Bolonenga sent instant relief to the whaleboat party, who are all well. Nindermann and Noros arrived at Bolonenga on October 29th for relief for the first cutter, all of whom are in a sad condition and in danger of starvation, and all badly frozen. The Commandant at Bolo- nenga has sent native scouts to look for them, and will urge vigorous and constant search until they are found. The second cutter has not yet been heard from. Telegraph money for instant use to Irkutsk and Yakutsk. The list of people in the boats is as follows : - FIRST CUTTER (SAFE). Lieutenant George W. DeLong, Dr. James M. Ambler, Je- rome J. Collins, William Nindermann, Louis Noros, Hans Erickson, Henry Kaack, Adolf Dressier, Carl Gortz, Walter Lee, Nelse Iverson, George Boyd, Alexai, Ah Sam. SECOND CUTTER (MISSING). Lieutenant Charles W. Chipp, Captain William Dunbar, Alfred Sweetman, Henry Warren, Peter Johnson, Edward Star, Sharvell, Albert Kuehne. WHALE BOAT (SAFE). Engineer Geo. W. Melville, Lieutenant J. W. Danenhowcr, .Jack Cole, James Bartlett, Raymond Neweomb, Herbert Leach, George Landerback, Henry Wilson, Mansen, Anequin, Tung Sing. (Signed), MELVILLE." 86 THE JEANNETTE ARfTlr EXPEDITION. A cable message from Engineer Melville, identical with the one copied above, was also received by the Secretary of the Navy, and he replied to it by cable as follows :- " NAVY DEPARTMENT, ) WASHINGTON, D. C., December 22d, 1881. j To Engineer MELVILLE, U. S. N., IRKUTSK: Omit no effort, spare no expense, in securing safety of men in second cutter. Let the sick and the frozen of those already rescued have every attention, and as soon as practi- cable have them transported to milder climate. Department will supply necessary funds. HUNT, Secretary." A dispatch from Mr. Hoffman, charge d'affaires of the United States at St. Petersburg, conveying the news and the assurance that the most energetic measures would be taken by the Russian authorities for the discovery and relief of the missing men, was received by the Secretary of State at Washington, December 20th. On the next day the Herald correspondent at St. Petersburg telegraphed as follows : " General Anutschin, the Governor-General of Eastern Siberia, who happens to be at present in St. Petersburg, having received information of the arrival of the shipwrecked crew of the Jeannette in the region under his command, im- mediately proceeded to Gatschina and saw the Emperor, who personally ordered that all supplies that were necessary for food, clothing, money, and transportation should be placed at their disposal." General Anutschin also gave orders by telegraph that the inhabitants of the shores of the provinces of Yakutsk and Yeniseisk should be at once informed of the loss of the Jeannette, and requested to make active research for the discovery of the missing shipwrecked men. Messages from General Pedaschenki, subsequently received by Governor Anustchin, gave assurance that the search would be continued during the winter by the Cossack com- mandants of Bulun and Yakutsk, under direction of Gen. Tschernieff, the Governor of Yakutsk, and that nothing that OFFICIAL TELEGRAMS. 87 could be done for the relief of the distressed seamen would be omitted. Immediately upon receipt of the first news about the Jeannette, Mr. James Gordon Bennett, who was residing in Paris at that time, transferred the sum of 6000 roubles by telegraph, through the Messrs. Rothschilds, to General Igna- tieff at St. Petersburg, with a request that he would draw on Mr. Bennett for any further sums required for the succor and comfort of Lieutenant DeLong and his party. About the same time Mr. Bennett received from General Ignatieff the following telegram : - " Have hastened to communicate to your correspondent the news received from Yakutsk, and have given orders to the governor to take the most energetic measures for the rescue of the shipwrecked crew, together with authority to undertake all necessary expenses, for which I have promised to reimburse him. IGNATIEFF." The following are copies of dispatches from the State Department, transmitted by cable, to Mr. Hoffman, at St. Petersburg : " DEPARTMENT OF STATE, WASHINGTON, December 20th, 1881. HOFFMAN, Charge", St. Petersburg: Tender hearty thanks of President to all authorities or persons who have in any way been instrumental in assisting unfortunate survivors from Jeannette, or furnishing informa- tion to this government. FRELINGHUYSEN." " DEPARTMENT OF STATE, WASHINGTON, D. C., December 23d, 1881. HOFFMAN, St. Petersburg : - Convey the thanks of the President to the imperial govern- ment for its liberal and generous action in advancing the necessary funds to render assistance to the members of the Jeannette expedition, and inform Mr. DeGiers that you are 88 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. authorized to draw on me to reimburse that government if it will kindly inform you of the amount. FBELINGHUYSEN, Secretary of State." The opening months of the new year were a season of painful suspense as to the fate of the gallant commander of the Jeannette, his brave first officer, and other missing men of the expedition. Briefly stated, about all that was known of them in the United States was as follows : Three boats, carrying the Jcannette's crew, left Semenoff- .ski Island, September 12th, for the mouth of the Lena, and were separated during a hard gale when about fifty miles from land. The whale-boat party, commanded by Engineer Melville, landed near the east mouth of the Lena, September 16th, and on the 26th reached a native settlement called Bykoff, where they had to wait till the river was frozen over solid before proceeding south. On the 29th of October a native arrived from Bulun (a settlement further south) with a letter written by Noros and Nindermann, two of the men who accompanied Lieutenant DeLong in the first cutter. This letter stated that DeLong had landed on the Siberian coast and needed prompt assist- ance. Melville went to Bulun, where he saw the two men, and learned that when they left their comrades, October 9th, they were out of food and in a deplorable condition, and one of them had died. Mr. Collins had volunteered to stay behind with the sick man, but they had all kept together. Mr. Melville immediately procured the services of some natives with dog-sledges, and went north to search for his distressed comrades. He visited the place Avhere the first cutter landed, and found some records which DeLong had left behind as he retreated slowly south. The last of these records was dated October- 1st. He traced the party to the edge of a desolate and uninhabited region, which the natives refused to enter, and was then obliged to return to Bulun. Thence he proceeded to Yakutsk, 1,200 miles distant, and after organizing several search-parties and arranging a plan FATE OP LIEUTENANT CHIP1'. 89 of operation he started to return north with two of his own men, Russian, a Cossack, and some natives. Meantime Lieutenant Danenhower, the second officer of 1li<- Jeannette Expedition (who had been relieved of his com- mand by DeLong on account of the bad condition of his eyes), had arrived at Yakutsk with his eyes badly affected, and acting under orders from the Secretary of the Navy, and against his own wishes, had started homeward with nine of his companions. It was apparent that DeLong and the balance of his boat's party when last heard of, way back in October, were even then in imminent danger of speedy death from cold and starvation, and that one of their number had died from expo- sure. Nothing had been heard of Lieutenant Chipp, and it was supposed that his boat with all on board had gone down in the gale which separated him from his commander, or that a worse fate had befallen him if he reached the land. It was just the time of year when the Arctic storms begin to sweep down on the Siberian coast, and all living things move toward the interior to escape their fury. It is no trifle to be thrown on this coast without food and shelter or means of transportation, even in summer. It is vastly worse in winter, when the sea and river channels are closing with ice, and when heavy storms and falling snow obscure the landscape. Months elapsed before a tolerably full, connected and intel- ligible account of the voyage of the Jeannette, and of the adventures and sufferings of the survivors of the expedition, was received at home. Meantime the Lena became a familiar word where it had never been spoken before, and its fatal delta the subject of deep interest and scrutiny. During this period of weary waiting the following verses were contrib- uted to the Philadelphia Times : By Baikal's lake, on wild Siberia's plain, Where howling blasts from Arctic's frozen mala Sweep over the ;irid wastes; Where zero marks the mild degrees of cold, And man to live must be of native mold, A shipwrecked boat's-crew rests. 90 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. By Lena's tide, whose waters never sleep, And hyperborean blasts perpetual revel keep, And cold and death combine ; Where nature spreads her icy mantle o'er The desert steppes and wilds forever more, DeLong and Melville pine. Two nations vie in competition brave The lost to trace, the rescued few to save, Frost-bitten, maimed and blind ; Whilst far away, where western breezes blow, Where Minnesota's fertile prairies glow, A woman waits resigned. A world looks on with sad and anxious gaze, And Science gropes anew in troubled maze, And men begin to doubt ; Since Norsemen sailed, full twice rive hundred years Have rolled away, and strewn the floes with tears, To trace the pole about. And still they die, and still the years roll on ; Bold Franklin erst, and now perchance DeLong Two of a burdened roll. ' Fair Science ' mourns, but must not, cannot stay In such a strait, nor falter in the way, Till found the Northern pole. Before continuing the narrative, it will be well to say something of the great Siberian river, which DeLong chose as his objective point on leaving the New Siberian Islands ; and of the Siberian tundra, on Avhose northern edge he was thrown by the fortunes of exploration at an inclement season of the year. CHAPTEK VIII. THE SIBERIAN TUNDRA. shores of the Arctic Ocean lying between Nova Zein- -1- bla and Bering's Strait are perhaps the most desolate on the whole Arctic circle. The great Siberian rivers the Obi, the Yenisei, the Lena, the Indigirka, and the Kolyma rise in the Altai Mountains, and flow, in their upper courses, through forests of tall trees. But before they reach the Arctic Ocean they traverse, for hundreds of miles, a dreary and barely habitable region of frozen deserts and swamps great desolate steppes, known to the Russians as tundras. In summer these tundras are almost impassable wastes of brown Arctic moss saturated with water ; and in winter trackless deserts of snow drifted and packed by northern gales into long, hard, fluted waves. The ground is frozen to a great depth, but in summer thaws out for a distance of from two to three feet. Nothing can be more melancholy than the aspect of the tundra, where, says Wrangel, endless snows and ice-covered rocks bound the horizon, nature lies shrouded in all but per- petual winter, and life is an unending struggle with privation and with the terrors of cold and hunger ; where the people, and even the snow, emit a constant smoke, and this evapora- tion is immediately changed into millions of icy needles, which make a noise in the air like the crackling of thick silk ; where the reindeer crowd together for the sake of the warmth derivable from such contiguity ; and only the raven, the dark bird of winter, cleaves the sombre sky with slow- laboring wing, and marks the track of his solitary flight by a long line of thin vapor. " The tundra," says another writer, " is the very grave of nature, the sepulchre of the primeval world, which occasion- (91) 92 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. ally reveals to the astonished gaze the forms of colossal ani- mals long since extinct. Often trunks of trees split asunder with a loud noise ; masses of rock are loosened from their sites ; the ground in the valley is rent with yawning fissures. Dense grows the atmosphere ; the stars wane and flicker ; all nature sleeps a sleep that resembles death, and which is only interrupted in the summer by a short interval of spas- modic activity. LIMIT OF TREES IN SIBERIA. " 111 winter, when animal life has mostly retreated south or sought a refuge in burrows or in caves, an awful silence, interrupted only by the hooting of a snow-owl or the yelping of a fox, reigns over the vast expanse ; but in spring, when the brown earth reappears from under the melted snow and the swamps begin to thaw, enormous flocks of wild birds appear upon the scene and enliven it for a few months. Eagles and hawks follow the traces of the natatorial and strand birds; troops of ptarmigans roam among the stunted bushes ; and when the sun shines, the finch or the snow- bunting warbles his merry note. About this time, also, the RKUION OF THE LOWER L10NA. 93 reindeer leaves the forests to feed on the herbs and lichens of the tundra, and many smaller animals migrate thither. ''Thus during several months the tundra, presents an ani- mated scene, in which man also [days his part ; for birds, beasts, and fishes must all pay tribute to his various wants. But as soon as the first frosts of September announce the approach of winter, all animals, with but few exceptions, haste to leave a region where the sources of life must soon fail. The geese, ducks, and swan return in dense flocks to the south.; the strand bird seeks in some lower latitude a softer soil ; the water-fowl forsakes the bays and channels which will soon be blocked by ice ; the reindeer once more returns to the forest ; and in a short time nothing is left that can induce man to remain. Soon a thick mantle of snow covers the hardened earth, the frozen lake, the ice- bound river, and conceals them all under its monotonous pall, except where the furious northeast wind sweeps it away and lays bare the naked rock." The following graphic description of the region of the Lower Lena is from the pen of Mr. George Kennan, author of " Tent Life in Siberia " :- " Underlying the great moss tundras which border the Lena River north of Yakutsk, there is everywhere a thick stratum of eternal frost, beginning in winter at the surface of the earth, and in summer at a point twenty or thirty inches below the surface, and extending to a depth of many hundred feet. What scanty vegetation, therefore, the tundra affords, roots itself and finds its nourishment in a thin layer of unfrozen ground a mere veneering of arable soil resting upon a substratum five or six hundred feet in depth of per- manent and impenetrable ice. This foundation of ice is im- pervious, of course, to water, and as the snow melts in sum- mer the water completely saturates the soil to as great a depth as it can penetrate, and, with the aid of the continuous daylight of June and July, stimulates a dense luxuriant growth of gray Arctic moss. This moss in course of time covers the entire plain with a soft, yielding cushion, in which 94 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. a pedestrian will sink to the knee without finding any solid footing. Moss has grown out of decaying moss year after year and century after century, until the whole tundra for thousands of square miles is a vast, spongy bog. Of other vegetation there is little or none. A clump of dwarf berry bushes, an occasional tuft of coarse swamp-grass, or a patch of storm-and-cold-defying kedrovnik, diversifies, perhaps, here and there the vast brownish-gray expanse ; but, gener- ally speaking, the eye may sweep the whole circle of the horizon and see nothing but the sky and moss. " An observer who could look out upon this region in win- ter from the car of a balloon would suppose himself to be looking out upon a great frozen ocean. Far or near he would see nothing to suggest the idea of land, except, perhaps, the white silhouette of a barren mountain-range in the distance, or a dark sinuous line of dwarfed bushes and trailing pine stretching across the snowy waste from horizon to horizon, and marking the course of a frozen Arctic river. " At all seasons and under all circumstances this immense border-land of moss tundras is a land of desolation. In summer its covering of water-soaked moss struggles into life only to be lashed at intervals with pitiless whips of icy rain until it is again buried in snow ; and in winter fierce gales, known to the Russians as ' poorgasj sweep across it from the Arctic Ocean and score its snowy surface into long, hard, polished grooves called ' sastrugi.'' Through- out the entire winter it presents a picture of inexpress- ible dreariness and desolation. Even at noon, when the sea-like expanse of storm-drifted snow is flushed faintly by the red gloomy light of the low-hanging sun, it depresses the spirits and chills the imagination with its suggestions of infi- nite dreariness and solitude ; but at night, when it ceases to be bounded even by the horizon, because the horizon can no longer be distinguished when the pale green streamers of the aurora begin to sweep back and forth over a dark seg- ment of a circle in the north, lighting up the whole white world with transitory flashes of ghostly radiance and adding g i g a W a o w O !5 t ' E- P ^ 02 CD w o LIEUTENANT DELONG'S RECORDS. 127 The following-named persons, fourteen of the officers and crew of the Jeannette, reached this place yesterday after- noon, on foot, from the Arctic Ocean. GEORGE W. DE LONG, Commander of Expedition, Lieutenant U. 8. Navy, Whoever finds this paper is requested to forward it to the Secretary of the Navy, with a note of the time and place at which it was found. [Copies of the above in six languages followed.] Lieutenant BELONG. A. GORTZ, L. P. NOROS. P. A. Surgeon J. A. AMBLER. G. H. BOYD. W. LEE. Mr. J. J. COLLINS. N. IVERSON. AH SAM. W. F. C. NlNDERMANN. A DRESSLEU. ALEXY. H. H. ERICKSON. H. H. KAACK. The Jeannette was crushed and sunk by the ice on the 12th of June, 1881, in latitude 77 deg. 15 min. north, longi- tude 155 deg., after having drifted twenty-two months in the tremendous pack-ice of this ocean. The entire thirty- three persons composing her officers and crew dragged three boats and provisions over the ice to latitude 76 deg. 38 min. north, longitude 150 deg. 30 min. east, where we landed upon a new island Bennett Island on the 29th of July. From thence we proceeded southward in boats, sometimes dragging over ice, until, the 10th of September, we reached Semenoffski Island, ninety miles northeast of this delta. We sailed from there in company on the 12th of September, but that same night we were separated in a gale of wind, and I have seen nothing since of the two other boats or their people. They were divided as follows : SECOND CUTTER. Lieutenant Chipp, Mr. Dunbar, A. Sweetman, W. Sharvell, E. Star, H. D. Warren, A. P. Kuehne, and P. Johnson. WHALE-BOAT. Past Assistant Engineer Melville, Master Danenhower, Mr. Newcomb, J. Cole, J. H. Bartlett, H. Wilson, S. Lauderback, F, Mansen, Charles Tong Sing, Anequin, and H. W. Leach. My boat, having weathered the gale, made the land on the morning of the 16th inst., and after trying to get in shore for two days, and being prevented by shoal water, we abandoned the boat, and waded to the beach, carrying our 128 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. arms, provisions, and records, at a point about twelve miles to the north and east of this place. We had all suffered somewhat from cold, wet, and exposure, and three of our men were badly lamed ; but having only four days' provisions left, reduced rations, we were forced to proceed to the south- ward. On Monday, September 19th, we left a pile of our effects near the beach, erecting a long pole, where will be found everything valuable chronometer, ship's log-books for two years, tent, &c., which we were absolutely unable to carry. It took us forty-eight hours to make these twelve miles, owing to our disabled men, and these two huts seemed to me a good place to stop while I pushed forward the sur- geon and Nindermann to get relief for us. But last night we shot two reindeer, which gives us abundance of food for the present, and we have seen so many more that anxiety for the future is relieved. As soon as our three sick men can walk, we shall resume our march for a settlement on the Lena River. Saturday, Sept. 24 8 A. M. Our three lame men being now able to walk, we are about to resume our journey, with two days' rations deer- meat and two days' rations pemmican and three pounds tea. GEORGE W. BELONG, Lieutenant Commanding. COPY OF RECORD NO. 3. [This record, and a rifle, were found in a hut by a Yakut hunter, and given to Mr. Melville, at Upper Bulun, on the 12th day of November, 1881.] Monday, Sept. 26th, 1881. Fourteen of the officers and men of the United States Arctic steamer Jeannette reached this place last evening, and are proceeding to the southward this morning. A more complete record will be found in a tinder case hung up in a LIEUTENANT DELONG'S RECORDS. 129 hut fifteen miles further up the right bank of the larger stream. GEORGE W. BELONG, Lieutenant Commanding. P. A. Surgeon J. M. AMBLER. H. II. ERICKSON. L. P. Nouoa Mr. J. J. COLLINS. AH SAM. W. LEE. A. GORTZ. H. H. KAACK. N. IVERSON. W. F. C. NlNDERMANN. ALEXY. G. H. BOYD, A. DRESSLER. COPY OF RECORD NO. 4. [This record was found in a hut by a Yakut hunter, and given to Mr. Melville, at Upper Bulun,on the 12th day of No- vember, 1881.] Saturday, Oct. 1st, 1881. Fourteen of the officers and men of the United States Arctic steamer Jeannette reached this hut on Wednesday, September 28th, and, having been forced to wait for the river to freeze over, are proceeding to cross to the west side this A. M., on their journey to reach some settlement on the Lena river. We have two days' provisions, but having been fortunate enough thus far to get game in our pressing needs, we have no fear for the future. Our party arc all well except one man, Erickson, whose toes have been amputated in consequence of frost bite. Other records will be found in several huts on the east side of this river, along which we have come from the northward. GEORGE W. BELONG, Lieutenant U. S. N., Commanding Expedition. P. A. Surgeon AMBLER. Mr. J. J. COLLINS. G. H. BOYD. "W. F. C. NlNDERMANN. A. DRESSLER. H. H. ERICKSON. H. H. KAACK. A. GORTZ. N. IVERSON. W. LEE. AH SAM. L. P. Nonoa. ALEXY. CHAPTER XII. EXPERIENCES OF NINDERMANN, NOROS, AND LEACH. IN Engineer Melville's narrative he refers to a letter, ad, dressed to the American Minister at St. Petersburg, which Mr. Nindermaun (who is a German) wrote at Bulun after he and Noros had arrived there in an exhausted condi- tion. The following is a verbatim copy thereof : " BULUN, October 29 To the American Minister St Peters- burg Please inform the Secretary of U. S. Navy of the loss of the Jeannette Arctic steamer Jeannette Crused in the ice June llth 1881 in lat 77 deg. 22 min. N., longitude 157 deg. 55 min. E or thareabout, saved three Boats, also from three to four mounths provisions, with sleds, travilled S. W to to reach the New Siberian Islands, travilled two weeks or thareabouts then sighted an Island, the Captain determined reach it, and landed in about two weeks on the southern end and planted the Americkcn Flag and called it Bennett Island, Lieutenant Chipp was sent on the west side to determin the size with a Boats crew, Ice Pilot Dinbar with the two Natives on the East side, returned in three days, remained one week on the Island, took to the boats and started South, made the New Siberian Islands and camped on a couple of them, set our course from the most Southern Island to strike the North side of Siberia, to enter one of the email rivers to the Leana, on our passage a gale of wind set in, a sea running, lost sight of the Boats, one in charge of Lieut Chipp, the other Engr Melville, know not what has be- come of them, our boat almost swamped carry cd away the mast lost the sail, hove too under a. drag one night and a (130) NINDERMANN'S LETTER. 131 day, shipping seas all tlic time pumps and bailers gowing Night and Day all hands feet frostbitten when the gale was over the Captain had lost the use of ]\\sfeat and hands made the cost, struck one of the small rivers, not finding water enough to enter, the Ice making, bcatting around for two days, the Captain determined to make 'the land, the boat struck two miles off shore the Captain made everybody that was able to stand on his feet to get over board, to lighten the boat and tow her in we towed her one mile, could not get her any further, took out ihc ship's papers and provisions, the Captain then had got the use of his hands and feat a little, in evening of the 25th of September. Names of boats crew Captain DcLong Surgeon Ambler Mr. Collins, W. T. C. Nindermann Louis P. Norris, II. II. Erickson, II. II. Kaack, G. W. Boyd, A. Gortz, A. Dressier, W. Lee, N. Iverson, Alexia, Ah Sam and one dog remained a few days on the scacoast on account of some of the mcns feet being badly frost bitten, leaving behind the ships log and other articles, not being able to carry them, started to travel south with five days provisions. Erickson, walking on crutches a few days after made a sled to drag him, came to a hut on the 5th of October. On the morning of the Cth the Docktcr cut off all his toes, the Captain asked me if I had strength to goo to one of the settlements with one of the men to get assist- ance, as he was gowing to stay by Erickson. While talking about it Erickson Died, we Burcd him in the river the Captain paid we will all go together name of place Owtit Ary, lat. 71 dcg. 55 min. north, long, not known. Oct. 7th Eat our last Dog meat, started traville south with about one quart of Alkihall, and two tin cases of ships papers two rifles and little amtmition, travillcd until the 9th. Nothing to Eat, drank three ounces of Alkihall a day per man, the Captain and the rest of them got weak and gave out travilling he then sent me and L. P. Noros with three ounces of Alkihall and one rifle and 40 rounds of amu- nitions on ahead to a place called Kurnak Surka. Dis- 9 132 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. tancc about 12 twelve miles to find natives, if not finding any to travillc south until we did, took us five days to walk to Kuinak Surka, found two fish took one days rest started south again nothing to eat, travilled untill the 19th getting wceker every day gave up in dispair, sat down and rested, then walked one mile found two huts and a storehouse, where there was about fifteen pounds of Blue moulded Fish stoped three days to regain strenth, boath beaing to weak to travill. On the afternoon of the 23d or thareabouts a native came to the hut, we tryed to make him understand that there was eleven more men north, could not make him understand he took us too his camp whare thare was six more, also a lot of sleighs and raindecr they travilling at the time south, next morning broak camp came to a settlement on the 25th, called Ajakit there trycd again to make the people under- stand there was more people north, did not succeed, Ajakit is lat 70 dcg. 55 min. north, long, not known as the chart is a coppy, sent for the govener to Bulun, came 27th he knew the ships name, and knew about Nordcnchawl, but could not talk English, we tried to make him understand that the Captain was in a starving condition or probably dead, and that we wanted natives, Raindecr and food to get them, as I thought that we could make it in five or six days to save them from starvation but the Govoncr made signs that he had to Telegraph to St. Pctersberg, he then sent us on to Bulun. We stand in kneed of food and clothing at present our health is in a bad condition hoping to be well soon we remain your humble servants, WILLIAM C. F. NINDERMANN, Louis P. NOROS, Seamen of the U. S. Navy, Steamer Jeannette." The following are extracts from a letter which Mr. Noros wrote from Yakutsk, to his father who resides in Fall River, Massachusetts : " On the 4th of September we were frozen fast in pack ice, where we remained drifting north and Avest until the 0. H 2 I 5z{ C t- 1 o NOROS'S LETTER. 135 ship was crushed on June llth, 1881. While being held fast in our icy cradle we had a good time hunting bears, seals, walrus, and other game. We frequently had face, nose, and cars frozen, but thought nothing of it, as we had got used to the climate. After the ship went down we had a hundred days of hard dragging and sailing in open boats. On the night of Sep- tember 13th we had a gale of wind, and the boats got sepa- rated. The boat that I was in was the captain's boat. We had fourteen men and dogs, and were loaded quite deep. When we reached the Siberian coast we could not land on the beach from boats. We had to wade through ice and water up to our waists. We were nearly all day carrying our things to shore, and it was dark before we got through. This was on September 17th. On the 19th we commenced our march. We traveled until October 6th, when one of our men died from frozen limbs. We had killed and eaten our last dog on that day. On October 9th the captain sent Nindermann and myself on ahead to look for assistance and food, none of the party having had anything to eat for two days. We started with- out a particle of food. I had a pair of sealskin trousers. We cut pieces from these and chewed them until we were found by the natives. We were so weak we could hardly stand. I believe that if we had had to endure our sufferings for two days longer we would have shot ourselves. The natives took us to their camp and gave us plenty to cat and drink. The result was we were both quite sick for some time. We were taken to a village, and from there to Bulun. At Bulun we tried to get a telegram sent, but could not make them understand. We supposed that we were the only two men alive out of the whole expedition. Then we heard of a boat's crew landing at one of the mouths of the Lena. The boat proved to be Melville's, and as soon as they learned of our arrival at Bulun they joined us at that place, so there were thirteen of us alive." Wbile at Irkutsk, Mr. Jackson, the Herald correspondent, 136 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. learned from Mr. Noros the following additional particulars respecting Lieutenant DeLong and his men : The party made land at a point near the northernmost branch of the Lena, but found it impossible to enter on account of shoals. DeLong therefore determined to land at a point whence they could sec this northerly outlet, but more to the east. Two miles from the beach, the captain ordered those of the men who could walk to get out and drag the boat nearer in shore. The captain, the doctor, Erickson and Boyd (both disabled) stayed in the boat, which the others were then enabled to drag a mile further toward the land, when they, too, waded to the shore. Collins had left the boat with the first lot and had made a fire on the shore. This was on or about the 16th of September, and the landing of articles was completed on the 17th. There the party stayed two days to recuperate, all the men being badly frost-bitten ; the doctor alone was in comparatively good condition. Noros and Nindermann were the best conditioned among the men. The journey south was then commenced, the burdens being equally distributed. The captain bore his own blanket and some records. The burdens borne by some of the others were heavy; some complained of taking them further, but the captain insisted. The party then traveled south four days. On the way two deer were shot by the Indian Alexai. The party sat down and had a good feed, DeLong's motto being, Noros says, to "feed well while they had it." Noros thinks they made twenty miles in the first ten days. The four next days brought them to the extremity of a peninsula, and after some delay, waiting for the river to freeze, they crossed the river to the west bank on or about the 1st of October. The width of the river was there about five hundred yards. Before crossing they got another deer. The captain's intention was to make for the place called Sagasta on the map. Erickson died. His toes had been amputated by the doctor during the retreat. After crossing the river he one night pulled off his mittens, and one of his PARTING ON THE LENA. 1ST hands became frost-bitten and circulation could not b*> restored in it. He died, and was buried in tbe river. Then it was that the captain decided to send Noros and Nindermann ahead. The food had been quite exhausted ; the party was existing only on brandy. Noros thinks it was a Sunday when they left. The captain had held divine service, the men seated on the banks of the river. After service he called the two men and told them he wanted them to push on ahead, and that he would follow with his party. "If you find game," were his last words, "then return to us ; if you do not then go to Kumak Surka." Noros thus describes the parting: "The captain read divine service before we left. All the men shook hands with us, and most of them had tears in their eyes. Collins was the last. He simply said: 'Noros, when you get to New York remember me.' They seemed to have lost hope, but as we left they gave us three cheers. We told them we would do all that we could do, and that was the last we saw of them. Snow had fallen to a depth of a foot or a foot and a half." The river at this place was about five hundred yards wide, and the place was near where the mountains on the western side ended: There was one spot which remained distinctly impressed upon his mind namely, a high, conical, rocky island, which rose up out of the river, and which he called Ostava, or Stalboy. How he got the name is not quite clear. But the rock is a landmark in his memory, and it bore aboufe east by north from the spot where they left the captain. The rock is just at the end of the mountains ; the mountains commence with that rock. After leaving this rock the two men traveled slowly and wearily. They sighted deer once, but could not get near them. They shot one grouse and caught an eel, which was all the food they had. They made a kind of tea from the bark of the Arctic Avillow, but often had only hot water to drink. They chewed and ate portions of their skin breeches, and the leather soles of their moccasins. About two days 138 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. after leaving the captain they crossed the Lena to the east side, in the hope of finding game in the mountains, and it took them a very long time to cross the ice at that point. The following is a copy of a letter written by Seaman Leach to his mother at Penobscot, Maine, after his arrival at Irkutsk : MY DEAR MOTHER, Your welcome letter came to hand last night. I was at a party, enjoying myself as well as possible for me to do here, when one of the boys came running in and gave me nine letters from home. Oh, mother, you should have seen me dance around the room. The young ladies all thought I was crazy. They were about right. After nearly three years without hearing a single word from home, the news, when it did come, quite upset me. Well, I will try to give an account of myself. I will begin at the beginning. After passing through Bering's Strait we stood north until we struck the ice. We ran into it and it closed around us. We had thirty-three of the best boys on board that ever walked a ship's deck. Poor fellows ! only thirteen are left to tell the sad tale. After getting into the ice we made preparations to spend the winter, expecting to get out the following summer. We spent the winter very pleasantly had theatricals Christmas and New Year. It was very cold, but we all enjoyed it tip-top. The winter passed, and so did the summer, without any signs of our being released ; so we made up our minds to stay another winter. It passed quite pleasantly, although three months of the time we did not see the sun. It looked good when it did come up : I think it was worth waiting for. We laid in the ice until June, when our ship (our home) was taken from us. Then our hardships began. Oh, mother, you can have no idea of what we went through. When I look back it seems more like a strange dream than a reality. But it is over now, and we that pulled through are safe. About eight days before we reached the coast we encountered a heavy gale, which nearly put an end to our sufferings. LEACH'S LETTER. 139 When it commenced to blow the lieutenant put me at the helm. It was very cold, and the boat was nearly full of water all the time, in spite of the men's bailing for dear life. 1 sat at the helm about fourteen hours before the wind abated enough for me to be relieved. When the time came I rose up and fell flat into the bottom of the boat. My feet were frozen stiff, and my legs were chilled up to my body so badly that I think they could have been taken off without my feeling it. When we got ashore I was in a tight fix. I could not walk, and was in much pain, and my feet had begun to putrefy. Bartlett, one of the men, took a knife and cut out the corrupt places, and cut about half of one of my great toes off, leaving about half an inch of the bone sticking out of the end. About a month ago I found a doctor who took it off. It troubles me to walk now, and I think that it will for some time. Guess I have written enough about my trials ; will tell you something about the people I find here in Irkutsk. The ladies here call me the savior they have heard about the boat scrape. We are received by the best families in town. They seem to think it a feather in their caps to have the Americans call on them. I make myself as agreeable as possible. The life is not altogether crushed out of me if I am a little run down. By the way, they are going to form a search party, and I think it is my duty to join it and search for the poor boys that are left. I don't know yet whether I shall go or not. If I do you must not worry about me, for we shall not start before spring, and will get back next fall ; so you see it will not be long to wait, and no risk to run, and besides you want to see your son do by another as you would have another do by him. Gracious ! how I want to see the folks at home. Give my love to everybody, in town and out, keep the lion's share for yourself, and believe me, your loving son, HERBERT." CHAPTER XIII. YAKUTSK TOWN AND PROVINCE. "ITTAKUTSK, or the 'city of the Yakuts' as the natives -L proudly call it, where the survivors of the expedition found the first comforts of civilized life after their long journey, is situated on the Lena River near latitude 62 north. It is the capital and chief town of the province of Yakutsk, one of the six into which Eastern Siberia is divided and a commercial center of the fur and ivory trade. The region of the Upper Lena has been subject to the Russian power for 250 years. After crossing the Yenisei, the Cossack conquerors of Siberia advanced to the shores of Lake Baikal, and in 1620 attacked and partly defeated the populous and warlike nation of the Buriats. Then, turning northward to (he Lena, they descended the river to the principal town of the Yakuts, where, in 1632, they founded the city of Yakutsk, and after considerable resist- ance made subject the powerful nation of the Yakuts. The province of Yakutsk is the largest in Siberia, and covers an area of no less than a million and a half of square miles. The population, consisting almost wholly of natives, Tunguses, Yakuts and Yukaghirs is estimated at 235,000 ; making about one inhabitant to every seven square miles. The Russian population of the province is about 7,000, and is confined almost entirely to the valley of the Lena, Yakutsk, and its neighborhood. In the most northern villages of Siberia their dwelling places consist of cabins, built of logs or planks from broken-up lighters, and having flat, turf-covered roofs. Such carvings and ornaments as are commonly found on the houses of well-to-do Russian peasants are here completely wanting. (140) RUSSIAN PEASANTS IN SIBERIA. 141 Further south the villages are larger, and the houses of the Russians finer, with raised roofs and high gables richly ornamented with wood carvings. There is usually a church SIBERIAN VILLAGE CHURCH. painted in bright colors, and everything indicates a degree of prosperity. In the center of the house is a brick stove, and the walls of the rooms are white-washed or papered, and adorned with pictures according to the means and taste of the owner portraits of the Imperial family, battle scenes, lithographs of the saints, and family photographs. Sacred 142 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. pictures are placed in a corner, and before them hang small oil lamps or wax-candles which are lighted on festive occasions. The sleeping place is formed of a bedstead near the roof, so large that it occupies a third of the room. The top of the stove is also used as a sleeping place at times. Food ia RUSSIAN PEASANT, WITH SAMOVAR cooked in large baking ovens. Fresh bread is baked every- day, and even for the poor, a large tea urn (samovar} is an almost indispensable household article. The foreigner is certain to receive a hearty welcome when he crosses the threshold, and if he stays a short time, he will generally, YUKAGHIRS AND TUNGUSES. 143 whatever time of the day it be, find himself drinking a ti glass of tea with his host. Along with the dwellings of the Russians, the tents of the natives, or "Asiatics," are often seen; and near them are generally a large number of dogs, which a re used in summer for towing boats, and in winter for drawing sledges. OSTYAK TENTS MADE OF BIRCH BARK. Very little is known of the Yukaghirs, who roam over the northern portion of the tundra ; their numbers are few, although at one time, as their legend says, there were more hearths of Yukaghirs on the banks of the Kolyma than stars in the sky. They were no doubt once a powerful race, and on the rivers Yana and Indigirka tumuli and ancient burial-places are pointed out containing, with the remains of the natives, bows, arrows, spears, and the magic drum. The Tunguses wander over a larger area than any other tribe in Siberia, stretching through Manchuria across the district of the Amoor, and northeast and west to the sea of Okhotsk and to the Yenisei. Of the Tunguse family the Manchu is the most civilized, while in Siberia we have them 144 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. in their extreme character of rude nomads, unlettered, and still pagan, or but imperfectly Christianized. The Tungusian approaches the Mongolian, the Ostjak, or the Eskimo, accord- ing as his residence is north or south ; within the limit of the growth of trees or beyond it ; on the champaign, the steppe, or the tundra. On the tundra the horse ceases to be his domestic animal, and the reindeer or the dog replace it Ilence we hear of three divisions of the Tunguse family, called by different names, according as they possess horses, reindeer, or dogs. In the center of the province, occupying the valley of the Lena, roam the Yakuts. They are of middle height, and of a light copper color, with black bah*, which the men cut short. They belong to the great Turk family, and as a race are good-tempered, orderly, hospitable, and capable of endur- ing great privation patiently ; but they have not the independ- ence of character which distinguishes their Tunguse neigh- bors. Some travelers see in them a strong resemblance to the North American Indians. The winter dwellings of the Yakuts have doors of raw hides, and log or wicker walls calked with cow-dung, and flanked with banks of earth to the height of the windows. The latter are made of sheets of ice, kept in their place from the outside by a slanting pole, the lower end of which is fixed in the ground. They are rendered air-tight by pouring on water, which quickly freezes round the edges. The flat roof is covered with earth, and over the door, facing the east, the boards project, making a covered place in front. Under the same roof are the winter shelters for the cows and for the people, the former being the larger. The fire- place consists of a wicker frame plastered over with clay, room being left for a man to pass between the fireplace and the wall. The hearth is made of beaten earth, and on it there is at all times a blazing fire, and logs of larchwood throw up showers of sparks to the roof. Young calves, like children, are often brought into the house to the fire, whilst their mothers cast a contented look through the open door NATIVE WINTER DWELLINGS. 145 at the back of the fireplace. Behind the fireplace, too, are the sleeping-places of the people, which in the poorer dwell- ings consist only of a continuation of the straw laid in the cow-house. In the winter they have but about five hours of day-light, which penetrates as best it can through the icy windows ; and in the evening all the party sit round the fire on low stools, men and women smoking. The summer yourts of these people arc formed of poles about 20 feet long, which are united at the top into a roomy cone, covered with pieces of bright yellow and perfectly flexible birch bark, which are not merely joined together, but are also handsomely worked along the seams with horsehair thread. The houses arc not over-stocked with furniture, and the chief cooking-utensil is a large iron pot. The Yakuts who inhabit the inclement region adjacent to the Frozen Ocean have neither horses nor oxen, but breed large numbers of dogs, which draw them to and fro on their fishing excursions. Even those living on the 62d parallel keep cattle under far greater difficulties than usual, for they have to make long journeys to collect hay, and do not always find enough. The cold prevents their breeding sheep, goats, or poultry. Nevertheless, cattle and hunting are their chief means of subsistence, for they do not in general cultivate the land, though in the gardens at Yakutsk are grown pota- toes, cabbages, radishes, and turnips. Some products of Yakutsk industry are purchased by the Russians, particular- ly floor-cloths of white and colored felts, which are cut in strips and sewed together like mosaic. From the earliest times they have been able to procure and work for them- selves metal. The language of the Yakuts, which is largely spoken by the Russians who live among them, is one of the principal means by which we are led to assume their Turkish origin, for Latham says their speech is intelligible at Con- stantinople, and their traditions (for literature they have none) bespeak a southern origin. Strahlenberg calls these people pagans, but the latest THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. writers call them Christians ; and the method of their con- version was, it is said, extraordinary ; for the Russian priests not making much headway against their superstitions, an ukase was one day issued setting forth that the good and NATIVE GIRLS OP YAKUTSK IN WINTER COSTUME. loyal nation of the Yakuts Averc thought worthy to enter, and were consequently admitted into, the Russian Church, to become a part of the Czar's Christian family, and entitled to all the privileges of the rest of his children. Success at- tended the measure. The new Christians showed perfect sincerity in the adoption of their novel faith, and the Rus- sian priests have established their sway over the Yakut race, THE ASIATIC POLE OF COLD. 147 though amongst the outlying portion a lingering belief in Shamanism still survives. The town of Yakutsk has a population of about 5,000 per- sons, some of whom are political exiles. All the Russian inhabitants might well be considered exiles, for they are over 5,000 miles from St. Petersburg. The town presents a curious medley of dwellings, for there are seen the govern- ment buildings, the cathedral and churches, the wooden houses of the Russians, and also the less pretentious winter dwellings of the Yakuts, and even their summer yourts. ^ ^-"-i" . ' -- ' - 'V-t. YAKUTSK IN OUR DAYS. The cathedral is built of stone, and dedicated to St. Nicholas, and there are in the town some half-dozen churches in which parts, or all, of the service is performed in the Yakut language. The chief ecclesiastic is Dionysius, Bishop of Yakutsk and Viluisk, who has in his hyperborean diocese 49 churches and chapels, and one monastery containing a dozen monks. According to Sir Edward Brewster the town of Yakutsk is near the Asiatic pole of cold one of the two coldest 148 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. places on the globe. The mean temperature of the air IB 18.5 Fahrenheit. At times the cold reaches 70 below zero, and mercury is frozen for one-sixth of the year. A warm summer follows the cold winter ; the ground is then thawed three feet deep, and though the crops rest on perpetually frozen strata, yet they produce from fifteen to forty-fold. Oxen here take the places of horses, and men and girls ride them astride. When used to draw sledges, the driver IB perched on the back of one of the oxen. So accustomed do the natives become to the cold, that even with the thermometer at many degrees below freezing point, the Yakut women, with bare arms, stand in the open- air markets, chatting and joking as pleasantly as in genial spring. In fact, the great cold is not thought a grievance in Siberia, for a man clothed in furs may sleep at night in an open sledge when the mercury freezes in the thermom- eter; and wrapped up in his pelisse, he can lie without inconvenience on the snow under a tent where the tempera- ture of the air is 30 below zero. John Ledyard, referred to in a former chapter, resided at Yakutsk in the winter of 1787, and was an attentive observer of whatever came under his notice. The following are ex- tracts from the journal which he kept at Yakutsk: " The people in Yakutsk have no wells. They have tried them to a very great depth, but they freeze over even in summer ; consequently they have all their water from the river. But in winter they cannot bring water in its fluid state ; it freezes on the way. It is, therefore, brought in large cakes of ice to their houses, and piled up in their yards. Milk is brought to market in the same way. A Yakuti came into our house to-day with a bag full of ice. 'What,' said I, ' has the man brought ice to sell in Siberia?' It was milk. Clear mercury exposed to the air is constantly frozen. " In these severe frosts the air is condensed like a thick fog; the atmosphere itself is frozen; respiration is fatiguing; all exercise must be moderate as possible, in these seasons A CASE OF JEALOUSY. 149 there is no chase ; the animals submit themselves to hunger and security, and so does man. All nature groans beneath the vigorous winter. " The Russians have been here 150 years, and the Yakuti Tartars have been under the Russian government ever since ; yet they have made no alteration in their dress in general : but the Russians have conformed to the dress of the Yakuti. They appear to live together in peace and harmony, but the Yakuti hold no offices, civil or military. " The Tartar is a man of nature, not of art. He is a lover of peace. No lawyer here perplexing natural rights of property. No wanton Helen, displaying fatal charms. No priest with his outrageous zeal has ever disturbed the peace. Never, I believe, did the Tartar speak ill of the Deity, or <-nvy his fellow-creatures. He is contented to be what he is. Hospitable and humane, lie is uniformly tranquil and cheer- ful, laconic in thought, word and action. Those that live with the Russians in their villages are above mediocrity as to riches, but discover the same indifference about accumu- lating more and for the concerns of to-morrow that a North American Indian does. If it happens that they profess the Russian religion, they treat it with strange indifference, not unthinkingly, but because they do not think at all. " The house of the Russian is a scene of busy occupation, filled with furniture, provisions, women, children, dirt, and noise; that of the Tartar is as silent and-as clean as a mosque. There is very little furniture, and that is rolled up and bound in parcels in a corner of the house. " So strong is the propensity of the Russian to jealousy, that an ordinary Russian will be displeased if one even en- deavors to gain the good-will of his dog. I affronted the commandant of this town very highly by permitting his dog to walk with me one afternoon. He expostulated with me very seriously. I live with a young Russian officer, with whom I came from Irkutsk. No circumstance has ever in- terrupted the harmony between us but his dogs. They have 10 150 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. done it twice. A pretty little puppy he has came to me one day and jumped upon my knee. I patted his head and gave him some bread. The man flew at the dog in the utmost rage, and gave him a blow which broke his leg. I bid him beware how he disturbed my peace a third time by this ras- cally passion. " I have observed among all nations that the women orna- ment themselves more than the men ; that, wherever found, they are the same kind, civil, obliging, humane, tender beings; that they are ever inclined to be gay and cheerful, humorous and modest. They do not hesitate, like man, to perform a hospitable or generous action ; not haughty, not arrogant, nor supercilious, but full of courtesy and fond of society ; industrious, economical, ingenuous, more liable in general to err than man, but in general, also, more virtuous, and per- forming more good actions than he. I never addressed my- self in the language "of decency and friendship to a woman, whether civilized or savage, without receiving a decent and friendly answer. With man it has often been otherwise. In wandering over the barren plains of inhospitable Den- mark, through honest Sweden, frozen Lapland, rude and churlish Finland, unprincipled Russia, and the wide-spread regions of the wandering Tartar, if hungry, dry, cold, wet, or sick, woman has ever been friendly to me, and uniformly so ; and to add to this virtue, so worthy of the appellation of benevolence, these actions have been performed in so free and so kind a manner, that if I was dry I drank the / sweet draught, and if hungry ate the coarse morsel, with a double relish." The following are extracts from a letter which Lieutenant Danenhower wrote to his mother while in Yakutsk. It was dated December 30th, 1881, and published in the New York Herald : " The events of the last two and a half years are of course unknown to me, and it is with mingled feelings of doubt, hope, and fear that I write this letter. But I always hope LIEUTENANT DANENHOWKIt'.S LETTER. 151 for the best, and I am disposed to look upon the bright side. That sort of philosophy has carried me through very trying- experiences during the past three years when there seemed to be a very forlorn hope for me. a We are passing the time quietly, but impatiently. I will give you an idea of how we live. It is daylight here about eight A. M. We get up and have breakfast at a little hotel that is handy by. The forenoon I spend in reading a little, writing a little, and in attending to any business that 1 may happen to have on hand. About two P. M. General Tcher- nieff's sleigh arrives, and I go to dine with him ; generally return about four p. M.,and if I do not have visitors I take a nap and kill time as well as I can until nine P. M., when we have supper at the little hotel and then go to bed. " As I have told you before, I have found nice people in every part of the world that I have visited, and this place is by no means an exception. Last evening, for example, we spent very pleasantly at the house of a Mr. Carrilkoff, an Irkutsk merchant, who entertained us very well. His wife is a charming lady, and it was very pleasant to see their three beautiful children. They have a fine piano, the first one we have seen since leaving San Francisco. " I took our sick man, Jack Cole, with me to give tiim a little diversion. He behaved very well and the visit did him good. After my experience of the night before I was very glad to have him quiet yesterday. Some time after midnight I was awakened by a noise in my room. It was the 'old man' looking for a match. I took him to task sharply and sent him to bed. He went quietly, but after a little while I heard him go out ; I waited five minutes, and, as he did not return, 1 awoke the Cossack and sent him to look for the 'old man.' He returned without finding him ; I immediately dressed and went to the office of the Police Master and had the town searched for him. I was afraid that he would lie down on the snow, as he did on one occa- sion in the mountains. He was brought back within an hour with his toes frozen. I immediately applied snow to 152 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. them, and got the frost out of them, but he will probably suffer from chilblains for a long time. The next morning he was quiet and reasonable, and he begged me to have him well guarded, for at times he is out of his head. He is a very worthy man, nearly fifty years of age, and has been a very excellent man in his time. The great trouble at pre- sent is that he has to be idle, there being nothing for him to do but kill time. " Yakutsk is a city of 5,000 inhabitants, and is situated on the west bank of the Lena River. It is the chief city in this part of Siberia, and is the residence of the Governor General Tchernieff. The houses are built of wood and are not painted. The streets are very wide, and each hoti.se has a large yard or court. The principal trade is in furs, and in summer a great deal of fresh meat is sent up the river. This is a very cold place. During nine months of the year snow and ice abound. In the winter the thermometer falls to 70 degrees below zero. Since our arrival it has been 68 degrees below, and to-day it is only 35 or thereabouts. In the summer the temperature rises as high as 95 degrees, but the nights are cold. " There are many horses and cows in this vicinity. The natives of Yakutsk eat horse-meat, but the Russians eat beef and venison, potatoes, cabbage, and a few other vegetables. A few berries, wheat, and rye are grown in this vicinity. There are a few sheep and poultry also. The Russian Christmas is twelve days after ours. They have a great round of festivities during the Prasnik. In fact it has al- ready commenced, and it is hard to get any work done. I went to the tailor's to get some clothes made and he refused to take any more work. "Of course there is very little American news in this far- away place, but I have been able to pick up a few bits of it here and there. The death of Garfield is a topic often men- tioned, and from the accounts here I learn that he was shot by ' Guiott,' on the train near Long Branch. A great deal of interest and sympathy is manifested by the Russians." A WINTER JOURNEY. 153 On the 8th of January, 1882, Lieutenant Danenhowcr, Raymond L. Ncwcomb (Naturalist,) Herbert Leach, Henry Wilson, Frank Mansen, George Lauderback, Louis P. Noros, Ja-'k Cole, the Chinaman Tong Sing, and the Indian Anequin, left Yakutsk, and started for Irkutsk, 2,790 versts, or move than 1,900 miles distant. They were accompanied by a Co- - sack guide, and traveled slowly in sledges called povvshkas. which could be partly or entirely covered, us the travcle;- hose. CHAPTER XIV. IRKUTSK. IRKUTSK is the capital of Eastern Siberia, and also of the province of the same name. It was founded in 1680, and in 1879 had a population of 33,000. Geographi- cally it is in latitude 52 deg. 40 min. north, and it is about 1,300 feet above the level of the sea. Although a cold place in winter, the climate is generally well spoken of ; high winds and storms are less prevalent than in St. Petersburg and Moscow, and the fall of snow is not large. Earthquakes are not infrequent. Much has been written in praise of Irkutsk by travelers coming from China or traveling eastward, and they have found it a cheerful restingplace after the fatigues of a long overland journey. In summer the city is approached from the west over a road lying near the cold and swiftly-flowing Angara, and the plains around are stocked with cattle. The town is built on a tongue of land formed by the confluence of the Angara and Uska-Kofka, and with its numerous churches, domes, and spires, looks extremely inviting. Handsome villas, nestling among the trees on the hills around, add not a little to the picturesqueness of the scene ; and both in summer and winter the panorama of the city and its suburbs is one of much beauty. Forty miles to the eastward of Irkutsk is the celebrated Lake Baikal, over 400 miles long, about 35 miles broad, and the largest body of fresh water in the world. It has nearly 200 tributaries, large and small, and only one outlet, the Angara, which discharges about one-tenth of the water that flows into the lake. No one knows what becomes of the remainder, but the natives believe there is an underground (154) K ts f tl X H te THE VALLEY OF THE ANGARA. 15T channel to the sea. The hike is very deep, and in some places no bottom has been found at a depth of 2,000 feet. Shortly after leaving Irkutsk, the eastward-bound traveler enters a wooded part of the Angara Valley, and as the road winds along it many points are passed presenting magnifi- cent views. Afterwards the valley becomes more rugged, with dee]) ravines running up into the mountains. Beyond this the road has been cut along the edge of a cliff at a con- siderable height above the river, and about five miles before reaching the Baikal a scene is presented which will cause the traveler to pause and admire. VIEW IN IRKUTSK. The valley becomes wider, and the mountains rise abruptly to a much greater elevation. The Angara is here more than a mile wide, and its great volume of water is seen rolling down a steep incline, forming a rapid nearly four miles in length. At the head of this, in the center of the stream, a great mass of rock rises, held sacred by the followers of Shamanism, and where its victims used to be sacrificed by tossing them into the torrent below. Beyond is the broad expanse of the Baikal, extending about 50 miles to where its waves wash the foot of Amar Daban, whose summit, even in June, is usually covered with snow. The mighty torrent throwing up its jets of spray, the rugged rocks with 158 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. their fringes of pendant birch overtopped by lofty pines, and the coloring on the mountains, produce a picture of extra- ordinary beauty and grandeur. A few miles further, and the Baikal is seen spreading out like a sea, and its waves are heard beating on the rocky shore. In July, 1879, the city of Irkutsk was devastated by a ter- rible fire, from the effects of which it has not yet recovered. Mr. Henry Landsell, an English traveler, arrived at a hotel in Irkutsk just as the fire broke out, and has given a graphic description of what followed, in his book "Through Siberia," from which the following extracts are taken : " The waiter said he thought the fire would not come to- wards the hotel, as the wind blew from the opposite direc- tion ; but I was disinclined to wait and see, and so we bundled our things back into the tarantass, and told the yemstchiks, who fortunately had not left the yard, to put to their horses, and in a few minutes we were out in the street, witnesses of a sight that is not easy to describe. Men were running from all directions, not with the idle curiosity of a London crowd at a fire, but with the blanched faces and fear-stricken countenances of those who knew that the de- vastation might reach to them; they looked terribly in earnest women screamed and children cried. The yemst- chiks asked, 'Where should they go?' and my companion suggested that we should go out of the town, across the river. We soon put nearly a mile between us and the flames, and reached the bank of the Angara, where was a swinging ferry. " Meanwhile the increased smoke in the distance showed that the fire was spreading, and the inhabitants of the small suburb called Glasgova, to which I had come, were looking on in front of their houses. Among the people I noticed a well-dressed person, whom I addressed, asking if she spoke English or French. She at once inquired who I was, and what I wanted. I replied that I was an English clergyman traveling, that I had just arrived in Irkutsk, had run awaj from the fire, and was seeking a lodging. She answered A CITY ON FIRE. 159 that there were no lodgings to be had in any of the few houses on that side of the river ; ' but,' said she, l pray come into my little house, where you are welcome to remain at least during the day.' I was only too glad to do so ; and, seeing that there was a small yard adjoining, I asked per- mission to put therein our two vehicles, in which we might sleep until some better place could be found. We soon found that our hostess was of good family, and an exile, though not a political, but a criminal one. On arriving at Irkutsk, the Governor-General had shown her kindness in allowing her to remain in the city, where she partly sup ported herself by giving lessons, and was living for the sum- mer in this quasi country-house with a young man whom she called her brother, her little girl she had brought from Rus- sia, and a small servant whom she spoke of as ' ma petite femme de chambre.' There was one tolerably spacious dwelling-room in the house, and in this were sundry tokens of refinement brought from a better home. On the wall hung a photograph of herself, as a bride leaning on the arm of her husband in officer's uniform, whilst several other photographs and ornaments spoke also of a better past. u The. conflagration was increasing, and I offered to ac- company Madame to her friends residing in the town, to see if we could be of use, whilst my interpreter stayed with the tarantasses and the little girl to guard the promises. We accordingly set out, accompanied by her maid. At the ferry we met a crowd of persons fleeing from the city, and carry- ing with them what was most valuable or most dear. An old lady tottering under a heavy load of valuable furs, piled on her head ; a poor half-blind nun, hugging an ikon, evi- dently the most precious of her possessions ; a delicate young lady in tears, with her kitten in her arms ; and boys tugging along that first requisite of a Russian home, the brazen samovar. Terror was written on every countenance. " Before long we came to the wide street in which were situated the best shops and warehouses, and where the fire was raging on either side and spreading. Those who were 160 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. wise were bringing out their furniture, their account-books, and their treasures as fast as possible, and depositing them in the road and on vehicles, to be carried away. A curious medley these articles presented. Here were costly pier- glasses, glass chandeliers, and pictures such as one would hardly have expected to see in Siberia at all ; whilst a little further on, perchance, were goods from a grocer's or pro- vision merchant's shop, and all sorts of delicacies such as sweets and tins of preserved fruit, to which they who would helped themselves ; and working-men Avere seen tearing open the tins to taste, for the first time in their lives, slices of West India pine-apples or luscious peaches and apricots. Other prominent articles of salvage were huge family bottles of rye-brandy, some of which people hugged in their arms, as if for their life, whilst other bottles were standing about, or being drunk by those who carried them. The effects of this last proceeding soon became apparent in the grotesque and foolish antics of men in the incipient stage of drunken- ness. " In the street were all sorts of people soldiers, officers, Cossacks, civilians, tradesmen, gentlemen, women, and chil- dren, rich and poor, young and old. Some were making themselves useful to their neighbors, and a few were looking idly on. At every door was placed a jug of clean water for those to drink who were thirsty, and it would have been well if nothing stronger had been taken. The fire brigade arrangements seemed to be in great confusion. There were some English engines in the town, but the Siberians had not practiced them in the time of prosperity, and the consequence was that the pipes had become dry and useless, and would not serve them in the day of adversity. The arrangements, too, for bringing water were of the clumsiest description. A river was flowing on either side of the city, but x the fire- men had no means of conducting the water by hose, but carried it in large barrels on wheels. Moreover, no one took command. Now and then one saw a hand-machine in use, about the size of a garden engine. A CITY ON FIltK. 161 "It soon became apparent that Madame could not reach her friends, who lived on the other side of the city, and therefore we made our way back towards the ferry, calling here and there and offering help. One friend asked us to take away her little daughter, which we did, and her hus- band's revolver, which I carried, and a bottle of brandy- put into the arms of the femme-de-chambre. Thus laden, we walked towards the river, whilst on all hands men and women were pressing into their service every available worker for the removal of their goods. A religious proces- sion likewise was formed by priests and people with banners, headed by an ikon, in the hope that tbe fire would be stayed. BURNING OP IRKUTSK. "It was evening before we reached our temporary lodg- ings, and as the day closed the workers grew tired, many were drunk, and others gave up in despair. The flames continued to spread till the darkness showed a line of fire and smoke estimated at no less than a mile and a half in length. It seemed as if nothing would escape. To add to 162 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. the vividness of the scene, an alarm of church bells would suddenly clang out to intimate that help was wanted in the vicinity. Perhaps shortly afterwards the flames would lie seen playing up the steeple and peeping out of the apertures and windows; then reaching the top, and presenting the strange spectacle of a tower on fire, with the flames visible only at the top, middle, and bottom. At last the whole would fall with a crash, and the sky be lit up with sparks and a lurid glare such as cannot be forgotten. "Meanwhile the inhabitants continued to flee by thou- sands the swinging ferry near us crossed and recrossed incessantly, bringing each time its sorrowful load, either bearing away their valuables, or going back to fetch others. Many of the people brought such of their goods as they could save to the banks and islands of the two rivers, and there took up their abode for the night in a condition com- pared with which ours was comfortable. " We were supposed to sleep that night in the tarantass, but I rose continually to watch the progress of the fire, which towards morning abated, but only because it had burnt all that came in its way. About eleven o'clock the last houses standing on the opposite bank caught fire, and thus, in about four-and-twenty hours, three-fourths of the town were consumed." Danenhower's party arrived at Irkutsk, January 30th, and were received in a most courteous manner, and told to consider themselves the guests of the Russian government. During their long stay they were lodged a portion of the time in the house of the private secretary of General Ped- ashenki, the vice-governor-general of the province, which was finely located on the suburban side of the Angara, and afforded a delightful view of the pretty city on the other side of the fro/en river. The men had nearly recovered from the effects of their hardship, excepting Lieutenant Danenhower, whose eyes were in such a precarious condition that his physician forbade his traveling in winter, Mr. Newcomb, MR. JACKSON'S TRAVELS. 1<>3 who was badly run down, and Jack Cole, the boatswain of the Jeannette, whose mind became unbalanced during the retreat to the coast. Just about the time when Danenhower's party left Ya- kutsk to travel westward, another traveler, Mr. Jackson, special courier and correspondent of the New York Herald, started from Paris for Eastern Siberia, to meet the survivors of the Jeannette expedition, and thence to proceed to Yakutsk or to the mouth of the Lena, if advisable, to assist in the search for the missing men. Mr. Jackson arrived at St. Petersburg on the evening of January 12th, which was the new year's eve of the Russians. At this city he received every attention and much assistance from General Ignatieff, Minister of the Interior, and from General Anutschin, Governor-General of Eastern Siberia, who was passing the winter in St. Petersburg. He was fur- nished with a crown pordorhosna, a document carried by all high officials traveling on Russian post-routes, and it irave him the right to demand horses at the stations in o o preference to the ordinary traveler. The following is a translation thereof : BY COMMAND OF HlS IMPERIAL MAJESTY THE EMPEROR ALEXANDER ALEXANDRA) VICH, Supreme Ruler of all the Rusaias, &c., &c., - W O o W P s J CHAPTER XV. LIEUTENANT DANENHO WEE'S NARRATIVE. rriHE Jeannette left San Francisco on the 8th of July, -L 1879, with a full outfit for three years, with five com- missioned officers of the navy, two civil scientists, and twen- ty-four of the ship's company. We arrived at Ounalaska on the 3d of August, after a long passage caused by head winds and the vessel being laden below her proper bearings. The Jeannette was perfectly seaworthy, having been thoroughly put in order at Mare Island before starting. After coaling- ship at Ounalaska we proceeded to St. Michael's, Alaska, to meet our supply schooner, the Fanny A. Hyde. There we filled up with stores, got fur clothing, purchased forty dogs and engaged two American Indians Anequin and Alexai as hunters and dog-drivers, thus completing our complement of thirty-three. On the 25th of August we crossed Bering's Sea, in a very heavy gale, and though the ship was loaded very deeply she behaved admirably. We visited St. Lawrence Bay in order to take in coal and the remaining supplies from the schooner, as well as to con- verse with the native Chukches and to get news of Nordens- kiold. We met about twenty natives, one of whom had learned a little English from American traders, and he told us that a steamer had passed south the previous June. The natives were ragged and dirty, and had no food to dispose of. We shot some wild fowl, and then we saw remains of vessels burned by the Shenandoah. Up the St. Lawrence Bay we found magnificent scenery. Wo sent off our last mail by the supply schooner, and on the 27th of August, seven P. M., we started north. Next day we passed through Bering's Strait. 11 (169) 170 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. We rounded East Cape about three of the afternoon of the 28th ; it was then cloudy, no observations, running by dead reckoning. The East Cape loomed very bold and bluff. We could not see the Diomedes in the straits. On the 29th I saw, from the crow's-nest, huts on the beach. We stood in and found a summer settlement. Captain De- Long and a party of officers started ashore in the whale-boat, but could not land owing to the surf breaking on iceward. Seeing the difficulty, the natives launched a bidarah, or large skin boat, very skilfully, and came off to the ship, bringing their chief with them. We had a long interview with them in the cabin, but as neither party could understand the other the results of the conversation were not great. They made us understand, however, by bending the elbow and saying " Schnapps " what they wanted, but the captain refused to listen to their request. Lieutenant Chipp then went ashore and succeeded in landing about midnight, and from an old woman from King's Island who could talk with our Indians, we learned that Nordenskiold with the Vega had wintered to the north of them, and had passed east to Bering's Strait in the month of June. The next day we cruised along the coast to the westward. Met two other parties of natives, who came alongside, but took a look at us only. On Sunday, August 31st, we fell in with some drift ice, and at daylight discovered a few huts on the beach. The drift ice extended about four miles off shore. Lieutenant Chipp, Ice-Pilot Dunbar and I, went ashore in the whale-boat to inter- view the natives. After a two hours' pull through the drift- pack, and seeing many seals, we reached the beach and found several carcasses of recently slain walrus. The natives seemed rather shy, and we had to look them up in their skin tents. There we found a sailor's trypot, and a cask marked " Centennial brand of whiskey," conclusive proof that the people were in occasional communication with American traders. We met an intelligent young Chukche, who offered to show us the spot where the Vega had wintered. We took a tx 3 en -i O s -I o 3 THK VILA'S WINTER QUARTERS. 173 tramp of several hours to the westward, and saw a bay about fifteen miles wide between the headlands, and there the natives told us the Vega had passed the winter. We found nothing there of any consequence. In the tents, however, we found tin cans marked ' Stockholm," scraps of paper with soundings marked in Swedish, and some interesting pictures of Stockholm professional beauties. The natives indicated to us by signs that the steamer had passed safely out to the east. After purchasing some of the pictures and tin cans we returned to the ship. During my absence the captain had got the sun at noon, and the latitude placed us about fifteen miles inland. Our astronomical positions were not reliable, owing to the state of the weather, but from them and the dead reckoning we felt assured that the coast is not correctly charted. The general appearance of the coast was fresh and pleasing. Off what we supposed to be Cape Serdze Kamen we saw a large heart-shaped rock, of which Mr. Collins made an elaborate sketch. There were several sugar-loaf mountains in sight. Our walk to the Vega's winter quarters was over a inossy tundra ; no signs of deer ; the vegetation withered. The natives were hospitable, and one old Chukche dame pressed us to eat a dish of walrus blood, but we felt compelled to refuse the offer. The natives were stalwart and handsome ; they lived in skin tents and were exceedingly dirty. They were well clad, and the chief wore a red calico gown as the distinguishing mark of his dignity. This was the last time most of us touched land for a period of more than two years. About 4 P. M., August 31st, we stood to the northwest, shaping our course to the southeast cape of Wrangel Land, and then we felt that our Arctic cruise had actually com- menced. We met considerable drift ice ; the weather was stormy and misty. About sunrise, September 1st, we dis- cerned an island which was taken to be Kolyutschin, in Ko- lyutschin Bay. Next day we met pack ice in floes of moderate size, turned to the northward and northeastward, and cruised 174 THE JEANNETTB ARCTIC EXPEDITION. along the Siberian pack, entering leads at times to examine them. On the afternoon of September 4th a whaling bark bore down to us ; we stopped engines and awaited her approach, but the weather became misty and she did not speak us. We had an Arctic mail on board at the time, and were disap- pointed at not being able to send letters home. We ran in several times and made fast to floe-pieces, to await clear weather. That afternoon, about 4, we saw an immense tree, with its roots, drifting by. Ice-pilot Dunbar, seeing it, said that in 1865, when the Shenandoah destroyed the whalers, he was at St. Lawrence Bay ; and when, a few months later, he landed on Herald Island, he was greatly surprised to see masts and portions of the destroyed vessels drifting in that vicinity. This made me look out for a north- west drift. Then Herald Island loomed up in the clouds. WHALERS STOPPED BY THE ICE. On the 6th of September the captain judged that we had reached the lead between the Siberian and North American packs, and that this was a good place to enter. He took charge from the crow's-nest, and we entered the pack. We met with the young ice, and forced our way through it by ramming. This shook the ship very badly, but did not do her any damage ; indeed, the ship stood the concussions hand- NEAR HERALD ISLAND. IT/", somely. But at 4 P. M. we could proceed no further. Wo banked fires, secured the vessel with ice-anchors, and remained. That night was exceedingly cold. The ship was frozen in. At this time the ice \vas in pieces ranging from ten square yards to several acres in area, with small water- courses like veins running between them, but now quite frozen over. It remained quiet for a number of days, and we found ourselves in the middle of a large accumulation of floes about four miles across. We were then in about twenty fathoms of water, and had Herald Island in sight to the southward and westward, twenty-one miles distant by triangulation on a base line of 1,100 yards. About the 15th of September, First Lieutenant Chipp, Ice- Pilot Dunbar, Engineer Melville, and the Indian, Alexai. started with a dog-sledge for Herald Island. They got within six miles of the beach, when they found open water before them, and were compelled to return. We found the ship drifting with the ice, and with so uncertain a base the captain would not send other persons to the island with boats. The general appearance of the ice at this time was uniform, with here and there almost snowless hummocks appearing above the surface, between which were pools whereon the men could skate. The deflorescence of salt was like velvet under the feet. From day to day we saw a loom- ing of land to the southwest, and sometimes in the clouds. We soon found that the ice always took up the drift with the w r ind. The ship at this time began to heel to starboard under the pressure, and inclined about twelve degrees. We unshipped the rudder, got up mast-head tackles on the port side, with lower blocks hooked to heavy ice-anchors about a hundred and fifty feet distant, and set them taut in order to keep the ship upright. The propeller was not triced up, but was turned so that the blades would be up and down the stern- post ; the engines were tallowed, but not taken apart. When the ship commenced to heel, the local deviation of the com- pass increased in the ratio of one and a half degrees duration 176 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. to one degree of list. This was owing to the vast amount of iron-work, and especially the canned goods, which had to be stowed in the after-hold and on the quarter-deck. All our compass observations had of course to be made on the ice SKATING ON THE YOUNG ICE. well clear of the ship. At this time and later on we noticed that the turning motion of the floe or change in azimuth of the ship's head was very slow; but the floe did have a cycloidal motion with the wind, and the resultant was in the northwest direction. Our position was not an enviable one. At any moment the vessel was liable to be crushed like an egg-shell among this enormous mass of ice, the general thickness of which was from five to six feet, though some was over twenty where the floe-pieces had overrun and cemented together and turned topsy-turvy. Pressures were constantly felt. We heard distant thundering of the heavy masses, which threw up high ridges of young ice that looked like immense pieces of crushed sugar. IMUFTING. 177 The month of October was quiet. We had had no equi- noctial gales even in September. The cold was very bitter. Wrangel Land was in plain sight tu south and west many times, and especially on the 28th and 29tli of October, when we could see mountains and glaciers, whieli we identified on many occasions. Collins took sketches of them. The ship was drifting to and fro with the wind. Up to this time we saw a considerable number of seals and walrus, and got two bears. Two white whales were also seen, which were the only ones noticed during the whole cruise. Life on board was quiet but monotonous. We got many observations, es- pecially from the stars. The nights were very clear, and suitable for artificial horizon work. We began to find at this time, and by later experience be- came convinced, that Rear-Admiral John Rodgers was right when he said that the sextant, artificial horizon, and the lead were the most efficient and useful instruments in exploring Arctic waters, and that transits and zenith telescopes were not useful, because refined observations could not be obtained, and were not necessary in this region. The cold is so great as to affect the instrument, and it is almost impossible to keep the lens free of frost and vapor, thus making the re- fraction a very indefinite correction. Our experience in this pack was, that the state of the atmosphere was constantly changing; without a moment's notice the ice would sometimes open near the ship, and vast columns of vapor would rise whenever the difference of temperature between the air and water was great. The surface water was generally 29 Fah- renheit, the freezing point of salt water. About the 6th of November the ice began to break up. We had previously observed considerable agitation about the full and change of the moon, and attributed it to tidal action. This was observed particularly when we were between Her- ald Island and Wrangel Land, and when the water was shoaled that is, about fifteen fathoms the ice began to break round the ship, and a regular stream of broken masses gradually encroached upon us. From aloft, the floe 178 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. that had appeared so uniform a few weeks before was now tumbled about, and in a state of greater confusion than an old Turkish graveyard. Tracks began to radiate from the ship, and the noise and vibration of distant ramming were terrific, making even the dogs whine. THE ICE IN MOTION. November 3d was a calm, starlight night. I got good star observations, with Melville marking time, at eleven P. M. I was working them up, when a crack was heard, and we found that the floe had split, and that the ice on the port side had drifted off, leaving the ship lying in a half cradle on her starboard bilge. The water looked smooth and beautiful, and there was no noise save that of four dogs which had drifted off with the port ice. We had previously taken in the observatory, and had prepared for such an accident, but on the starboard side the steam-cutter and the men's out- house had been left. We got the steam-cutter aboard, but left the outhouse standing. And here let me mention an interesting fact. About six- teen months afterward, the Indian Anequin caine in, in a ANEQUIN'S DISCOVERY. 179 state of great excitement for an Indian generally so stolid, and reported, " Me found two man house ! " He described it as a house large enough for two men, and when asked if he had been inside said, u No, me plenty 'fraid ! " Judge of our surprise. Lieutenant Chipp immediately started with the Indian and others, and found the house at a distance of about three miles to the southeast. It proved to be the lost out-house, thus showing that the relative positions of the pieces in the vicinity were comparatively unchanged. The next morning the half cradle on which the port side had rested could be seen about a thousand yards distant, and this immense lead was open, but of very limited length. The appearance of the ice can be likened to an immense cake as it comes from the oven, broken and cracked on the surface. A few mornings later the drift ice came down upon us un- der the starboard bow, and wedged the ship off her cradle, and she went adrift in the gale. This was about eight A.M. She drifted all day until seven P.M , when she brought up on some young ice, and was frozen in solid again. It was dark. in the long night, and there was no chance of working the pack had it been good judgment to do so. We reckoned that she had drifted at least forty miles, with the ice in her immediate vicinity. Previous to this time the ship had stood the pressure in the most remarkable manner. On one occasion I stood on the deck-house above a sharp tongue of ice that pressed the port Bide just abaft the fore chains and in the wake of the im- mense truss that had been strengthened by the urgent advice of Engineer-in-chief William H. Shock, on Mare Island. The fate of the Jeannette was then delicately balanced, and when I saw the immense tongue break and harmlessly un- derrun the ship, I gave heartfelt thanks to Shock's good judgment. She would groan from stem to stern ;, the cabin doors were often jammed so that we could not get out in case of emergency, and the heavy truss was imbedded three- quarters of an inch into the ceiling. The safety of the ship at that time was due entirely to the truss. The deck plank- 180 THE JKANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. ing would start from the beams, showing the unpainted wood for more than half an inch. This, together with the sharp cracking of the ship's fastenings, like the report of a distant charge of rifles, would wake us at night. Each man kept his knapsack by him ready for an instant move, and prepa- rations were made for leaving the ship with sleds and boats if necessary. Several gales, the heaviest being about fifty miles an hour, occurred in the fall of 1879. The long night commenced about the 10th of November, and lasted till the 25th of Jan- uary, 1880. On November 1st the winter routine com- menced. At seven, call all hands and start fires in the galleys ; at nine, breakfast ; from eleven to one, guns given to all hands to hunt and for exercise on the ice ; at three p. M., dinner ; then galley fires put out to save coal ; between seven and eight, tea, made from the Baxter boiler, which was used constantly to condense water, we having found that the floe ice was too salt for use, and the doctor insisted on using condensed water. This boiler was originally intended for the electric light, but it was found that we could not af- ford to run the light, so we used the coal in condensing water. Twenty-five pounds of coal per day was allowed for heating the cabin, twenty-five pounds for the forecastle, and ninety pounds for ship's galley for cooking purposes. We lived on canned goods, with bear and seal twice a week, pork-and-beans and salt beef once a week ; no rum or spirits, except on festive occasions, two or three times a year. The discipline of the ship was excellent, and during the whole twenty-one months in the pack there was but one punishment given, and that was for profanity. The crew were well quartered in berths, and were comparatively happy; had navigation class and theatricals. The health of all was excellent, and there was a special medical examination the first of every month. Things went on in this fashion until the middle of Janua- ry, when there were tremendous pressures, and the floes ac- tually backed up into mounds under the strain, the ice TREMENDOUS PRESSURES. 181 being very tough and elastic. The heaviest strain came iu the stem of the ship, in a longitudinal direction. There was also a heavy lateral strain, especially under the starboard main chains. About nine o'clock one morning a man went down into the fire-room on duty and found the floor-plates covered with water ; he immediately reported the fact, and all pumps were started. The temperature was below 42 degrees Fahrenheit (the freezing point of mercury). Mr. Melville had great difficulty in getting up steam and starting the donkey pumps, but succeeded admirably, the men work- ing with their feet and legs in ice- water, and everything frozen and" freezing solid. It was found that the vessl leaked badly in the bows, and we supposed that the hooding of the planks had been started at the stem, and it was not until the last day, June 12th, 1881, that we discovered that the forefoot had been twisted to starboard. The carpenter (Sweetman), with Nindermann, worked day and night, and (under the direction of Lieutenant Chipp) built a bulkhead forward of the foremast, which partially confined the water. Melville rigged an economical pump with the Baxter boiler, and the ship was pumped for nearly eighteen months. A windmill pump was also made for sum- mer, but the winds were so light that it hardly paid. During the last few months the leak decreased, owing to the ship floating higher, and we had then only to pump once every half hour by hand. The experience of January 19th gave me great confidence in the ship's company, as it was a very severe test on the men. I was confined to my berth at the time, but knew everything that was going on, and the solid and effective work done was very gratifying. As well as I can remember, about fifteen barrels of flour and some other dry provisions were damaged by this acci- dent. Previous to this we had to throw away a large quantity of canned roast-beef marked " Erie brand," it having proved bad. The coldest weather occurred in February, 1880, being 58 degrees. There were also some great and remarkable changes of temperature in the course of the day. 182 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. About the middle of February we were found to be about fifty miles from the place where we had entered, and Herald Island was said to have been in sight during one day. Dur- ing these five months we bad drifted over an immense area, approaching and receding from the 180th meridian, but I do not think we crossed it at that time. We continued to drift in this uncertain manner. We noticed that the ship always took up a rapid drift with southeast winds, and a slow drift with northeast winds, owing, doubtless, to Wrangel Island being under our lee. Southwest winds were not frequent. At times land was reported to the northeast, but nothing trustworthy. Some observers were constantly eeeing land at all points of the compass, and many was the trip that the navigator and the ice-pilot had to make to the crow's-nest in vain. We were very much disappointed at not being able to shift for ourselves, and up to this time we had only demon- strated to our satisfaction that Dr. Peterman's theory in re- gard to Wrangel Land being a portion of Greenland was no longer tenable, for its insularity was evident, as subsequently proved. March and April, 1880, were passed quietly, and we were surprised at not having any March gales. The geese and wild fowl that some of us expected to see on their spring migration, did not put in an appearance. One poor eider duck fell exhausted near the ship, and one of our sportsmen shot at it, and after administering chloroform it succumbed. There were some birds seen later in the season, moving to the westward, but they were not numerous. A great many mussel-shells and quantities of mud were often found on the ice, which indicated that it had been in contact with land or shoals. Our hunters ranged far and wide, and often brought in small pieces of wood on one occasion a codfish head, and on another some stuff that was very much like whale-blubber, all of which had been found on the ice. On May 3d, fresh southeast winds began, and the ship took up a rapid and uniform drift to the northwest. Now Mr. Collins began to predict, and told me several times, that ME. CULLIiNrt's PUEDICTIONS. 183 these winds would continue till the early part or the middle of June, and would be followed by constant northwest winds for the balance of June. This prediction was fully realized, and in the month of June we actually drifted back over the May track. During July and August there was scarcely any wind, and the weather was misty and raw, it being the most unpleasant time of the year, the coldest weather not excepted. The damp and fog and cold struck chill to the bones, and we could not afford to heat the ship as we did in winter. The ice seemed to absorb all the heat from the sun during the melting period of the year. The snow disappeared from the surface of the floe about the middle of June, and the best traveling period over the floe was considered to be between the middle of June and the middle of July. But this was a subject for constant discussion among the savans, among whom Mr. Dunbar was the most experienced, he having been an old traveler in the Baffin's Bay region. A considerable number of birds, prin- cipally phalaropes and guillemots, were shot and very much appreciated at dinner. The surface of the floe-pieces was now of a hard, green- ish blue, and flinty, being covered in many places with thaw- water. There were numerous cracks near the ship, but no leads that went in any definite direction, and there was* no chance to move, for the ship was imbedded in the ice so firmly that a whole cargo of explosives would have been useless. Lieutenant Chipp, an experienced torpedo operator, made torpedoes and all the arrangements for taking advan- tage of the first opportunity to free the ship. But the opportunity never came. Mr. Chipp was an accomplished electrician, and during the whole time in the ice he took up the subject recom- mended by the Smithsonian Institution to the Polaris Expe- dition namely, observations of the disturbances of the galvanometer during auroras. He had wires laid out over the ice, and earth-plates in the water, and the galvanometer in the current, and obtained over two thousand observations 184 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. during auroras, which he intended to turn over to a special- ist for purposes of analysis and judgment. He always found disturbances of the needle coincident with the most brilliant auroras. He also ran the telephones, which, however, gave a great deal of trouble, owing to the wires being broken by the wind and the ice movements. Those on the ship of course were all right. During my sickness he also made observa- tions of the eclipses of Jupiter's satellites, and got some excellent results for chronometer errors by using an improved ship's telescope mounted on a barrel. He afterward used the transit telescope similarly mounted. This was the best data for our chronometers, being far superior to lunar observations. The summer weather was very bright and pleasant for about fifteen days in July, and when the thermometer was above 40 degrees Fahrenheit we called it a warm day ; but the latter parts of July and August were particularly bad, being foggy and raw. During the first year we got sufficient game for table use, and seal -skins for clothing for the men, but this neces- sitated a great deal of hunting, and there was a great scarcity of game in this region. The seal most frequently obtained was the species called by Lamont, the " floe rat," and averages about sixty pounds in weight, and thirty to forty pounds when dressed. The men generally made up the skins into boots and trousers. The meat was not pleasant to the taste, and it required the strongest philosophy to enable one to eat it at all. AValrus was scarce, the depth of water being a little too great for them, as they seldom inhabit depths of more than fifteen fathoms. We got six, however, which furnished excellent food for the dogs, and our Chinese cook was an adept in making walrus sausage for our cuisine. Bear chases were frequent and exciting, and about fif- teen animals were obtained the first year. Mr. Dunbar was the champion bear-slayer, and was always ready for a keen jump when game was reported. During the first winter a. t rcmendous bear approached the ship about midnight, drove ARCTIC AURORAS. THE CHAMPION BEAR-SLAYER. 187 the dogs in, and attempted to board us over the port gang- plank. The alarm was given. Mr. Dunbar was on deck instantly, with rifle in hand, and shot the bear through the heart at ten paces. It was probably the biggest and most ferocious bear secured on the cruise, and he had been attracted by the quarters of his comrade that were triced up in the fore-rigging. A few foxes were seen, and their tracks quite frequently observed. They seemed to either accom- pany or follow the bears, like pilot-fish with the sharks, and jackals with their ferocious and stronger friends. During the summer some of us used to take the skin boats or the dingy, and paddle among the cracks. On one occasion Captain DeLong was alone in the dingy, and was A MUTUAL SURPRISE. interviewed by a bear who suddenly approached out of the mist and stood watching him in the most dignified manner. The captain retreated in good order. During the summer it was very difficult to get bears, because they could take to the water so readily, and thus cut off their pursuers. Dur- ing the misty times they were very bold, and on one occasion a she bear with two cubs approached the ship to within 400 yards of ihe starboard quarter. Fortunately, the dogs were 188 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. on the port side and to windward, so they did not scent the bear. The greatest quietness prevailed, and a squad of about ten riflemen was immediately organized on the poop. I was watching the bears through a cabin air-port, and it was a very fine sight to see the mother and her two cubs approach the ship in a wondering and cautious manner. I could see better under the mist than the people on the poop. I heard the captain say : " Do any of you think it is over 250 yards ?" All seemed to agree and he said : " Aim at 250 yards, and wait for the word ' Fire !' " Then succeeded a volley. The bears reeled and made several turns, and I thought that we had bagged all of them, but was astonished to see them get up and walk off in the most lively manner. Of course all the dogs took the alarm and pursued them to the first crack, which the bears calmly swam, across and thus escaped. But large drops of blood were seen, and the she-bear lay down once or twice as if wounded. In making her retreat she drove her cubs before her, and became impatient when they moved slowly. The bears had been hit, but the distance had been under-esti- mated and most of the shots had fallen short. This was not extraordinary, because it was very misty. After this one year of experience in the ice we concluded that the general motion of the ice was due principally to the wind, and that the resultant of the winds was from the southeast. Some of us talked about the polar region being covered with an immense " ice cap," which seemed to have a slow, general movement in the direction of the hands of a watch, the direction of the drift, of course, being different in the different segments. The influence of Wrangel Island would be to impede the drift of the segment lying to the northward and eastward, and I imagined that there must be a constant strife between Wrangel Land and the solid phalanx of ice from the northeast. This polar ice cap we know throws off in its revolutions millions of acres every year through the gates of Robeson's Channel' and between FOOD FOR REFLECTION. 189 Iceland and Greenland. A branch of the Gulf Stream at- tacks it from the Spitsbergen side, and its influence is felt as far as the North Cape of Asia. The general motion of this " cap "must be very slow, but the local motions of course depend upon the depth of the ocean and the vicinity of land, and near nature's outlets it is very rapid. Melville gave me lots of food for reflection. He analyzed all data obtainable from the Hydrographic Office reports and Arctic literature, and marked on the circumpolar chart with arrows the currents as reported by various navigators as well as those mentioned in the theories of distinguished geographers. We constantly discussed the question, and both felt assured that if the ship could remain intact long enough, she would eventually drift out between Spitsbergen and Bear Island to Atlantic waters. A very high latitude would doubtless be attained, an 1 would depend in a great measure on the influence of Franz Josef Land upon the motion of the pack. If the ship passed to the southeast of it, the local motion to the southwest might be very rapid by the pack impinging on those lands ; and if passing to the northward, the pack would be deflected toward the Pole and a very high latitude would be obtained, supposing no polar continental land to exist. It is my opinion that had we en- tered the pack 200 miles to the eastward of where we did, we could have worked up near Prince Patrick Land ; for Collinson found the deepest water over there to the east- ward, and sounded with 133 fathoms without finding bottom. Our smallest depth the first year's drift was seventeen fathoms, and the greatest depth not over sixty, the average being generally thirty, and the ocean bottom usually uni- form, with blue mud and in some cases shale, something like round pieces of potato, cut thin and fried, and supposed to be meteoric specimens. We felt pretty sure that we would continue to drift to the northwest during the following year, but I was not sure what influence the peculiar coast line in the vicinity of the North Cape would exert, it being in the 12 100 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. form of an elbow, and must therefore have great influence on the general motion of the pack. From the fact that the spars of the Shenandoah's devas- tations drifted to Herald Island, and that the whaling bark Gratitude had been last seen drifting to the northwest in that vicinity, we augured that there must also be some north- west current ; but we have no other evidence of a current except the formation of banks and shoals in the vicinity of Herald Island, which may be similar to the formation of the Grand Banks, by the ice bringing earthy matter there. The locality east-northeast of Wrangel Land may be regard- ed as the Arctic doldrums, as far as drift is concerned. We also considered the possibility of drifting down the western side of Wrangel Land, and then again perhaps once more being able to shift for ourselves. The general health of the ship's company was excellent, and we looked forward coolly, but not without some anxiety, to the long night of the second winter, during which time we might at any instant be rendered homeless and at the mercy of the Arctic fiends. THE CROW'S-NEST. CHAPTER XVI. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE (CONTINUED.) AT the beginning of September, 1880, the Jeannette was firmly imbedded in ice of about eight feet in thickness ; but there were immense masses shoved under her keel, and the bows were lifted so that the keel was inclined about one degree, the ship at the same time heeling to starboard two degrees, and so firmly held in this gigantic vice that when the blacksmith struck his anvil in the fire-room, one could see the shrouds and stays vibrate, and they were not very taut. Our executive officer had slackened up the rigging during the first winter, and the contraction of wire rigging by the intense cold was of course very great. The ice was piled up under the main chains and as high as the plank- sheer. In the vicinity of the ship the ice was tumbled about in the greatest confusion, and traveling over it was almost an impossibility. In the latter part of September, when the cracks froze over, came the best time for travel, but the outlook was poor. There was comparatively little snow, and what there was was constantly blown by the wind, and rendered salt by attrition on the surface of the ice, so that we could not use it for culinary purposes. The captain was very favorable to fall traveling, and he several times expressed himself to the effect that he would not abandon the ship while there was a pound of provisions left, and we generally understood that he would hold on a year longer, and probably start when the fall traveling commenced, a year later. We all considered that if our provisions held out long enough, if we were not attacked by scurvy, and if the ship was not crushed by the (191) 192 THE JEANNETTE A.RCTIC EXPEDITION. ice, we should eventually drift out after reaching the vicinity of Franz Josef Land, either north or south of it. The morale of the ship's company was excellent, yet we looked anx- iously toward the long night of the second winter, which proved to be the most fearful part of our experience. The anxiety and mental strain on many of us were the greatest at that time. We were so completely at the mercy of the ice that the vessel might be crushed at any moment by the thundering agencies which we constantly heard. In the month of September the ship was put in winter quarters for the second time. She was banked up with snow, the deck-house was put up for the use of the men, and the awning spread so that the spar-deck was completely housed over. Economy and retrenchment were the order of the day in fuel, provisions, and clothing. The old winter routine of meals, two hours' exercise, and so on, commenced on Nov- ember 1st, and all was going well. November and December were extremely cold, but we had no severe gales that I remember. The meteorological observa- tions were taken every hour during the first year, but every two hours only during the second. They were very thorough, and Mr. Collins was very watchful to add something to the science to which he was so thoroughly devoted. During my sickness the captain and Mr. Chipp took the astronomical observations, but each officer in the ship had a round of duty as weather-observer and to assist Mr. Collins. There was a quartermaster on watch all the time, and steam was kept on the Baxter boiler for distilling purposes. To save coal, fires were put out in the galley at 3 P. M., being used only from geven A. M. till that hour. The month of January, 1881, was remarkable for its changeable temperature, and as being warmer than the two previous months. About the middle of the month the wind set in from the southeast, and subsequently to that time the drift of the ship was uniformly to the northwest. The depth of the water began to increase toward the northwest, but would always decrease toward the southeast or south- A WINTER S DEI FT. 193 west, as well as to the northeast. The vessel seemed to drift in a groove, which we called Melville's Canal, as he was the first to call attention to the fact. Mr. Chipp took the soundings every morning, and by long experience we could judge of the drift so accurately that his dead reckoning gen- erally tallied with the observations. He adopted a scale by which ' slow ' drift meant three nautical miles per day ; ' moderate,' six miles ; ' rapid,' nine miles ; ' very rapid,' twelve miles. He always reckoned the direction and speed of the drift and placed the ship before making the observa- tion. His judgment was excellent. He and the captain made frequent lunar observations for chronometer errors, but those of the eclipses of Jupiter's satellites were the best. BEAR-HUNTING ON THE FLOE. February was the coldest month ; and the mean for the three months was only six degrees lower than that for the same months during the previous year. The soundings generally ran thirty-three, but one morning Mr. Dunbar sounded in forty-four ; some called that place Dun-bar Hole. We drifted over this spot once again at a later period. The absence of animal life prior to May was greater than during the pre- 194 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. vious year. All hands hunted every day, especially as the doctor wanted fresh meat for the Indian Alexai, who was said to have the scurvy, and suffered very greatly from ab- scesses on his leg. On May 1st, Dr. Ambler reported the physical condition of the crew rapidly deteriorating, and six or seven were placed on whiskey and quinine to tone them up. The weather at this time was good, and there were no spring gales. Of course when I say good, it is in an Arctic sense. JEANNETTE ISLAND. During the month of May, old man Dunbar was always in the crow's-nest, and got blind several times. The old gentle- man was looking out sharp for land, and about the 16th of May he was the first to announce it in sight. You can im- agine the excitement it caused, for we had not seen land for many months and had not set foot on it for nearly two years. Jcannette Island, as the new land was called, was not landed on, but the astronomical position of it could be, and doubtless was, well established from the data obtained by Captain De Long. It was by triangulation, on the base ea- JEANNETTE ISLAND. 195 tablishecl by observations on different days, the ship having drifted rapidly and giving a long base line, the extremities of which were established by artificial horizon and sextant observations. I was confined to my room at the time of the discovery, but every item of it was brought to me by Dun- bar, Melville, and Chipp, and everything was so minutely described to me that I could almost see the land through the ship's side. I understood Jeannette Island to be small and rocky. The southern end appeared high, and the land sloped down to a low point to the northward when the island was first seen, but subsequently mountains behind the low point were ob- served, and from this fact the island was adjudged to bo more extensive than at first supposed. Sketches were made whenever the island was in sight, but it would have .been foolish to have attempted a journey to it, for the drift of tho ship w r as too rapid and the state of the ice so changeable. A few days afterwards, Henrietta Island hove in sight, and appeared extensive. The drift of the ship seemed ar- rested by the northeast extremity of the island. Lieutenant Chipp was sick a-bed with what afterwards proved to be tin poisoning, and I was confined to my room with my eyes. So Mr. Melville had the good fortune to be the first to visit Henrietta Island, and he did his work admirably. When he left the ship the captain judged the island to be from twelve to fifteen miles distant, it appeared so plain, but he had not yet triangulated for it owing to the state of the weather. The journey from the ship to Henrietta Island was one of the hardest on record. Melville had to travel over immense masses of broken ice that were constantly in motion, and in most cases the dogs were worse than useless. He landed in a state of exhaustion, took a short run on the island, and then ordered the men to turn in. He intended to sleep until ten o'clock the next morning, but was probably anx- ious, and when he turned out his watch said seven o'clock, but it was probably P. M. In his anxiety he had slept only an hour and a half or two hours. The men said that they 196 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. felt as if they were just going to sleep. Feeling confident, however, that they had passed the twelve hours in their sleeping bags, he finished the examination of the island and started back to the ship, and was surprised on his return that he had gained twelve hours in time. This was not sur- prising, from the fact that during his visit to the island he did not see the sun but once, at which time Erickson said, 4 The sun is west, sir, and it is morning with us.' So Mr. Melville, on his return, had a suspicion that his time was out.' During this trip Mr. D unbar broke down with snow blindness, and had to be carried back by the party to the ship. On the way to the island he went ahead to select the road, and worked so hard and used his eyes so much that he became thoroughly disabled. The old gentleman felt very badly, it being the first time in his long career that he had ever been physically unequal to the occasion. He begged Melville to leave him, his mortification was so great. But of course this was not done. The others bore the trip remarkably well. They had been picked out as the flower of the ship's company. There was a mountain on the island that the men named after the captain's little daughter 'Mount Sylvie;' also another mountain which was called 'Mount Chipp;' two very bold headlands were called ' Bennett Headlands;' one bald cape was called ' Cape Melville,' in honor of one of the chief engineer's characteristics. There was a low, shingle beach cape extending to the northeast, that was called 'Point Dunbar.' All these names were given by the sailors who rambled over the island, and we have always called them by the names thus originally given them. At one time the land appeared so near to us that Machinist Lee said to me, ' Why, I can walk there and back, sir, before dinner.' On that day I was able to get on deck, and judged the land to be between twenty and thirty miles distant, and so I advised my friend not to try it. Melville told me that he could not tell the distance he HENRIETTA ISLAND. 19T traveled to within ten miles, but that the lowest possible estimate was eighteen, and the highest twenty-eight miles* Yon see, his journey back was on a different route, because the ship had drifted and had approached the island in the meantime. He gave me every detail of his trip with great minuteness. The island was bold and rocky, with a small number of birds, principally guillemots, and very little deer- moss on the place where he landed. But, of course, we do not know the possibilities of the extensive region to the southwest of the landing-point. AECTIC GLACIER. The island was covered witli an ice and snow cap, and the immense glacier near the landing-place was gigantic and magnificent. I think Melville got eighteen fathoms close to the island. No seal or walrus were seen, and no traces of bears on the island. No driftwood was seen. 198 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Melville built a cairn, and buried a square, copper case con- taining copies of the New York Herald brought from New- York by Mr. Collins, and a copper cylinder containing official documents, the latter being a record of Captain DeLong's determination to stay by the ship to the last moment. He announced in them his determination to stand by the ship as long as possible, as he was in hopes of making a high latitude during the following summer. We were all very glad when Melville got back, for the ice had commenced to swing around the corner of Henrietta Island very rapidly, the land to the westward of Bennett Headlands coming out rapidly, and keeping Collins and Newcomb busily sketching as the view changed. A SKETCH. The ship continued drifting to the northwest rapidly until June 10th. During this time the ice in which she was imbedded began to crack, and the area of the piece was decreasing rapidly. We knew that the important moment was coming when the Jeannette would be liberated from this cyclopean vice, and that her future would be more haz- ardous than while in the monster's grip ; for it was impos- THE SHIP RELEASED. 199 Bible to shape a course, and she would be momentarily liable to be crushed by the impact of the antagonistic floe-pieces, which sent immense masses of ice into the air, and among which the Jeannette would be like a glass toy-ship in a rail- road collision. About eleven p. M., June 10th, 1 was awakened by the ship's motion. It sounded as if she were sliding clown hill, or off the launching-ways. I was frightened for an instant, but immediately recovered and jumped out of bed for my clothes. The ship had slid off her bed after the ice on the port side had opened with a loud crack. There she floated calmly on the surface of the beautiful blue water. The Jeannette was finally released from her icy fetters after an imprisonment of twenty -one months that is, almost the entire duration of our voyage during which time we had been drifting with the pack. The important point of this drift is that we traversed an immense area of ocean, at times gyrating in almost perfect circles, and it can now safely be said that land does not exist in that area. Of course the depth and the character of the ocean-bed and the drift were also determined, as well as the animal life that exists in this part of the world; also the character of the ocean water, and many other facts of interest which were finished with the discovery of the two new islands. At this time we had a feeling of pleasure and pride that our voyage had not been entirely in vain, and we felt sure that we could add considerable to the knowledge of this region of the Arctic; and if we could have got out safely without loss of life, the voyage would have been a grand success. Captain DeLong, in my opinion, entered the ice boldly and deliberately, with the intention of trying the most hazardous route to the Pole that has ever been contemplated. When spoken to on the subject, within a few days after we found ourselves imprisoned, I stated that to be my opinion, and that he had undertaken the most daring and magnificent venture on record. To return to the Jeannette. She was floating idly, but, 200 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. of course, could not proceed, being hemmed in on all sides by almost limitless masses of ice in close contact, and having only a small pool in which she could bathe her sides. The starboard half of her old cradle remained, so she was hauled into it and secured with ice-anchors on the bow and quarter, to await her chance to escape. The rudder had been pre- viously shipped, and the screw propeller had been found to be undamaged, so every preparation was made to move at a moment's notice. On June llth Henrietta Island was seen for the last tirile, to the southeast of us. I will now describe the supreme and final moments in the life of the Jeamiette. At this period of the cruise I was able to spend one hour on deck, three times a day, for exer- cise, the last relapse of my left eye having taken place a month previous. I went on deck at one o'clock in the after- noon, and saw the hunters start out. The day was clear and beautiful, there was a light wind from the northeast, and in some quarters of the horizon it was misty and very much as in the trade-wind regions of the Pacific. A large party was sent out to get seals and guillemots, if possible. My hour was up, but I still lingered on the quarter-deck, for the ice on the port side, some twenty-five yards distant, had commenced to move toward us, and I was fascinated by the dangers of the situation. The captain was on deck, and immediately hoisted the hunters' recall, which was a big, black cylinder, at the main truck. They began to come in, one by one, and the last ones were Bartlett and Anequin, who were dragging a seal with them. At the time of their arrival the ice was in con- tact with the port side of the ship, and she was heeled about twelve degrees to starboard, with port bilges heavily pressed. The two hunters approached on the port side, passed their guns to me, and came up by a rope's end that I had thrown to them. The pressure on the ship was terri- ble, and we knew that she must either lift and be thrown up bodily upon the ice, or be crushed. During the whole cruise, provisions, tents, and boats with sleds, were kept THE FATAL NIP. 201 ready for immediate use, and at this time every step was taken for the impending catastrophe. About three P. M., Machinist Lee reported the ice coming through the bunkers, and the captain immediately ordered, ' Lower away ! ' men having been previously stationed at the boats' falls and some provisions put on the ice. Melville immediately contradicted the report, and the captain delayed the order. Thus the ship lay for two hours and a half, the pressure of the ice relaxing at times and the ship almost righting. Then again she would be hove over to twenty- three degrees, and we felt sure there was no longer any hope for her, for she would not lift. There was nothing in the world to be done to assist her at that time. We had to depend upon her shape. She floated much higher than when we entered the pack, and that led us to hope that she would lift easier in the nip ; for the pressure of the ice would be below the point where her sides commenced to tumble home. On the starboard side, while she was heeling, the nip was felt on her timber heads, which were the weakest parts of the frame ; but on the port side she was pressed below the turn of the bilge. Her fate was practically decided the moment we found she would not lift, and a large amount of provisions and clothing was then placed on the ice in readi- ness for the catastrophe. One watch went to supper at half-past five, and the officers had bread and tea in the cabin at six. I was on the sick list, with eyes bandaged, but told the doctor that I could get the charts and instruments together and be of assistance. He said he would ask the captain. Each officer kept his knapsack in his room, and most of us thought it wns time to have them on deck ; but we would not make the move until ordered for fear of attracting the attention of the crew, who were at work on provisions and boats. While I was taking tea, I saw Dunbar bring his knapsack up and put it in the cabin. Feeling that the moment had arrived, I went for mine, and at the head of the ladder on my return the doctor said to me : 202 THK JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. * Dan, the order is to get knapsacks.' It seems that he had stepped below and found water in the wardroom, which he reported to the captain, and the or- der was then given to abandon the ship. The national ensign was hoisted at the mizzen, and Captain DeLong was on the bridge directing the work. Lieutenant Cbipp was confined to his bed. I threw my knapsack over the starboard rail and returned for clothes, but on stepping into water, when half way down the ward- room ladder, I realized that the ship was filling rapidly. The doctor and I then carried Chipp's belongings out, and I was told to take charge of the medical stores, especially the liquor. The ship in this condition was like a broken basket, and only kept from sinking by the pressure of the ice, which at any moment might relax and let her go to the bottom. The crew worked well, and Edward Star, seaman, espe- cially distinguished himself. He was doing duty at the time as paymaster's yeoman, or ' Jack o' the Dust.' The order was given to get up more Remington ammunition, and he went into the magazine when the ship was filling rapidly and suc- ceeded in getting two cases out. This man was in Lieuten- ant Chipp's boat afterward. We always thought him a Russian, but he spoke English very well and never would speak of his nationality ; but during his dreams he talked in a language that was neither English, French, German, Swed- ish, Spanish nor Italian, and most of the men thought it was Russian. He was an excellent man and a giant in strength. The captain thought a great deal of him, for he served him faithfully in every responsible position. When the order was given to abandon the ship her hold was full of water, and as she was heeling twenty-three de- grees to starboard, at the time the water was on the lower side of the spar deck. We had a large quantity of provis- ions on the ice about a hundred yards from the ship, but Mr. Dunbar, who was alive to the occasion, advised the shift- ing of these to an adjacent and more favorable floe-piece. It b o o ENCAMPED ON THE FLOE. 205 took us till eleven P. M. to effect the removal. We also had three boats, namely, the first cutter, second cutter and the whale-boat. As soon as Dr. Ambler had looked out for Chipp, he relieved me at my post, and I went to work with No. 3 sled party, which I had been detailed previously to command. The order was given to camp and get coffee ; so we pitched our tent abreast of the whale-boat, and I set about fitting out for the retreat. While waiting for coffee I walked over to the ship to take a final look at her, and found the captain, Boatswain Coles, and Carpenter Sweetman on the port side looking at her under-water body, which was hove well out of water. I observed that the ship's side between the foremast and smokestack had been buckled in by the pressure, and that the second whale-boat was hanging at the davits, and also that the steam-cutter was lying on the ice near by. Coles and Sweetman asked the captain if we could lower the second whale-boat, and the captain said ' No.' The three boats, however, were considered enough ; and while journeying on the ice we afterward found Chipp's boat to be the favorite with all hands, because she was considered short and handy, with sufficient carrying capacity for eight men. I then sug- gested to the men to return to camp, for the captain doubtless wished to be left alone with the Jeannette in her last mo- ments. We three returned to the camp together, having to jump across numerous wide cracks and from piece to piece, and soon after the watch was set and the order given to turn in. Most of us obeyed the order promptly, and were just getting into our bags when we heard a crack, and a cry from some one in the captain's tent. The ice had cracked immediately under the captain's tent, and Erickson would have gone into the water but for the mackintosh blanket in which he and the others were lying the weight of the others at the ends keeping the middle of it from falling through. The order was immediately given to shift to another floe-piece which Mr. Dunbar selected for us. This was about three hundred 206 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. yards from the untenable ship. After about two hours' work we succeeded in shifting; all our goods and our three boats to it. We then turned in. About four o'clock I was awakened by Seaman Kuehne calling his relief, Fireman Bartlett, who was in our tent. Kuehne called to Bartlett that the ship was sinking, and the latter jumped to the tent door and saw the spars of the Jeannette after the hull was below the surface. We heard the crash, but those were the only two men who saw the ves- sel disappear. It was said that the ice first closed upon her, then relaxing allowing the wreck to sink ; the yards caught across the ice and broke off, but being held by the lifts and braces were carried down ; depth, thirty-eight fathoms, as I remember. The next morning the captain and others visited the spot, and found only one cabin chair and a few pieces of wood, all that remained of our old and good friend, the Jeannette, which for many months had endured the embrace of the Arctic monster. CHAPTER XVII. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE, (CONTINUED.) Jeannette sank about four o'clock on the morning of - Monday, June 13th, 1881. Daylight found us encamped on the ice about four hundred yards from where the ship went down. We had slept late after the exhausting work of the previous night. The day was spent by us in arrang- ing our effects, and in gaining rest, which was much needed. Many of us, indeed quite a quarter of the number, were incapacitated for active work by reason of severe cramps caused by tin-poisoning from tomato cans. Among the sick were Chipp, Kuehne, the Indian Alexai, Lauderback, and the cabin steward. The doctor recommended delay until the sick party should have recovered ; but the time was not wasted, and the rest of the crew began the work of dividing the clothing and stowing the sleds and boats. We had as provisions about 3,500 pounds of pemmicnn in tinned canisters of 45 pounds weight each, about 1,500 pounds of hard bread, and more tea than we needed. We had also some canned turkey and canned chicken, but these we disposed of in the first camp. We had a large quantity of Liebig's extract, a most, important element in our diet. We had a large quantity of alcohol, which was intended to serve as fuel for cooking during our retreat. We had plenty of ammunition, and a good equipment of rifles. The provisions were stowed on five sleds, each having a tier of alcohol cans in the middle, and on either side a tier of pemmican canisters. Another sled was loaded with bread and a limited quantity of sugar 13 (207) 208 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. and coffee. The weights of the sleds, when loaded, were a* follows : No. 1. Ship-made sled, 1,500 pounds. No. 2. McClintock sled, 1,300 pounds. No. 3. McClintock sled, 1,200 pounds. No. 4. McClintock sled, 1,300 pounds. No. 5. McClintock sled, 1,300 pounds. Total, 6,600 pounds. We had three boats, mounted upon ship-made sleds, each of which consisted of two heavy oak runners, about twelve inches high and shod with whalebone, of about twelve feet in length, and having eight to ten cross-pieces made from whiskey-barrel staves. The weight of the first cutter, with sled and outfit, was 3,000 pounds ; weight of second cutter, with sled and outfit, 2,300 pounds ; weight of whale-boat, with sled, 2,500 pounds. Making a total of 7,800 pounds ; or a grand total of sleds and boats of 15,400 pounds. To draw these we had a working force, when the retreat commenced, of twenty-two men ; and the dogs were employed, with two light St. Michael's sleds, to drag a large amount of stores that we had in excess of those permanently stowed upon the larger sleds. Each man had a knapsack stowed away in the boats ; each knapsack contained one change of underclothing, one package of matches, one plug of tobacco, one spare pair of snow-goggles, and one spare pair of moc- casins. On the 16th of June, three days after the Jeannette had sunk, the captain called all hands and read an order to the effect that we would start at six P. M. on the following day, on our march south ; that we would work during the night and sleep during the day, to avoid the intense light, which might cause snow blindness, the routine to be as follows : At half past five P. M., call all hands, have breakfast, and break camp at half past six ; at twelve, midnight, stop one- half hour for dinner ; at six A. M., stop for supper and sleep- Ration table during the march to be as follows : TRAVELING OUTFIT. 209 Breakfast (per man) Four ounces pemmican, two bis- euits, two ounces coffee, two-thirds ounce sugar. Dinner Eight ounces pernuiican, one ounce Liebig, one- half ounce tea, two-thirds ounce sugar. Supper Four ounces pemmican, one-half ounce tea, two- thirds ounce sugar, two biscuits, one ounce of lime-juice. This amounted to less than two pounds per man per diem. The party was divided into five tents. No. 1 Captain DeLong, Mi-. Collins, and five others. No. 2 Lieutenant Chipp, D unbar, and five others. No. 3 Lieutenant Danenhower, Newcomb, and five others. No. 4 Engineer Melville and five others. No. 5 Dr. Ambler, Boatswain Cole, and five others. The captain had also an office-tent, in which half of his men were berthed. The tents were nine feet long by six in width, and required very close stowage for seven men. Each tent had a fire-pot, a heavy galvanized-inm kettle, in which a copper kettle was arranged, having an alcohol-lamp beneath it with a circular asbestos wick ten inches in diame- ter. It also had a stewpan on top. A cook was derailed to each tent, with an assistant to provide snow and to draw provi- sions. Each tent had a Mackintosh blanket nine by six, upon which the men could lie at night. The sleeping-bags were made of deer-skin, covered with hairless seal-skin or cotton drilling. In our tent there were three such single bags and two double ones ; but generally single bags were in the other tents. Ours had been designed by Mr. Dunbar in November, 1879, and were the only ones that did not require alteration after we got on the ice. Each boat was provided with an outfit of oars, a boat-box with suitable articles for repairing damages, and ammunition for the arms that had been detailed to each boat. The order said that the course would be south 17 degrees east (magnetic), which was south (true). I may here state that the boat compasses were intentionally left behind, because the captain said he preferred the pocket prismatic compasses. We had six splendid Richie boat compasses, always kept in 210 THE JEANNETTH ARCTIC EXPEDITION. the Jeannette ready for instant use, but they were, as I said, left behind, much to our detriment at a later period. Each boat had been provided with a luff tackle, anchor, and grapnel. Of course the anchor and grapnel had to be left behind ; but the whale-boat retained the luff tackle, which proved extremely useful at a later date. The order of march was as follows : All hands, except a special detail of four men, were to advance the first cutter to the first black flag established by Ice-pilot Dunbar, who was to go ahead to select the best road ; then the second cutter and the whale-boat and provi- sion-sleds were to be brought up to the first station as rapidly as possible. While this was going on the special detail of four men, with St. Michael sleds, were to advance the extra provisions ; and the sick, with the hospital sled, were also to move to the front. We were ordered to sleep during the afternoon of June 17th, and on the anniversary of the battle of Bunker Hill we commenced our long retreat. Chipp was on the sick-list, and I, with my eyes constantly bandaged and covered, could only do light duty, so the task of leading the working party fell to Melville, the captain directing. Each officer and man was provided with a harness, which consisted of a broad canvas strap, fashioned to go across the chest and over one shoulder, and which had to be attached to the sled by a lanyard. At last the order was given to break camp. The order was obeyed with enthusiasm, and the drag rope of the first cutter was immediately manned, Melville, Dr. Ambler, my- self and two other men stationing ourselves on either side of the boat with harness fast to the thwarts, and then our work commenced in terrible earnest. The snow was knee deep, the road very rough, and the ice full of fissures. Through the former our feet sank easily, soon wearying the best of us ; over the fissures, if not too wide, we had to jump the boats, and we had to drag the sled over lumps of ice that would have taken a whole corps of engineers to level. But we advanced steadily, -if slowly. We reached THE START SOUTHWARD. 211 ene of the black flags that had been planted by Ice-pilot Dunbar, but seeing that he had planted another one ahead of us we pushed on with the first cutter to reach that too. This goal reached, we found that we were a mile and a half from the starting place, and that it had taken us three hours to make the distance. But we, in our enthusiasm, had gone too far. It appears that the captain had only intended that we should make a single short station on the first day, but the order had pro- bably been misunderstood by Mr. Dunbar, whose only wish was that we should make as good progress as possible. So we had to return ; but on our way back we found that the ice had shifted and that our original road had been entirely broken up, and so we had to leave our sled midway between the two flags and then go to the assistance of the rest. We soon found that we had been fortunate with the first cutter. During our absence the captain, with a special detail and dogs, had attempted to advance the second cutter and whale- boat. He had launched the whale-boat across a fissure, and had broken the sled in hauling her out. No. 1 sled, named the ' Sylvie,' had also been broken, as well as two others. The ice was all in motion, and we had a very bad outlook, with our boats and sleds at various points on the road. Chipp had been ordered to advance with the hospital sled, with Kuehne and Alexai and three men to assist him. The sled was heavily laden, and the work was too severe for the first lieutenant in his weak state, and the result was that he fainted from sheer exhaustion, requiring the services of the doctor to restore him. On our first outward march, Machinist Walter Lee had fallen out of the ranks and rolled upon the ice in agony with cramps in the calves of his legs a result, doubtless of his having worked for so many months on the iron plates of the fire room, oftentimes with wet feet. He was a large, heavy- bodied man, and the unusual task fell heavily upon him at first. At six o'clock in the morning (we had been in the region 212 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. of the midnight sun since the early part of May) we had advanced the second cutter about three-quarters of a mile from the old camp; the whale-boat was about a hundred yards back of her. Several disabled sleds stood at intervals along the road, while the balance of our stock still remained in the spot where they had been placed before the Jeannette went down. It was a cold, foggy morning, and we were very much chagrined at our ineffective efforts. We had a cup of tea, then brought up everything in the rear of the position of the second cutter, and then camped down, leav- ing the first cutter about three-quarters of a mile in advance. Everybody voted this the hardest day's work he had ever done in his life. For two days we stayed to repair damages, and we all concluded that the 'now or never' policy of progress was a very ineffectual one. It would have been better for us to have spent a few minutes in removing the ice obstacles out of our way, rather than to attempt to drag the sleds over them by brute force. I did not know much about sleds and just how much spread to give the runners, but fortunately Sea- man Leach was from the State of Maine, and I depended on his judgment ; and I may add that our boat sled never broke down once after he and Bartlett an old mountaineer and California!! traveler had secured it. After two days we again made a start for the south. We made slow progress, about a mile or a mile and a half a day, over the rough and moving floe. It was terrible work for the men. They had to go over the road no less than thirteen times seven times with loads and six times empty handed thus walking twenty-six miles in making an advance of only two ! The empty handed business was the worst. On the 19th of June the captain called me into his tent and told me to go with the hospital sled because, he alleged, I could not see. I remonstrated, but without avail. I went back to my tent, naturally deeply mortified to know that thirty-three men were working for their lives and I was not allowed to help even at the cooking, although physically I "3 HH 1/1 O C/l tc O STARTLING DISCOVERY. 215 was one of the strongest men of the party. That morning I started with the hospital sled, which was dragged by seven dogs, driven by Erickson, the doctor and I assisting over the hummocks. We advanced over rough moving ice with great difficulty about half a mile, and then set up the tent for the three invalids Chipp, Lauderback, and Alexai to await the coming up of the rest of the party. I myself would never go inside the hospital tent. Thus the survivors trudged along, the well heavily handicapped by the six or seven who furnished no motive power at all. Twenty-one men did all the work for the thirty-three. At the end of the first week the captain found by observa- tion that the drift had more than neutralized the way cover- ed by our advance ; that, in fact, we had lost twenty-seven miles by the drift to the northwest in excess of our march to the south. This, of course, was kept a profound secret. By and by Lauderback and Alexai got well enough to work; and finally Mr. Chipp, after several ineffectual requests to be put on duty, was allowed to relieve Melville and tako charge of the working party. Melville was put in charge of the road gang, which consisted of Lee and Seaman Johnson, with the dingy and the team of clogs. Their principal duty was to keep in position the blocks of ice that were used as temporary bridges to enable the sleds to pass safely over the fissures. We often came to wide water holes, which caused us much delay in ferrying over. The method cf doing this was as follows : First, a large ice piece was found ; on this the boats and sleds were placed, and then all the floating mass was drawn over by the men on the other side, who had transported themselves across by the little dingy or even on smaller ice floes. Some of these water spaces were as much as a hun- dred yards wide. These openings were not connected, and of course could not be used in the direction we wished to go. On many occasions the boats had to be launched and paddled across, and then hauled up again on the opposite side. Chipp took charge of this part of the work admirably, and the men 216 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. were always glad to have him at their head. It was wonder- ful how he kept up. As soon as the list was clear of sick the hospital tent was dispensed with, and I for many days walked after the whale- boat, but with Melville always watching me in jumping cracks and pulling me out when I fell in. I found it very difficult to judge of distances with one eye bandaged and the other covered with a dark goggle. Collins generally walked with me ; Newcomb and Seaman Star followed other sledges, all of us suspended from work. Besides these the captain, Chipp, Melville, and the doctor added little or nothing to the motive power. Eight persons out of thirty-three, or twenty- five per cent, of the whole were thus, so to speak, not work- ing their passage across the ice. In the latter part of June the snow all melted and travel- ing was better, but the men had to wade through pools of thaw-water and their feet were constantly wet. Seaman Kaack's feet were covered with blood-blisters, but he never gave in. Nindermann and Bartlett were always the leading men in dragging the boats, each being stationed at the bow to slew them and to lift them over heavy obstructions. As the roads became better we were able to advance two sleds at a time, but we would often have to jump them from piece to piece in crossing leads. Jack Cole and Harry Warren were the leading men of one party, and Bartlett and Ninder- mann of the other. The number of times passed over the ground was now reduced to seven, and the advance was thus very much facilitated. Mr. Dunbar used to start out, with two or three flags on his shoulder, and pick out the best road, planting his flags here and there in prominent places. The old gentleman was very careful and efficient, though the captain would often take an entirely different road, on several occasions insisting on ferrying the goods across after the ice had come together within fifty yards of us. About the 12th of July we saw a 'whale back' that looked very much like a snow-covered island. There had been some slight changes in the course previous to this. I think A DASH FOR THE SHORE. 217 it was changed to south (magnetic), which would be about south 17 (true), for there was about 17 degrees of easterly variation. The captain then shaped the course toward the point where land was thought to have been seen. At this time we began to see a heavy water sky to the south and southeast, and the ice to the southwest was more broken and in greater motion, making traveling very difficult. About July 20th we worked nearly twelve hours in advancing 1,000 yards over small pieces of ice constantly shifting. We could not float the boats. The land already mentioned appeared greatly distorted by atmospheric effects, and indeed, until within a few days of reaching it, a great many would not believe that it existed at all. Our progress toward the land was very slow, but finally we could see the glaciers and water-courses upon it quite distinctly. We were shaping a course toward the northeast end of the island, the drift of the ice being along the east face. At times we were forced to remain idle in our camp- ing-place, it being quite impossible either to move over the rough, broken ice, always in rapid motion, or to launch the boats. On the 24th of July we reached a point not more than two miles distant from the land, but the men were so exhausted that we had to camp. Next morning we found that we had drifted at least three miles to the southward and along the east side of the island. July 27th was very foggy, and we were working our way through living masses of ice, when the mist lifted a little and an immense sugar-loaf towered above us. We had been swept in by the current, and now seemed to be our chance of reaching the ice-foot of the island, which was very narrow, rugged, and broken, being aground in nineteen fathoms of water. We finally got everything on one big floe-piece, and as we caromed on the ice-foot we made a rally and jumped everything upon the ice-clad beach. But before the last boats and sleds were hauled up the floe-piece drifted away, leaving them perched on the edge of the ice in a very dangerous position, and they had to be left there for some 218 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. hours. Then came the difficult work of getting the boats and sleds through the very rough and broken ice-fringe along shore. About six P. M. we had succeeded in reaching some smooth pieces near the south cape, and there we camped down, each tent being on a separate piece of floe. There was a solid breakwater outside of us, consequently we were not in any great danger, though the blocks we were on were sometimes in motion as the tide rose and fell. At this point the sides of A LAND-SLIDE. the island were very bold and steep, composed of trap-rock and a lava-like soil, very dry, so much so that frequent land-slides were occurring all the time we were there. Mr. Collins and I took a walk over the rough ice and along the BENNETT ISLAND. 219 south point of the island in order to get a view of the south side. It appeared very rugged and trended off to the west- northwest. From a high hummock we saw land to the west-northwest. About seven P. M. the captain mustered everybody on the island. It was so steep that we could hardly get a footing. He then unfurled the beautiful silk flag that had been made for him by Mrs. DeLong, and took possession of the island in the name of the President of the United States, and called it 'Bennett Island.' This was succeeded by hearty cheers, three times three, with a good American 'tiger.' There were millions of birds nesting in the cliffs, and tlieir noise was almost deafening. I think one seal was seen, but no walrus, during our stay of nearly a week on the island. The south cape was called Cape Emma, after the captain's wife, and was in latitude 70 deg. 38 min. north, longitude 148 deg. 20 min. east. The whaleboat was so long that in crossing hummocks the stern-post used often to receive heavy knocks and her gar- boards had been stove ; indeed, she had been shaken up so badly that she was as limber as a basket and required repairs, as did the other boats. The captain and doctor thought, too, that the party needed rest and change of diet, so the men were sent out to get birds and driftwood, so that \ve could economize on our alcohol. In a few hours they knocked down several hundred birds with sticks and stones. These were brought into camp and divided out. Their effect after being eaten was like that of young veal, and pretty nearly every one of the party was made sick, the doctor included. 1 used to eat half a peck of scurvy grass every day, and that kept me well. But we had finally to return to pemmican, and were very glad to do so after such a surfeit of birds. Mr. D unbar and the two Indians were sent up the east ide of the island to explore. They were gone two days and reached the northeast point. They found the land on the east side was more promising than on the south. They found several grassy valleys, some old deer horns, some 220 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. driftwood, and saw large numbers of birds. Lieut- enant Chipp, with Mr. Collins and a boat's crew, explored the south and west sides, and promising reports came from them. A fair quality of lignite was found in several places. Mr. Melville experi- mented with it, and deter- mined that it would be ser- viceable fuel for steaming purposes. The tidal action at the island was very great, and quite remarkable for this part of the world. The ice outside of us was in constant motion, and seemed to be lifted regularly with the rise of the water. We had a tide- gauge set up, and it was ob- served every hour by Bartlett, Ninclermann, and Lee. As I remember, the greatest rise and fall w r as about three feet; they were regular six hour tides. We were there near the time of full moon, and the 'vulgar establishment' was properly established. At Cape Emma the captain got a set of equal altitudes of the sun for chronometer error, but the weather was gener- ally misty and unfavorable SCIENTIFIC RECREATIONS. 221 for such work. A box of geological specimens was obtained, and is now in my charge, it having been recovered from the captain's cache, near the mouth of the Lena. The doctor was very enthusiastic about certain amethysts, opals, and petrifactions that he had obtained ; these are probably lost. EXPLORING BENNETT ISLAND. While on the island I observed that the sea to the south and west was freer from ice than that to the eastward, and that water-clouds to the northwest were very common ; and it occurred to me that in good seasons a vessel could reach the island, which might form a good base for explora- tions further to the north. CHAPTER XVIII. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE. (CONTINUED.) WE left Bennett Island about August 4th. We were then fifty-three days out from the place where the Jeannette had sunk. We were fortunate enough in being able to launch our boats and to make better progress in the cracks between the floes. But we still had to keep our sleds for a short time longer. Some of the dogs rendered us very important services; but about half the number were now disabled by famine and weakness. We had forty originally, but about sixteen had died, or had been killed by the others during the two winters in the ice. After the stock of dog- food gave out, and owing to the scarcity of game, there were long periods of starvation for the poor brutes. Each man had a favorite animal, and would share his own rations with him; but this was not sufficient. At Bennett Island we still had, I think, twenty-three left, and the day before leav- ing eleven of the poorest of these were shot. We took the remaining twelve in the boats, but in passing close to big floe-pieces these gave us a great deal of trouble by jumping out and running away. Finally, Prince and Snoozer were the only two that had sense enough to remain by us. For the next eighteen days we were working between floe-pieces, and sometimes making as much as ten miles a day on our course to the southwest. Several times a day we would have to haul the boats out, and make portages across the large floe-pieces that barred our progress. This was very severe work. We had at this time retained only the boat sleds, having left the provision sleds and all superfluous (222) 00 O a H w A FATAL DELAY. 22,5 X articles on a floe-piece about August 6th. We now worked during' the day and slept during the night. At Bennett Island the doctor, who belonged to my boat, had been transferred to the captain's, and Mr. Melville was placed in charge of mine that is, the whale-boat. I was ordered to remain in the boat as a passenger, and to assist in emergencies. I always carried my own baggage, and assisted whenever possible. Dunbar was detailed with Chipp. We made very good progress until about August 20th. On that day the leads were very open, and we thought we were all right. The wiisd was fresh and favorable; -the first cutter and whale-boat, which followed closely, passed safely th rough great quantities of ice, but the second cutter was in the rear, and became jammed by the floe-pieces coming together very suddenly, and Chipp had to haul out and transport his boat about a mile in order to get her afloat again. In many cases a passage was obtained by prying the floe-pieces apart ; but several times these sprang back, thus cutting off the advance of the second cutter. It was very hard and slow work, but much better than dragging the sleds over the ice. The delay caused by getting Chipp's boat afloat was very fatal to us, for the wind shifted suddenly and we were forced to camp after waiting for him several hours. The ice jammed up during the night so that we had to remain there ten days without being able to move. Then land came in sight, and we seemed to be drifting along the north face of an island which the captain at first thought was New Siberia, but it was afterward found that we were drifting along the north coast of Thaddeoffsky. We drifted along this coast until August 28th, when, at last, we were again able to make a move. We trailed the place the Ten Day Camp. But we had used the delay in making repairs, and the food had been distributed per capita among the boats. On the afternoon of the 29th we launched the boats again and worked in the pack for about two hours, when further J26 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. progress was again barred by the ice. Finally, new con- necting leads were found, and we proceeded to the south- ward and eastward for about five hours. Then we hauled up for the night on a small piece of floe-ice, which was drifting very rapidly to the southward and down the passage between New Siberia and Thaddeoffsky. The next morning found us in navigable water, and with land about seven miles distant to the westward. Then we rounded the south point of Thaddeoffsky. "We found the THADDEOFFSKY ISLAND. island to be composed of mud hills that were wearing away rapidly and forming shoals off the land. Beyond the low hills there was a wet, mossy tundra, upon which we camped for the night. All hands were then sent out hunting. Rein- deer tracks and traces were numerous, but none were seen. Bartlett reported that he found footprints in the sand made by a civilized boot. The steward found a hut about two THE CAPTAIN'S BOAT. 227 miles west of the camp, and a small piece of black bread, as well as a small tusk and a knee piece for a boat, fashioned from a deer horn. The next morning we proceeded west along the shore, the water being very shoal. We saw- remains of several huts and quantities of driftwood. We also saw lots of ducks and wild fowl, and Newcomb succeeded in getting about six brace of ducks, which were very welcome. That night we tried to land, but after several ineffectual efforts gave up the attempt, as the water was too shoal for our boats. The following is a detailed description of the boats, with lists of persons attached to each : - FIRST CUTTER. THE CAPTAIN'S BOAT. Captain DeLong, Dr. Ambler, Mr. Collins, Nindermann, Erickson, Gortz, Noros, Dressier, Iverson, Ivaack, Boyd, Lee, Ah Sam, Alexai. Extreme length, 20 ft. 4 in,; breadth, 6 ft.; depth, 2 ft. 2 in., from top of gunwale to the top of keel ; clinker built, copper fastened, inside lining; drew 28 inches loaded, and had the greatest carrying capacity of the three ; fitted with mast and one shifting lug sail ; pulls six oars, and was an excellent sea boat. She had a heavy oak keel piece to strengthen her in hauling over the ice, and it was retained after reaching the water. She was fitted with weather claws at Semenoffski Island, September llth, by Nindermann. SECOND CUTTER. Lieutenant Chipp, Dunbar, Sweetman, Star, Warren, Kuehne, Johnson, Sharvell. Extreme length, 16 ft. 3 in.; breadth, 5 ft. 1 in.; depth, 2 ft. 6 in., from top of gunwale to top of keel ; clinker built, copper fastened, a very bad sea boat; she was carefully fitted with weather claws; had one dipping log sail and four oars. She had not sufficient carrying capacity for Chipp's allow- ance of provisions, so the captain had two extra tins of pemmican in his boat when we separated. This is an important fact, for Lieutenant Chipp must have run out of food very quickly. 14 228 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. WHALE-BOAT. Engineer Melville, Lieutenant Danenhower, Newcomb, Cole, Leach, Mansen, Wilson, Bartlett, Lauder- back, Charles Tong Sing, Anequin. Extreme length, 25 ft. 4 in. ; breadth, 5 ft. 6 in. ; depth, 2 ft. 2 in. from top of gunwale to top of keel ; clinker built, copper fastened, drawing about twenty-four inches when loaded, this being caused by the heavy oak keel piece, sim- ilar to those of the first and second cutters. She had one mast and one dipping log sail, and was fitted with weather claws about September llth. The master boat-builder at B ri a f ~ 2 ft. 10 j 10 iO A First Cutter. D Second Cutter. C Whale-Boat, Mare Island told mo that she was one of the best fastened boats that he had ever seen, and our experience proved it ; for the racket she stood on the journey over the ice was al- most incredible. The plans of the boats I got from Carpenter Sweetman at Kotelnoi Island, September 4th, 1881. The captain decided to work along the shoal that lies be- tween Tliaddeoffsky and Kotolnoi Islands. There was a moderate wind from the eastward, and the captain tried to keep close in, in about four feet of water. The result was ' that the first cutter was constantly grounding, and then la- boriously getting off again. We continued on our course to the southward, the captain's boat getting in breakers at one time and calling for our boat to pull him out. There was A TKHUIBLE SHTAT1ON. 229 not much ice at the time, and it was decreasing. One day, about noon, we ran through a line of drift ice, and the whale- boat struck on a tongue that was under water. She began to fill rapidly, and we had to haul her out, but not before she was two-thirds full could we reach a suitable ice piece. The plug had been knocked out, but she had sustained no other damage. That afternoon we passed through a large water space several square miles in area, with a heavy sea running. We were steering dead before the wind, having to follow in 11 ic wake of the captain, and it was very difficult to keep from jibing. About three P. M. the coxswain let her jibe, and she was brought by the lee by a heavy sea on the starboard quarter. The sheet was not slacked in time, and the boat was hove almost on her port beam ends. A heavy green sea s\vepi over the whole port side and filled her to the thwarts; she staggered and commenced to settle, but every man with a baler in hand quickly relieved her, and she floated again. I was never frightened before in a boat, but it was a most dangerous and terrible situation. There was no chance for the captain or Chipp to have assisted us, and had another sea boarded us not a man of our party would have been saved. The weather was very cold. Two hours afterward we met the ice, among which we made our way. Chipp' s boat was still astern and in the water hole, and we were very anxious about his safety. The captain hauled up about seven P. M., and camped with us. The next day the gale was still blow- ing, and Chipp's boat still missing, so about six P. M. the captain hoisted a black flag. On the following day Bartlett reported that the ice was closing around us, and that if we did not move we would be shut in. Two hours afterward all outlets were closed. Land was also in sight at this time, being Kotelnoi Island. Erickson was the first to see Chipp's boat, and presently we saw two men making their way over the floe and jumping across the obstructions. It was Chipp, with Kuehne. His 230 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. boat had been nearly swamped, and in a sinking condition he had reached a piece of ice and managed to haul up. Star was the only man with his boat at that time who could walk, the others requiring ten or fifteen minutes to get up circula- tion in their benumbed limbs. The captain had previously given written orders that in case of separation each boat should make the best of its way to Lena River, but he had recommended touching at Kotelnoi Island. Chipp had for- tunately decided to follow these instructions, because he had not his allowance of food. We ourselves had been on half rations for some time. He had remained on the ice about STOLBOVOI ISLAND. twenty-four hours, and then got a chance to get under way. He told us that by making a portage of about two miles wo could launch our boats and fetch the land. He sent his men to assist us, and after six or eight hours of terrible work we succeeded in getting our boat to the second cutter. That night we reached the southeast corner of Kotelnoi Island and camped on a low cape extending well out from the mountain and forming a beautiful bay. HUNTING ON SEMENOFFSKI ISLAND. 231 This was September 6th, I think. We stayed there about thirty-six hours. Large parties were sent out hunting, as numerous deer tracks had been seen. Next morning we got under way again and worked along shore until about noon, when we had to make a long and laborious portage, during which Mr. Dunbar fell down exhausted and with palpitation of the heart. We continued until midnight, and then camp- ed on a bleak, desolate spot. Next morning, September 7th, we shaped a course for the island of Stolbovoi from the south point of Kotelnoi, fifty-one miles distant to the southwest. We had fresh breezes the first day, and during the night got into a very bad place and came very near being smashed up by drift ice. We passed in sight of Stolbovoi ; but it was not considered worth while to land on the barren island, which was, besides, too distant. On the night of September 9th, we hauled up on a piece of ice off the north end of Semenoffski Island, and there slept. On September 10th, we rounded the north end of this island and came down the west shore, stopping to cook dinner and to examine the island. Having seen the tracks of deer going toward the south end of the island, the captain suggested that a party of hunters deploy across it and ad- vance to the south in hopes of getting a deer. About ten of us went. I went along the beach with Kuehne and Johnson, Bartlett, Noros, Collins, and the Indians skirting the hills. We raised a doe and fawn running to the northward as fast as possible, they having previously seen the boats. Several shots were fired, and the doe fell under Noros' last shot. We hurled the body down a steep bluff to Chipp, who had it butchered, and the captain ordered all served out, having previously given orders for all hands to camp. That evening the captain told Melville that he and many of his party were badly used up and must have rest and a full meal before proceeding. All these days for the past twenty we had been on very short allowance and had never had a full meal. Melville said that he and his party were in excellent condition and wanted to move on, and did not 232 THE .IE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. like losing time. The entire deer was served out and we had orders to remain till Monday morning, or about thirty- six hours. We had noticed that after two or three days of northeast winds it generally finished up with a heavy gale from that quarter, and it was thought we would be likely to get it on Monday or Tuesday. That evening Chipp came over and asked me to go out with him to get some ptarmigan if possible. We came upon a large covey, but could not get a shot. This was my last talk with Chipp. He was in bet- ter health than usual and was cheerful, but not altogether satisfied with the outlook. On Monday morning, September 12th, we left Semcnoffski Island, and stood to the southward along the west side of the island, lying to the south. About half-past eleven A. M. we ran through a lot of drift ice, following the first cutter. It was pretty close work, and our boat had to luff through between two big cakes of ice. The sheet was hauled aft in luffing, and the boat sided over against the lee piece, thereby knocking a hole in the starboard side. She filled rapidly, and we barely succeeded in making fast her bow to an ad- jacent cake of ice ; there we put on a lead patch and remedied the damage. This was the last piece of ice that we saw. While repairs were going on I had a chat with Collins, who was as amiable as usual, and had some pleasant story to tell me. The doctor was also very affable, and asked particularly after my health and comfort. We then started on a southwest course. The captain kept his boat almost right before the wind ; it was very difficult to keep from jibing, and as the whale-boat was the faster sailer it was hard to keep in position. Our orders were to keep astern of the captain, within easy hail, and for Chipp to bring up the rear, he being second in command. The wind and sea increased very rapidly, and about five P. M. we were out of position about nine hundred yards off the weather quarter of the first cutter. Melville asked me if we could get in position safely, and 1 told him that by jibing twice and lowering the sail we could do so. He then told me to I o H A FEARFUL NIGHT. 235 take charge ; so I jibed very carefully, ran down to the captain's wake and then jibed her again, each time having lowered the sail, and having gotten out two oars to keep up the headway before the sea while shifting the sail. 1 then had seaman Leach put at the helm, as he was the best helms- man in the boat. My eyes would not permit my taking the helm or 1 would have done so. We then ranged along the weather side of the first cutter, had our sail close reefed, and to keep from running away from her had to take it in, there- by allowing the seas to board us. About dusk the captain stood up in his boat and waved his hands as if to separate. This is what the men say ; I did not see it. At the same time Chipp was said to be lower- ing his sail. Melville asked my advice, and I said we should steer with the wind and sea four points to the north quarter ; that we could make good weather of it until dark, when wo .should heave to on account of the liability to meet young ice in the darkness. In the meantime I advised that we should prepare a good drag. He told me to go ahead and do it. So I ordered Cole and Manson to take three hiekorv tent- at poles, each about eight feet in length, lash them in a triangle, and lace a strong piece of cotton canvas across it, then take the boat's painter, And make a span similar to the bellyband of a kite, and to the middle of this span make fast the lull' tackle fall. On the lower end of each tent-pole there was a brass nib which, with the weight of the wet canvas and the bight of the rope, would, I said, probably make the drag heavy enough ; if not we would send down the spare fire-pot and boat bucket to help it. The gale was now at its full force, and the seas were run- ning high and spiteful. - Leach was steering admirably, but we had to keep four balers going all the time to prevent the boat from filling and sinking. The drag, having been com- pleted, was placed forward of the mast in readiness for use. I had the drag rope coiled down clear for running. The men were very weary. There were only two seamen in the boat who would pull in a seaway, the others being inexperi- 236 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. enced, except the helmsman. I had been watching the seas for a long time, and had noticed that they ran in threes, and that there was a short lull after the third and heaviest one. I had the men detailed as follows : Wilson and Mansen at the oars, keeping them peaked high above the sea, Cole at the halyards to lower sail, Anequin and the steward to gather the sail, Bartlett to launch the drag, and Leach at the helm. I gave preparatory orders very carefully at the words 4 Lower away !' to put the helm hard-a-starboard, lower sail and give way with starboard oar, holding water with the port oar, if possible in the seaway. I watched more than five minutes for my chance, for our lives depended on the success of that movement. At the proper moment I shouted ' Lower away ! ' and every man did his duty ; the boat came round, gave a tremendous dive and she was then safe, head to sea. We eased the oars and launched the drag. It watched about three points on the port bow, so I sent down the spare fire-pot and a bucket by putting loops, or what we call beckets, on the bales. Cole suggested sending down a painted bag with the mouth open. It filled with water, dragged, and was very effective. We then lay head to sea during the night. A number of the party turned in under the canvas. Melville was exhausted and had his legs badly swollen ; so he turned in abreast the foremast, leaving me in charge. Leach and Wilson steered with a paddle during the night, and I sat at their feet watching. The upper gudgeon of the rudder had been carried away, so we took the rudder on board. Our fresh water had been ruined by the seas that had boarded us, but late on the night before leaving the island Newcomb had brought in several ptarmigan, which had been dressed and put in our kettle, the other tents not caring to take their share. This proved excellent food for us the next day, as they were not too salt to be eaten. At daylight, September 13th, there were no boats in sight, and the gale was still raging. About ten A. M. I noticed that a new sea was making and the old sea was more abeam. SKILFUL SEAMANSHIP. 23T From this I judged that the wind had veered to the south- east and would grow lighter. About noon the water began to tumble in very badly on the port quarter ; and the boat was down by the stern. We were thoroughly wet, and the sleeping gear was so water-soaked and swollen that it jammed between the thwarts and could not be shifted in trimming. I rigged the mackintosh on the port quarter, the stroke oarsman holding one corner and I the other for seven hours. This kept a great deal of water out of the boat and acted like a 'tarpaulin in the rigging' to keep her head to sea. At 4.40 P. M., per log, I called Melville and told him that it was time to get under way. The sea was very heavy, but was falling, and by standing west at first we could grad- ually haul up to south-southwest as the sea went down. We got under way without getting a sea aboard and stood to the westward, and by eight p. M. were able to haul up to south-southwest, on which course we stood during the night The second night was more comfortable, but still we were all very wet ; but we were perfectly safe. I lay down for an hour abreast the foremast while Melville relieved me, bul could not sleep, and soon returned to my old place. CHAPTER XIX. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE. (CONTINUED.) A T six o'clock on the morning of the 14th, I gave orders to prepare breakfast, and a few minutes later we were surprised by the boat taking ground in two feet of water. We backed off, and I recommended standing to the eastward. J had reckoned that when we rounded to we were about fifty miles off Barkin, our destination ; that we had drifted at least fifteen miles to the southwest during the gale, and that we had run about twenty-five miles during the night, so that we were on the shoals north of Barkin. I said that if we stood to the west we would have no show; but that if we went east until dee}) water was reached, and then stood due south to the highlands of the coast, we would find plenty of water and a good landing place. Melville was of course in command, but he relied on my judgment, as he did in all emergencies. Bartlett thought he saw a IOW T beach with logs upon it. I told him to take another good look, and then he said he thought he was mistaken. It was only a smooth patch of water among the shoals. We noticed that the water was only brackish, and that there was a thin skim of young ice near us. We stood to the eastward, occasionally feeling our way south, but always touched the ground quickly when moving in that direction. I noticed there was a very strong easterly set here. The winds were light and southerly ; we stood all night about east-southeast, and early next morning U'ot nine fathoms. I then recommended steering due south, but Melville wanted to go southwest, because that was the captain's course ; so I assented and shaped a southwest course, which wo continued to steer until the morning of (238) ATTEMPTS TO REACH THE SHORE. 239 September 17th. The winds were very light, and we often had to pull the boat. I was at the coxswain's feet conning Hie boat. At daylight we got ten feet of water, and soon after saw a low beach. We made two attempts to land through the breakers, but could not get within a mile of the shore. The land trended north and south, and I said that we were evidently south of Barkin, and that if there was water enough we might fetch it that night from the southward, as we had a good breeze about east. With a view to finding the captain and Chipp we stood up the coast, hoping to reach Barkin before dark. The condition of the party on this morning was very bad. Leach and Lauderback were disabled with swollen legs, the skin having broken in many places, and most of the others were badly off. We had been in the boat ninety-six hours and wet all the time. I had taken the precaution twice during that time to pull off my moccasins, to wring out my stockings and to rub my feet, in order to restore circulation. I advised the others to do the same, but the most of them unfortunately did not take the advice. I also beat the devil's tattoo almost all the time to keep up the circulation ; so the next morning 1 was the best man in the party on my feet. After going to the northward about thirty minutes we saw two low points of swamp land, and it was evident that we were at the mouth of a swamp river. We had a talk, and I advised getting ashore as quickly as possible and drying our things out. So we entered this river with a, leading wind, the current being very strong. We got as much as five fathoms in the middle of the river, but it shoaled very rapidly on either side of mid-channel. It was four or five miles wide, but we could not get within a mile of either beach. I advised standing up the river until noon, and then to decide fully what we should do. When that time arrived I said we were probably in a swamp river, about thirty or forty miles south of Barkin ; the wind was east, and if we turned back we would have to beat out, but would have the current 240 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. in our favor ; after getting clear of the point we could run up the coast with a fair wind. ' But,' I added, * if a gale comes on we will be in the breakers.' Melville then decided to turn back and start for Barkin. At this juncture Bartlett spoke up and said that he believed we were in the east branch of the Lena. Melville referred to me, and I said that it might be so, but that we should have higher land on our port hand if that were the case. The trend of the river corresponded pretty well with the coast outlet, and if we could find an island about thirty miles up stream it would, doubtless, prove that we were in that place. Bartlett said that he believed such a vast body of water could not be a swamp river ; it was bigger than the Mississippi at its mouth. I still held to my belief that it was a swamp river, but said that it would be a good plan to try to make a landing before night. So we stood up stream and were fortunate enough to make a landing at seven p. M., in what we found afterward tho Tunguses call an orasso, or summer hunting hut. We had been 108 hours in the boat since leaving Semenoffski Island. The men immediately built a fire in the hut, and gathered round it before they had restored circulation by exercise. 1 knocked about outside and carried up my sleeping bag before supper, so my blood was in good circulation before I went near the fire. We had a cup of tea and a morsel of pemmi- can, having been on quarter rations since we separated. We went to sleep with our feet toward the fire, and several of the men passed the night in agony, as if millions of needles were piercing their limbs. Bartlett described it as the worst night he ever passed. I slept like a child and was very much refreshed next morning. We found fish bones, rein- deer horns and human footprints ; also a curiously fashioned wooden reindeer with a boy mounted on his back. We were very much delighted with our prospects of meeting natives. Next morning we got under way about seven, steered up the river about two hours, and then could proceed no further. Bartlett started out to reconnoitre, but when he was a REGONNOITERING. 241 hundred yards distant I saw that he was limping ; so I ran after him and sent him back. I went about half a mile and saw several swamp-like rivers coming from the northwest ; then went back to the boat and told Melville he had better prepare tea while Mansen and I took a more extended scout. We went further, and Mansen used his eyes for me. I could see some high land about two miles off, and I asked Mansen to look well to see if he could get over to it, for I was sure deep water lay alongside of it. He thought lie could trace a passage to it, all but in one small place ; so we returned with that information. The land was about ten feet high and covered with good deer moss. We saw many deer- tracks, especially where they had come down to water at the river ; we also saw another hut close by on a small flat. We then went back to Melville, and soon after started out with the boat. We had splendid luck ; we struck a passage and reached the deep water. We passed an island, and I began to think that Bartlett was right. We proceeded at least thirty miles that afternoon, and at dark we reached a point about sixty feet high, where we expected the river to turn due south. Here we pitched the tents and passed the night. About four o'clock next morning Bartlett and I took a scout. We saw two large rivers to the northwest, and a broad river coining from the south. We thought we were at the right turning-point, but were not sure. At six I called Melville and the others and ordered tea cooked. The wind was fresh from the west and blowing right on the beach. We had breakfast, and then I took the well men and loaded the boat. We struck the tents at the last moment and assisted Melville and Leach into the boat, close-reefed the sail, and made every preparation for getting the boat off the lee shore. After some difficulty we succeeded in doing this, and ran close hauled on the starboard tack under close- reefed sail, standing about south-southwest under the lee of a mud-flat. I was at the helm, and Bartlett on the bows with sounding-pok). We saw seven reindeer among the hills, but 242 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. did not stop to get at them. About eleven we saw two hut* on the west bank and in a good situation for landing ; so I recommended that we should get ashore and dry out every- thing. It was Sunday, September 18th, and was the first real day of rest that we had taken for a long time. We found two very nice summer hunting dwellings, built with sloping sides and shaped like the frustrum of a pyramid, the sloping sides forming the cover for the occupants and the aperture at the top being the chimney. This was what the Russians call a polotka and the Tunguses an orasso. The sun was bright and beautiful. We opened out everything to dry and passed a delightful Sunday, being sure that rescue was not far off. Newcomb made a good warm jacket out of his sleeping bag. We also wrote a notice to the effect that the whale-boat had landed at this point, and stuck up a flag to mark the place of the record. There were lots of fish bones in the hut, some refuse fish, and a piece of black bread, all of which our Indian ate with avidity. There were also frames for nets and for drying fish. At eight A. M., on Monday, September 19th, we got under way again and stood up the river. I was at the helm and Bartlett on the bows, and the crew, divided in two watches of four each, taking two-hour tricks at the oars. Melville was in the stern sheets in command of the boat. We stood south for two hours with light wind and oars. All was going well, and we were in strong hopes of reaching a settlement marked on the chart before night ; but we soon began to be headed off by mud flats and sand banks. About one A. M. we were more than a mile from the west bank, which we were following because the village was marked as on that side. We then saw a point of land, and I proposed to go ashore to set up the prismatic compass and get some bear- ings, as well as to prepare dinner. After two hours' work against a strong current we suc- ceeded in reaching the shore, and the cook had set about getting fire when, to our surprise and delight, we saw three FIRST MEETING WITH NATIVES. 243 natives coming around the point in three dug-out canoes and pulling with double paddles. We immediately manned our boat and went out to meet them, but they appeared shy and stood to the southward. We lay on our oars and held up some pemmican, and finally a handsome youth of about eighteen approached cautiously and took a piece. Then he called his two companions and they also came to us. We then induced them to go ashore with us to the old landing., where we built a fire and commenced preparing tea. One of the natives gave us a goose and a fish, all they had at the time. Their boats were very neat and well fitted with nets. I noticed that one of the strangers had a gray coat with a velvet collar, and when I pointed to it inquiringly he said ' Bulun.' Then I pointed to his knife, or bohaktah, as In- called it, and he also said 'Bulun.' From this I imagined that Bulun was the name of the place where they had ob- lained them. We had a very joyous time drinking tea and eating goose, for we felt that we were safe. The natives showed us all their hunting gear, and we showed them the compass, the watch, and our rifles, much to their delight. After eating they crossed themselves, shook hands, and said ' PasJu'e bah.' They also showed us their crosses, which they kissed ; and I was very glad to have in my possession a certain talisman which had been sent to me by a Catholic friend at San Francisco, with the message that it had been blessed by the priest and I would be sure to be safe if I wore it. I did not have much faith in this, however, but I showed it to the natives, and they kissed it devoutly. It was the only article in the possession of the party, in- deed, that indicated to the natives that we were Christians. You can imagine our feelings at meeting these people, for they were the first strangers whom we had seen for more than two years ; and I never before felt so thankful to mis- sionaries as I did on that day at finding that we were among Christian natives. We indicated to the three natives that we wanted to sleep. 244 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. by making signs, and resting the head upon the hand and snoring. They understood us, and took us around tha point where we had hauled our boats upon the sand beach, and then climbed a hill which was from sixty to seventy feet high. This was at the mouth of a small branch of the Lena, and we have since learned this to be on Cape Borchaya, said to be about eighty-five miles northwest of Cape Bykoffsky. There we found four houses and several storehouses, all deserted but one, which was in very good condition. There was a graveyard near by, with many crosses. We all lodged in the one house. The natives were very kind to us ; they hauled their nets and brought us fish, parts of which they roasted before the fire, giving us the most delicate morsels. Some of the fish we boiled, and altogether we had a very enjoyable meal. Then I noticed that Caranie (one of the natives) had gone away, leaving only the youth, whom we called Tomat, and the invalid, whom we called Theodore. From Caranie's absence I argued that there must be other natives near by, and that Caranie had gone to inform them of our presence. Next morning, while the men were loading the boat, I took the compass and got some bearings of the sun for local time, direction, of the wind, and general lay of the land. Previous to this I had interviewed Tomat, who drew a diagram on the sand showing the course of the river, and that the distance to Bulun was seven sleeps, which he indicated by snoring deeply when he pointed to each stop- ping-place. He appeared perfectly willing to go with us as pilot to Bulun. On my return, Melville asked me to hurry up, as he wanted to get off. I was surprised, and asked where the other native was. Melville replied that he had left, having refused to go with us. I then asked him to wait a few minutes while I ran back to the house in order to try and induce them to come. Returning, I found the youth Tomat on the housetop looking very sad and bewildered. When I asked him to accompany us he replied, mournfully, ' Sok ! ATTEMPTS TO PROCEED. 245 Sok ! Sok ! ' which meant ' No ! No ! ' and then tried to explain something which I could not understand, saying ' Kornado,' which I only afterward learned meant ' father.' I felt sorry for the youth, and gave him a colored silk hand- kerchief and one or two little things, and then went back to Melville. We then started out on our own hook and tried to work south (that is toward Bulun) among the mud flats ; but in this we were not successful. At five P. M. we had a consul- tation, and I urged that we must decide at once whether to remain out all night or go back. I recommended going back and forcing the natives to go with us. We had two Remingtons and a shot-gun, and I knew that it would be easy to carry our point. Bartlett had been sounding from the bow, so I asked him if he knew the way back. He said yes, and we started to return. We did quite well until dark, but then the wind shifted and began to blow a gale. It was a very bad situation for a boat in such shallow water. We were fortunate enough, however, to get under the lee of a mud bank, where we secured the boat, with three tent-poles driven into the mud and our line fast to them. Thus we rode all night. It was very cold, and some of the men got their feet and legs badly frostbitten. During the snow squalls of the evening before 1 had to give the helm to Leach, because my glass would constantly get covered with snow and I could not see. At daylight I got Bartlett and Wilson to stand up in the boat and take a good look at the land. Bartlett said he could not recognize it, but Wilson was sure it was the place where we had first met the natives. Bartlett said that if we could weather a certain mud-flat we would have a fair way in ; so we close reefed, I took the helm, and went to windward of the mud-flat. Then we ran in with a leading wind and landed. Newcomb shot some sea-gulls, and we breakfasted on them in order to save our few remaining pounds of pemmican. Wilson insisted that in less than 15 246 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. half an hour he could go to the house where we had slept the night before. Most of us laughed at him, but I told him and Mansen to go and see, while I sent two men to recon- noitre in an opposite direction. Wilson and Mansen came back very soon. We were rejoiced to learn that they had seen the house. We immediately recalled our scouts and embarked, rounded the point, and were received at the old place by the natives in the most cordial manner. They were headed by another native, an old man, who took off his cap, and said ' Drasti ! Drasti ! ' at the same time shaking hands. He immediately took possession of Melville, who was very lame, and helped him up to the house. We unloaded the boat, and carried up the sleeping-gear. When the natives saw a couple of gulls that we were expecting to feed on, they threw them down in disgust, and immediately brought deer-meat to replace them. Veo Wassili, for that was the old man's name, proved to be our great friend ; he willingly consented to pilot us to Bulun. and measured the boat's draught, thus showing that he was wide awake and knew what he was about. This old Tunguse, Wassili, or Wassili Koolgiak, or ' Cut-eared Wassili,' in his style and bearing always reminded me of the late Com- modore Foxhall A. Parker. He was always dignified and kindly, and had a certain refinement of manner that was very remarkable. We saw at once that Wassili was the man whom Caranie had gone to bring to us, and that was why the youth would not go with us until his father arrived. I got Wassili to draw a chart of the route we should take, and the following is a copy of it, with the way in which he proposed to pilot us and the points at which we should sleep. [See next page.] We took a good rest, and were all ready to start next morning with Wassili. Bartlett and myself asked to go ahead, in order to send succor from Bulun and also to spread the news about the two other boats ; but Melville preferred that we should all keep together, for he probably did not feel that we were out of the scrape ourselves yet. WASSILI PILOTS US SOUTH. 247 On Wednesday morning, September 21st, Wassili, with two other natives, started with us, and pursued the same course that \ve had done on the previous forenoon to the southward and eastward among the mud-flats. He went ahead, and had his two men on the flanks constantly sound- ing with their paddles. Their boats, or veatkas, are about fifteen feet in length and twenty inches beam, modeled very much like a paper race-boat, and provided with a double paddle. The native faces the bow, pulling alternately with the right and left hand, the fulcrum of the lever being an imaginary point between the two hands. It is a very grace- ful and fascinating movement, and the natives make their NATIVE BOATS boats skim along very rapidly, sounding at each stroke when going in shoal water. Wassili found a channel among the mud- flats for our boats, which at this time drew about twenty- six inches. We worked all day to the southward and east- ward, and about eiglit o'clock P. M. hauled out on a flat beach and camped for the night, Wassili giving us fish for supper. The weather was very cold and raw, with a strong breeze blowing, and our pilot was very anxious about the state of the river, fearing that we would be stopped by young ice at any moment. The next morning the banks were fringed with young ice, but this we broke our way through and continued our course up the river. After the sun came out, the ice melted, and 248 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. we worked all day through a labyrinth of small streams, passing' several hunting-lodges. At night we slept in two houses on shore, and next morning we entered a large body of water which we thought was the main river. About noon we reached a point of land on which there was a deserted village of about six well-built houses and a number of store- houses. Wassili took us to a house and told us to couche, or eat. I noticed that one of the natives went away in his canoe. I then took a look at the village. The houses were in good repair, and there were numerous troughs for feeding dogs, and cooking utensils in them. The doors were not locked, but those of the storehouses were well secured with heavy iron padlocks of peculiar shape. Things looked more promising now, and I felt sure that the winter occupants of these houses could not be far off. During this resting spell I examined Leach's and Lauder- baeh's feet and limbs. Leach's toes had turned black, and Lauderback's legs were in a fearful condition, being greatly swollen and having large patches of skin broken. We dressed them as well as we could with some pain-extractor that I happened to have along, and when that gave out we used grease from the boat-box. In about an hour a boat appeared in sight, and a number of people disembarked and entered a house near us. A few minutes later, Wassili came and asked Melville and me to go with him. He conducted us to the house, where we shook hands with an old native named Spiridon, who had two very hard-looking women with him, each of whom had lost the left eye. They served tea to us, however, in china cups ; also gave us some reindeer tallow, which they considered a great delicacy. Spiridon looked to me like a regular old pirate, and there was an air of mystery about the place that made me tell Melville I thought Spiridon was an old rascal, and that I was afraid to trust him. He gave us a large goose, however, that was dressed and stuffed with seven other geese, all boned, and this he said we must not eat until sleeping-time on the following day. He also said that THE VOYAGE CONTINUED. 240 we would leave next morning. Ncwcomb had seen a num- ber of ptarmigan flying about the deserted houses, and had bagged a few of these beautiful birds, which were in their white winter plumage, feathered from beak to toe. Then we started with a new pilot (Kapucan), a young man who lived with Spiridon. Old Wassili was quite ex- hausted, and he showed us his left elbow, where he had a severe gunshot wound, not yet healed. Caranie and Theo- dore still accompanied us, and the former proved to be a better pilot than the latter. We worked very hard that day until eight P. M., the men pulling all the time in one-hour tricks. I had the helm and 15;irtlctt the sounding-pole. We camped for the night in a palotka, and when we got under way again next morning only four of us were able to load the boat and get her off the beach. During the previous three days Leach and Lauderback had been working manfully at the oars whenever their turn came, although their limbs were in such a condition that they could not stand, and they had to be assisted to and from the boat. Melville and Bartlett were in a similar condition. CHAPTER XX. LIEUTENANT DANENHOWER'S NARRATIVE. (CONTINUED.) ABOUT noon we reached the village of Geemovialocke (which we afterwards found to be on Cape Bykoff- sky), where we were received cordially by about twelve men, women, and children. Melville and I were taken to the house of a certain Nicolai Shagra, who was the chief. A few minutes later in dashed a slight young man whom we at once saw was a Russian, and I thought he was a Cossack. His name was Efim Kopiloff, a Russian exile who lived in this village, and he proved very useful to us later on. At this time he could say 'Bravo!' which he thought meant good, and that was the only word we had in common ; but in less than two weeks lie taught me so much Russian that I could make myself fully understood to him in a mixture of Russian and Tunguse. We stayed at Nicolai's all night, and his wife gave us a fish supper, which we enjoyed heartily. We described as well as we could that three boats had been dispersed in a gale, and that we did not know where the other two boats were ; also that we wanted to go to Bulun, which place he told us was fifteen days off. I need now to give you some explanation why we were at Cape Bykoffsky, so far out of our course to Bulun. Old Wassili, we understood at the time, was bound first of all to deliver us to the care of his chief, Nicolai Shagra, and with him we eventually found ourselves. The reason why they did not take us to Bulun, as they promised, is not very clear, even to me. It was a very unfortunate time in the season. Young ice was making during the night and breaking up (250) ATTEMPTS TO LEAVE GEEMOVIALOCKE. and thawing during tlie day. It was the transition period between navigation- and sledding. Nicolai ^hagra told us it would take fifteen days to reach Bulun, but I think that he meant that a delay of fifteen days would be necessary before we started that is, to await the freezing of the river. The next morning it was stormv, and he told us that we could o *> * not go ; but about nine o'clock he came in and began to rush us off, as if he really intended to send us to Bulun. He put sixty fish in our boat, and made signs for us to hurry up and embark. We did so, and he, witli three others, went ahead to pilot us through the mud-flats. Elim was in the boat with us. We worked up the river for about two hours, constantly getting aground, and, in the teeth of a fresh breeze, were making very slow progress. Before the village was out of sight, however the pilots turned around and waved us back. We up helm and went back to the village, where they had a sled ready to c;irry Melville back to the house. About four of us secured the boat, but Nicolai insisted on hauling her up, for he made signs that she would be smashed by the young ice if we did not do so. The natives then assisted us, and we hauled her high and dry up on the beach. The con- dition of the men that day was such that I was not sorry that we had turned back, because they were not up to a fifteen days' journey as represented by the natives. We were then taken to the house of a certain Gabrillo Pashin, where we remained all night. Next morning Efim and Gabrillo came to me and made signs that they wished me to go \vith them. They took me to an empty house at the end of the village, where I found some old women engaged in cleaning up. They indicated that they wished us to occupy it ; so I had it cleaned out and moved the whole party into it about noon. Melville mustered the party and told them that he and I were afraid that scurvy had appeared among us, that we must keep the house and ourselves very clean, keep cheerful, and we could prob- ably get along very well until proper food arrived. He also 252 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. told them that I should take charge of everything during his sickness. The next morning all hands except Jack Cole, the Indian, and myself, were in a very bad condition, and we were the only persons who were able to get wood and water. Wilson was able to hobble about the house and prepare the fish, of which we were given eight per day four in the morning and four in the evening. Yaphem lived with us ; so that made twelve men with four fish, weighing about ten pounds, for breakfast, and the same amount for supper. We had no salt, but we had a little tea left. After a few days the natives gave us some decayed wild geese for a midday ineal ; they were ' pretty high,' as an Englishman would call them, but we managed to stomach them, for we were capable of eating almost anything. Efim also gave us some goose eggs. Thus we lived for about a week. Then came an orasnik, or native feast-day, during which Efim took some of us out to make calls, when the natives presented us with fifteen other geese of a similar high character as the others. But our party improved in condition day by day; one by one reported himself as fit for duty, and in about a week's time Melville, too, was well enough to reassume charge informally. The natives were generous to us. I am not sure what their resources in fish were at the time ; but I know they were not catching too many. One day I hauled the nets with Andruski Burgowansky ; we drew seven nets and got only eleven bulook a splendid fish, one of which he gave me as a present. There was a little deer-meat in the village at the time, but we were unable to get any. One day we were surprised by the arrival' of a Russian at the village. I have forgotten to tell you that on the night after we got back the young ice formed on the river, and that sledding commenced in our vicinity about a week later. This Russian was brought to our house, and I acted as interpreter as well as 1 could. Learning that he lived only nine or ten versts away, I asked him to take me home with him, as I wished to talk with him about our future movements and to AT THE EXILE'S HOUSE. 253 learn the best route for getting to Bulun. To this he will- ingly consented, and at two in the afternoon we drove over to his house. With him and his wife, a Yakut woman, I spent the evening, and here 1 learned some news from the great world from which we had been so long absent. He told me that the Czar had been assassinated, that the Lena was still in the river, that Sibiriakoff was running some steamboats, and also that Austria and Prussia had been at Avar. He spoke of Count Bismarck, of Generals Skobeleff and Gourko, and the Turkish war, and of a great many other things besides. His wife presented me with some tobacco, about live pounds of salt, a small bag of rye flour, some sugar, and two bricks of tea. And here let me say that the native women were always very kind, in spite of their ugliness, and 1 would like to send up a large load of gay calicoes, ban- danas, and other fineries for them if I could. Next morning Kusmah Eremoff for that was the name of this Russian exile took me to the door and showed me a fine little reindeer which he had bought for us, and asked if it suited me. I told him it would be very welcome, and so it was immediately slaughtered. We had tea for breakfast, with fish, and fish pate's which the good woman had made specially for me ; and just before I left, Kusmah promised that on the following Sunday he would take me to Bulun with deer-teams. I asked him who else would go, and he said two other Russians. I asked how many Tunguses, and he said there would be none, because they were bad ; and on all occasions he tried to indicate that there was something wrong with the Tunguses. I asked him to come over the following Wednesday to consult with Melville, and then I returned home with the provender. Our people were de- lighted with the change of diet. The deer, when dressed, weighed ninety-three pounds. On Wednesday, Kusmah came over as he had promised Melville. We took him down to the boat and had it turned over for his inspection. We then retired to an empty house, where Melville, Kusmah, and I had a consultation. Kusmah 254 THE JENNEATTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. said he could go to Bulim and return in five days. When asked if he could go quicker with or without me or Melville, he indicated that it made no difference. Melville decided that Kusmah had better go alone. Kusmah acquiesced, but on the following Friday we were surprised to learn that he was going to take Nicolai Shagra with him. I have not mentioned that the second day after our return to the vil- lage, Nicolai came to us and w r anted a written paper from us, which he promised to forward to Bulun at the earliest opportunity. I wrote a paper in English and French, which Wilson put into Swedish, and Lauderback into German ; and all four versions of this document, together with a picture of the ship and a drawing of the American flag, were sewed up in oil-skin and given to Nicolai, who handed them to his wife, and that good woman put them in her cupboard for safe keeping. They were never forwarded. Subsequently, Melville and I prepared despatches for the Minister at St. Petersburg, for the Secretary of the Navy, and for Mr. James Gordon Bennett ; but Melville sent noth- ing by Kusmah. The day after we arrived it was decided that I should go to Bulun, as I was in the best physical condition and the most available person. For more than two weeks my pro- jected trip was talked about by us and by the men. I was to bring back food and deer sleds for the w r hole party, and also to take the despatches which we had prepared. After my return from Kusmah's house, however, Melville decided that Kusmah should go alone, and as he promised to be back in five days he decided not to send any despatches by him, but to take them himself. He seemed to think that Kusmah ought to get there and back quicker if he went alone, and was very much disappointed when he learned that Nicolai Shagra went witli him. This man Kusmah was a robber, who had been exiled there and was dependent upon the natives in a great mea- sure. He could not leave his home without official permis- sion ; but he took the responsibility in this emergency, and A SEARCH FOR DK LONG. 255 evidently had to have somebody to back him and to assist him as a witness, and he therefore, very naturally, took with him the chief of the natives, though he first proposed to take me. He said that it made no difference in time if one should accompany him. The next morning I told Melville that before Kusmah left he should be particularly enjoined to spread the news of the two missing; boats among the natives everywhere he went, ^J CJ v and I said I would like to run over to his house to give him those orders. Melville consented. I went down to Nicolai Shagra's to get a dog team, and while there Spiridon hove in sight with a fine team of nine dogs. I immediately took possession of him and his team, and drove over to Kusmah' s house, where I had a long interview, during which I went over the charts with him again. On this occasion he told me positively that Barkin was only fifty versts northeast of his house, and I immediately determined to go there to seek for traces of the missing boats. I went back to Melville and told him what I wanted to do. He did not assent to the proposal at first, but finally agreed. While at Kusmah's I wrote a line to my brother in Washington, and gave it to Kusmah to mail at Bulun. My eye would not permit writ- ing much. I took ni}- rifle and sleeping bag, put them on Spiridon's sled, and pointed toward his village. He seemed very much astonished, but finally obeyed, and started homeward. On reaching his house 1 had a consultation with him and Car- anie, and tried to get them to consent to take me to Barkin next morning. But they said that the loos-byral that is, posh-ice would prevent them from going, and that it was impossible to go there at that time of the year. We then had supper, after which I hunted up old Cut-eared W'assili, and he consented to take me to Kahoomah, which Kamican ' . said was to the northwest of us. If I could not go to Bar- kin, I was glad at any rate to go to the northwest to search in that quarter and to spread the news. The next morning Wassili, Kapucan, and I started with 256 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. twelve dogs for Kahoomah. We first went down a little river to the southeast, and the young ice broke in many places, letting the dogs and sled into the shallow water. I was surprised at the southeast course, for Kapucan had told me that Kahoomah was to the northwest. After thinking a few moments I concluded that Kahoomah must be the Tun- guse name for Kusmah, and that surmise proved to be correct. They took me back to Kusmah's house, where they had an- other talk, and then agreed to try to take me to Barkin. I set up the compass, and Kusmah pointed to the northeast, saying that Barkin was >^nly fifty versts distant in that direction, but that we would have to go first to the southeast and then swing round to the northward. We had to wait all night for another sled from our village. It came next morning, and then we started to the southeast. About eleven o'clock we came to a big river running north, and I noticed that old Wassili looked up the stream very anxiously and thoughtfully. I set up the compass, and when the needle came to rest the natives sung out with delight and surprise, ' Tahrahoo,' and pointed toward the south end of the needle. I insisted, however, on going north, but the old man said it was impossible, on account of boos-byral or posh-ice. I then decided to let him follow his intentions and see what they were. About four P. M., after having traveled over a region covered with driftwood, we reached a small hut situated near a bold headland, and the island that they call Tahrahoo was about three miles off shore. They said they would take me there the next morning. At this time another sled hove in sight ; it was driven by an old man named Pimitrius, who had been sent after us by Kusmah, with a kettle and a tea- pot for me. Wassili and I went upon the hill about sunset, and had a good view of the river and the adjacent island. He indicated that the steamer Lena had entered there, and that there might be some signs of boats on the adjacent is- lands ; but I told him that I wanted to go round the head- RETURN OP THE EXILE. 257 land and to the northward. But both old men insisted that this would be impossible. The next morning, to satisfy me, they started toward the island, the two old men and myself going in advance, to test the young ice. About a mile off shore the ice was black and treacherous, and so unsafe that the old men refused to go any further. So we had to turn back and return from a fruitless search. It demonstrated, however, that what the natives said was true that the ice was not strong enough for traveling. The second night we slept at Kusrnah's, and then returned to Geemovialocke. At the end of five days Kusmah had not returned, and it was not until October 29th that he put in an appearance, after an absence of thirteen days. On his way back, at Ku- mak Surka, he had, however, met with the two men of the captain's party, Noros and Nindermann, who had written a brief statement about the condition of the captain's party. They gave it to Kusmah, and he hastened to bring it to us. He told us that the men were to have reached Bulun the previous day (October 28th) ; so Melville immediately start- ed with old Wassili and dog teams, to find the men and learn the position of the captain's party and carry food to them. He gave me orders, which he afterward put in writing, to take charge of the party and get it to Bulun as soon as pos- sible. On November 1st, the Bulun commandant, a Cossack, named Gregory Miketereff Baishoff, came to us with a good supply of bread, deer-meat, and lea. He handed me a long document addressed to the American Minister at St. Peters- burg, and signed by Noros and Nindermann. It contained some details of the captain's position, but was not definite enough to allow me to start immediately to their relief. Be- sides, I knew that Kumak Surka was nearer to Bulun than to us, and that Melville, after seeing the men, could get to the captain much quicker than we could ; so I immediately despatched the document to Melville, by special courier James H. Bartlett, fireman, who was the best man of the 258 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. party at that time. The commandant at the same time had the foresight to appoint a rendezvous at which he and 1 should meet Melville on his way north. He also sent a letter to a subordinate, ordering him to equip Melville for the journey. This man was a non-commissioned officer of Cossacks, and he acted with great intelligence and good judgment. He was a tall, tine-looking man, with black side whiskers, forty-two years of age. Bartlett started that night with a deer team, and was likely to get to Bulun only a few hours after Melville, be- cause the latter had taken the clog road, which was 240 versts long, while the deer road was only eighty versts across country. The commandant had come by the deer road, thus missing Melville. I told the commandant that he must get us to Bulun as soon as possible, but he was rather non-committal, and would not state a definite time for starting. Tli at night I slept uneasily and was awake by four o'clock next morning. Efim was up, and I asked him where he was going. He said that he was going with the command- ant to Arrhue, the village where Spiridon and Wassili lived. I told him to tell the commandant to come to me immedi- ately. I thought I would try a high-handed game with this Cossack commandant, and it worked admirably. He came to me about five A. M., in uniform, and I told him that if he did not get us clothed and started by daylight next morning I would report him to General Tchernieff and have him punished ; but that if he did well and got us ready he would be handsomely rewarded. He accepted the situation gravely and said 'Karascho,' which meant 'all right.' I invited him to sleep with us the next night ; and the next morning, at daylight, fourteen dog teams, with about two hundred dogs, were assembled at our village, and the natives brought us an ample supply of skin clothing. This was Thursday, November 3d. We started for Bulun, and on Saturday met Melville at Kumak Surka Serai, which is the first deer station. I had a JOURNEY TO YAKUTSK. 259 long consultation with him, and he told me that there was no possible hope for the captain's party, but that he and the two natives were going to the spot where Noros and Nindermann had left him, and also to the Arctic Ocean to look for relics. He t old me, further, that he had left written orders at Buhm for me to proceed to Yakutsk with the whole party. 1 will here state that his orders to me were given by virtue of a written order from Lieutenant DeLong which placed him in com- mand of my boat, and all persons embarked in the boat were made subject to Melville's orders and directions. Thisl knew to be unlawful ; but, as the captain was the highest naval authority at the time, I had nothing to do but to obey. And so I had accepted duty under Melville from the time of the separation, because I considered that it was my duty, under the circumstances, to do so. We arrived at Bulun on Sunday, and the commandant in- formed me that we must remain until the following Satur- day. I found written orders from Melville telling me to pro- ceed to Yakutsk with the whole party as soon as possible, and there await his arrival ; but he told me verbally at Ivu- mak Surka Serai to leave Bartlett at Bulun. As transportation further south could be provided for only six of the party, I took the five weakest men and started for Verkhoyansk, leaving the other six to follow when Melville should return. I left written orders with Bartlett to start a search party out for Melville in case he did not return by November 20th. The resources of Bulun were very limited, it being only a village of about twenty houses ; and our pre- sence there made fearful inroads on their winter stock. We traveled by deer sled to Verkhoyansk, a distance of 900 versts. Thence to Yakutsk by means of deer, oxen, and horses, a distance of 960 versts, reaching the latter place December 17th, 1881, where we were well taken care of by General Tchernieff, the governor. About December 30th, Melville arrived at Yakutsk, and soon afterward the other six men came on. On New Year's day the thirteen survivors of the Jeaimette were all present at Yakutsk. The most of us 260 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. were in good condition, but my left eye was completely dis- abled, and the right one was suffering by sympathy. One man was insane and had to be kept under restraint, and Leach was disabled slightly with frozen feet. Melville started north from Yakutsk January 27th, taking with him Bartlett and Nindermaim Nindermann because he was one of the men who had last seen the captain, and Bartlett because he had picked up a little Russian and could get along first rate with the natives. Most of the men would have been worse than useless, because they could not have made themselves understood, and would have had to bo waited on by the natives. At Yakutsk, Melville received the first despatch from the Secretary of the Navy, which ordered him to send the sick and frozen to a milder climate. So he ordered me to pro- ceed with the whole party to Irkutsk, and thence to the At- lantic seaboard. At Irkutsk I received despatches from the department ordering me to remain and continue the search, but I was quite unable to do so. After 'the long excitement of our life in the north my eyes began to trouble me more and more, and having got cold in them during the sledge journey from Yakutsk to Irkutsk, I was compelled to seek profes- sional advice. The two oculists whom I consulted told me that my left eye was ruined, and should be taken out to pre- vent the right one from being constantly affected ; that I should not read or write, and should not leave here until the right eye was in a better condition. The reports of the ocu- lists about my right eye were at first very encouraging, and that was why I proposed to the department to charter the steamer Lena, in order to make a spring search for Chipp. I also asked for two officers to be sent to assist, thinking that if my right eye broke down there would then be some- body here to take my place. Melville told me every detail of his trip of twenty-three days from Bulun. He says he has traced the captain's party as far as a summer hunting station called Sisteranek, on the west bank of the Lena, and that the party must be some- NO REASONABLE HOPE. 261 where between that station and Bulcour, neither of which places is marked on the ordinary map. They had been two days without food when Noros and Nindermarm left them, and the region is devoid of game and inhabitants. The men had insufficient clothing, and there is no reasonable hope. I think Chipp's boat swamped during the gale, for she nearly did so on a previous occasion, and was a very bad sea boat. If he succeeded in reaching the coast he had less food than the other boats, and his chances of life were therefore worse than the captain's party. If his boat swamped she would probably come to the surface, after the bodies floated out ; she had not sufficient weight in her to keep her down. The specific gravity of pemmican is nearly that of water, and we found that some of the canisters, which probably contained air space, would actually float. The sleeping bags, when water soaked, would be the heaviest weight in the boat, and these were probably thrown overboard in the gale. The northeast winds continued two days after the gale, and Chipp's boat may have drifted ashore near the mouth of the Olenek, if not carried to the northeast as the driftwood seems to be that is, to the New Siberian Islands." 16 CHAPTER XXI. LIEUTENANT DE LONG'S LOG-BOOK. DURING the time when Lieutenant Danenhower was relieved from duty as navigator of the Jeannette, on account of his eyes, the log of the ship was kept by the commander of the expedition. Lieutenant DeLong always made his entries with two dates, that is, he did not advance one day on crossing the 180th meridian to east longitude, because he expected to drift back again to west longitude, as he had often done before. He always clung to the idea that he would experience a northeast drift, sooner or later, and re-cross that meridian. The log-books of the Jeannette were taken to the Siberian coast by Lieutenant DeLong, and were left, with other articles, near the beacli when he started south, September 19th. They were recovered by Mr. Melville, November 14th, and Lieutenant Danenhower brought them home. The fol- lowing are extracts from the log-book, kept by Lieutenant DeLong, commencing with the discovery of Jeannette Island, and continuing to the end ; the last entry, Saturday, June llth, was made with a lead pencil : LOG OF THE UNITED STATES ARCTIC STEAMER JEANNETTE, BE- SET AND DRIFTING IN THE PACK-ICE ABOUT FIVE HUNDRED MILES NORTH-WEST OF HERALD ISLAND, ARCTIC OCEAN. TUESDAY, May 17, 1881. Latitude by observation at noon, north 76 deg. 43 min. 20 sec. ; longitude by chronom- eter from afternoon observations, east 161 deg. 53 min. 45 sec. ; sounded in forty-three fathoms ; muddy bottom ; a (262) DE LONG'S LOG-BOOK. 263 slight drift northwest being indicated by the lead line ; weather dull and gloomy in the forenoon ; close, bright and pleasant in the afternoon. At seven P. M. land was sighted from aloft by William Dimbar, ice-pilot, and bearing south 78 deg. 45 min. west (magnetic) or north 83 deg. 15 min. west true. It appears to be an island, and such portion of it as is visible is of this shape : = 8. 78 45' W. (mag.) But owing to fog hanging partly over it and partly to the northward of it no certainty is felt that this is all of it. It is also visible front the deck, but no estimate can be made of its distance. As no such land is laid down upon any chart in our pos- session, belief that we have made a discovery is permissible. This is the first land of any kind seen by the ship since March 24th, 1880, at which date we saw for the last time the north side of u Wrangel Land." WEDNESDAY, May 18, 1881. Latitude north 76 deg. 43 min. 38 sec., longitude east 161 deg. 42 inin. 30 sec. The land sighted yesterday remains visible all day, but with greater clearness. We are now able to determine its shape with greater exactness, and it is as below, roughly sketched : Sd.. = 8. 78 45' W. (mag.) The clouds of yesterday, or fog-bank as then called, hav- ing disappeared from the upper part of the island, we are able to see apparent rocky cliffs with a snow-covered slope extending back to the westward from them and terminating in a conical mass like a volcano-top. 264 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. THURSDAY, May 19, 1881. Latitude 76 deg. 44 min. 50 sec. north, longitude 161 deg. 30 min. 45 sec. east. Crew engaged in digging down through the ice on the port side of the stem in an effort to reach the forefoot. The ice was first bored to a depth of ten feet two inches without getting to the bottom of it; next a hole was dug four feet in depth and from the bottom of this hole a drilling was made to a depth of ten feet two inches ; still not reaching the bot- tom of the ice at fourteen feet two inches ; but water now came oozing in to fill up the space dug, and further effort was not made. It is fair to assume that the thickness is of more than one floe, and that the water flows in between the blocks as they lie one above the other. An opening occurred in the ice about five hundred yards to the eastward of the ship and partially closed at ten P. M., the ship receiving several slight shocks as the edges of the ice came together. The island remains in plain view all day, and at times, after six P. M., a very strong appearance of higher land be- yond and to the westward is seen, seemingly connected by a snowy slope with what we have called an island. FRIDAY, May 20. The island remains in plain view all day, though nothing can be seen of the high land beyond, the strong appearance of which is noted in yesterday's log. The center of the island now bears west (true), but as no observations could be obtained to-day its position and dis- tance cannot be determined by the change of bearing. SATURDAY, May 21. Latitude north 76 deg. 52 min. 22 sec., longitude east 161 deg. 7 min. 45 sec. The point of the island which on the 16th inst. bore north 83 deg. 15 min. west (true) to-day bears south 78 deg. 30 min. west (true), from which change of bearing it is computed that the island is now twenty-four and three-fifths miles distant. The posi- tion of the observed point is therefore latitude 76 deg. 47 min. 28 sec. north, longitude 159 deg. 20 min. 45 sec. From measurement made by a sextant it is found that the island as seen to-day subtends an angle of 2 deg. 10 min. DE LONG'S LOG-BOOK. 266 WEDNESDAY, May 25. Latitude north 77 deg. 16 min. 3 see., longitude east 159 deg. 33 min. 30 sec. At eight A. M. the ice was found to have opened in numer- ous long lanes, some connected and some single, extending generally in north-northwest and south-southeast direction. By making occasional portages boats were able to go several miles from the vessel, but for the ship herself there were no ice-openings of sufficient magnitude. The strong appearance of land mentioned on the 19th inst. proves to have been land in fact, and for reasons similar to those herein set forth (in the remarks of the 17th inst.) it may be recorded as another discovery. The second land is an island of which the position and present distance are yet to be determined. The following bearings were taken : Ship's head, S. 14 deg. W. (true). Eastern end of island first seen on 17th, S. 17 deg. W. (true). Nearest end of island seen to-day, S. 69 deg. 30 min. W. (true). The following sextant angles were taken from the crow's- nest : Island first seen subtends an angle of 2 deg. 42 min. Island first seen has an altitude of deg. 16 min. Island seen to-day subtends an angle of 3 deg. 35 miu. Island seen to-day has an altitude of deg. 10 min. Interval between two islands, 49 deg. 55 min. TUESDAY, May 31. No observations. Crew engaged in digging a trench round the vessel, and after four P. M. in getting up provisions, etc., in readiness for a sledge party directed to leave the ship to-morrow morning. WEDNESDAY, June \j- No observations. At nine A. M. a party consisting of Passed Assistant Engineer G. W. Mel- ville, Mr. William Dunbar, W. F. C. Nindermann (seaman), H. H. Erickson (seaman), J. H. Bartlett (first class fire- man), and Walter Sharvell (coal-heaver), started to make an attempt to land upon the island discovered by us on the 25th ult. and which bears southwest half-west (true) at an 266 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. estimated distance of twelve miles. They carried with them the light dingy, secured upon a sled drawn by fifteen dogs, and provisions for seven days, besides knapsacks and sleep- ing-bags and arms. All hands assembled on the ice to witness the departure, and cheers were exchanged as the sled moved off. At six p. M. the traveling party could be seen from aloft at about five miles distant from the ship. THURSDAY, June 2. Latitude 77 deg. 16 min. 25 sec. north. During the forenoon the traveling party was in sight from aloft, seemingly more than half way to the island. SATURDAY, June 4. Latitude 77 deg. 12 min. 55 sec. north, longitude 158 deg. 11 min. 45 sec. east. From the cracked appearance of the ice around the stern it would seem that the ship is endeavoring to rise from her ice dock. To facilitate her rising and to relieve the strain upon the keel under the propeller the men were engaged forenoon and afternoon in digging away the ice under the counters and in the neighbourhood of the propeller well. The said ice is of flinty hardness and clings so closely to the ship as to show the grain of the wood and to tear out the oakum, visible where the ship's rising has left open spaces. Bearings of the island toward which the traveling party was sent : South end S. 52 deg. W. (true). North end S. 61 deg. W. (true). SUNDAY, June 5. No observations. At eleven A. M. start- ed a fire on the ice ahead of the ship, adding tar and oakum to make a black smoke as, a signal of our location to the ab- sent traveling party. At four P. M., the weather being foggy, fired a charge from the brass gun and one from a whale-gun as a similar signal. Carpenters pushed repairs to steam cutter. MONDAY, June 6. No observations. At ten A. M. called all hands to muster and read the act for the government of the navy. The commanding officer then inspected the ship. At 1.30 P. M. divine service was read in the cabin. At six A. M. sighted the traveling party making their way back to DE LONG'S I,O<;-HOOK. 267" the ship : sent the starboard watch out to assist them in. At nine A. M. the sled arrived alongside, drawn by the dogs and accompanied by Nindermann, Erickson, and Bartlett. Mr. William Dimbar, ice-pilot, was brought in by this party, having been disabled by snow-blindness. At twenty minutes of ten A. M. Engineer Melville and Walter Sharvell, coal- heaver, with all remaining traveling gear, arrived on board. The party landed on the island at half-past five P. M. on Friday, June 3d, hoisted our national ensign' and took posses- sion of our discoveries in the name of the United States of America. The island discovered on May 17th has been named and will hereafter be known as Jeannette Island. It is situated in latitude 70 cleg. 47 min. north and longitude 158 deg. 56 min. east. The island discovered on May 25th and landed upon as above stated has been named and will hereafter be known as Henrietta Island. It is situated in latitude 77 deg. 8 min. north and longitude 157 deg. 43 min. east. TUESDAY, June 7, 1881. Latitude 77 deg. 11 min. 10 sec. north ; longitude, no observations. In anticipation of our floe breaking up and our being launched into the confusion raging about us, hoisted the steam cutter, brought aboard the kayaks and oomiaks, and removed from the ; ce such of our belongings as could not be secured at a few moments' notice. WEDNESDAY, June 8. No observations. So thick was the fog until 10 A. M. that our position with reference to Hen- rietta Island could not be determined, but at that hour the fog cleared away, and the island was sighted right ahead and at a distance of about four miles. As indicated yester- day, we were being drifted across the north face. The large openings near us have closed, and the general appearance of the ice to west and northwest is that of an immense field broken up in many places by the large piles of broken floe-pieces, but with no water spaces. Considerable water-sky is visible to the south and south- 268 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. west, and several unconnected lanes of water are to be seen in those directions. The ice, having passed the obstruction caused by Henrietta Island, has closed up again and resumed its accustomed drift to the northwest. FRIDAY, June 10. Latitude N. 77 deg. 14 min. 20 sec., longitude E. 156 deg. 7 min. 30 sec. The following bearings were taken of Henrietta Island at twenty minutes past five P. M. : Ship's head S.' 13 30 W. true. S. W. point of island S. 59 24 E, Second cliff S. 64 30 E. Blackhead S. 66 30 E. At eleven P. M. the ship received several severe jars. At half-past eleven the ice, eighty yards to the westward, opened to a width of ten feet, and after several shocks from the ice, the ship was found to have risen an inch forward. At mid- night there was considerable motion to our surrounding floe, and strong indications of a breaking up of the ice alongside the ship. SATURDAY, June 11. Latitude 77 deg. 13 min. 45 sec. north, longitude 155 deg. 46 min. 30 sec. east. At ten minutes past 12 A. M. the ice suddenly opened alongside and the ship righted to an even keel. Called all hands at once and brought on the few remaining things on the ice. The ship settled down to her proper bearings near- ly, the draught being 8 feet 11 inches forward and 12 feet 5 inches aft. A large block of ice could be seen remaining under the keel. At the first alarm the gate in the water- tight bulkhead forward was closed, but the amount of water coming into the ship was found to decrease a small stream trickling aft beino; all that could be seen. O O There being many large spaces of water near us, and the ice having a generally broken-up appearance, it was con- cluded to ship the rudder to be ready for an emergency in- volving the moving of the ship. After some trouble in re- moving accumulations of ice around the gudgeons, the DE LONG S LOG-BOOK. rudder was shipped, and everything cleared away for mak- ing sail. As well as could be judged by looking down through the water under the counters there w r as no injury whatever to the afterbody of the ship. As soon as possible a bow line and a quarter line had been got out and the ship secured temporarily to the ice, which remained on the starboard side, as nearly in the same berth as she could be placed. By looking down through the water alongside the stern on the port side one of the iron straps near her forefoot was seen to be sprung off, but otherwise no damage could be detected. It was assumed by me that the heavy ice, which all along bore heavily against the stern, had held the plank ends open on the garboards, and that as soon as the ship was able to move from this heavy ice the wood ends came together again, closing much of the opening and reducing the leak. The water line or rather water level being below the berth deck, no difficulty was anticipated in keeping the ship afloat and navigating her to some port should she ever be liberated from the pack-ice of the Arctic Ocean. Sounded in thirty-three fathoms, bottom mud, rapid drift to north-northwest. GEORGE W. BELONG, Lieutenant United States Navy, Commanding. CHAPTER XXII. A ROLL OF HONOR. "TTERKHOYANSK, situated on the Yana River, eastward V from the Lena, is the name of one of the villages which the men of the Jeannette passed through on their circuitous journey from Bulun to Yakutsk, and it is also the name of one of the districts into which the province of Yakutsk is divided. The following are extracts from a translation of the report made by the Ispravnik (chief man) of this district to the Governor of Yakutsk, respecting the arrival and reception of the strangers : " By searching for the strangers all the natives have done all they had in their power to do. Mr. Ipatieff (aid to the ispravnik) knew about the natives, and which of them had done more than the others. Those who did the most were named respectively as follows : The overlooker from Gigan- sky Ulnf, Gregory Baishoff, who took the found strangers to Bulun, showing them the way and giving them all necessary provisions ; and Ipatieff had heard from the strangers how much Gregory Baishoff had done for them. Candidate Con- stantine Mohoploff was the man who took the two saved sailors to Bulun from Bulcour, and accompanied Mr. Mel- ville on all his searching to find the missing members of the expedition and helped Mr. Melville very much. Then the overlooker from Ywo Katurlinsky Nasleg, Wassili Bobrow- sky, who brought the eleven strangers who were on Capo Borkai to the Cape BykofTsky, and who gave them fresh pro- visions to the people from his own stores. He guided Mr. Melville to Simatsky Nasleg, on the Lena, through the wild- erness. Then the two exiles, one of them Kusinah Eremoff, from Gigansky Uluf, and Efim Kopiloff, from Ust-Lena. (270) THE ISPRAVNTK'S REPORT. 271 These two people were the first to bring all necessary assist- ance to the saved strangers. Eremoff volunteered to drive to Buluii to give news about the found people. The man Nicolai Diakonoff, in whose hut, on Cape Byk- offsky, the strangers were living, gave the people bad fish and rotten geese. Then he did not go to Bulim as soon as Mr. Melville told him to go. Through a person who knows the English language has Mr. Melville told the ispravnik about those people who showed the most hospitality to him and his sailors. The first, Kusmah Eremoff. He gave to Mr. Melville all the provisions in his poor house. He went with- out assistance to Bulun to give information where Mr. Mel- ville and the saved people were living, and that they could not come further because they were so weak. Another man, Wassili Bobrowsky, has served Mr. Melville as pilot from the mouth of the Lena to the habitation of Nicolai Diakonoff, and has done all, refusing to take any- thing for his assistance. More than that, he gave to Mr. Melville and his sailors, fishes, sleds and dogs, and was very careful to keep Mr. Melville well and to save him. The third man, Efim Kopiloff, gave all that was necessary with- out requiring pay for it, and as soon as all the fishes were eaten he gave his geese, whereby he was running the risk of hunger himself in the spring time. The two Yakuts who found Nindermann and Noros have to be rewarded too. Nindermann and Noros would have been dead from hunger if Ivan Androsoff and Constantine Mohoploff had not found them Constantine Mohoploff was all the time with Mr. Melville, giving him provisions. Mr. Melville said that without his assistance he could not have made the journey from Bulun in twenty-three days when searching for the people. Nicolai Diakonoff ought not to be rewarded, because he did not give the help which he could have done. Of the overlooker from Gigansky Uluf, Baishoff, Mr. Melville says he cannot reward him enough, and wanted to speak himself about him to the general. I have the honor to explain all that I have written above 272 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. to Your Excellency, as well as I have to inform you about five hundred (500) roubles expended in provisions and clothes for the thirteen (13) saved strangers, and will send to yon afterward a special account about this. From the missing people we as yet have not any news ; but I have ordered all the inhabitants to do all in their power to find all they can, if only the bodies. If they find the bodies they have to be careful to do all they can to keep them, and also anything belonging to the strangers." A copy of the ispravnik's report having been sent to Lieut- enant Danenhower by General Pedoshcnko for examination, he returned it with a communication in part as follows : "As you have invited my attention to this report and have requested my opinion relative to the merits of the people who helped us, I would respectfully submit the following state- ments : JFirat The man named Wassili Bobrowsky rendered the most important services. He is known among the natives and by me as Wassili Koolgiak, which means Cut-eared Wassili. This man may be identified by a gunshot wound near the left elbow. The moment we met him we felt safe, for he gave us food and immediately consented to pilot us to Bulnn, at the same time measuring how much water the boat required, and thereby showing that he knew what he was about. He took us to Nicolai Diakonoff, whom we un- understood to be his superior. At a subsequent time he brought us fish and took me on a journey to the mouth of the river in search of the two missing boats, and also took Mr. Melville on his journey to Bulun. He was always kind and good to us, and it is not only my opinion but also that of the others that we owe more gratitude to him than to any one else. Second The exile Kusmah Eremoff I will recommend as second in the order of merit. He found us accidentally and agreed to take me to his house, where he gave me more than one-half of his small stock of provisions and volun- teered to carry me to Bulun on the following Sunday. I H ft W S3 ft o ft o ft ft i [C THE GENEROUS EXILE. 275 told him to come over to us in three days to consult with Mr. Melville. He came, and Mr. Melville decided that Kus- mah should go without me. He went to Bulun, and on his way back he met, at Kumak Surka, the two sailors from the captain's party, and brought us the first intelligence of them. Before his first visit the natives gave us scarcely enough food, being only eight fish per day and some decayed geese. He gave us salt, flour, tobacco in small quantities, and also bought a deer, which he gave me on my first visit to carry back to the men. He threatened the natives, and made them bring us more fish than we could eat. He lived only ten versts from us, and said that Nicolai Diakonoff should have informed him of our presence, and he could have taken us to Bulun before the river froze over. Kusmah Ercmoi'f acted boldly and well. He is more or less depend- ent on the natives, but was not afraid to threaten them, by which he made; tlu-m give us enough food. Third I will call attention to the prompt and intelligent action of the Commandant, Gregory Mikatcreff Baishoff, at Bulun. He sent word by Kusmah that he would come to us on a certain day. Pie arrived at the fixed time and with an ample supply of provisions. He brought with him a long document that had been addressed by the two sailors of the captain's party to the American Minister at St. Petersburg. The two sailors could not make themselves understood, so the commandant brought the paper to us. I immediately despatched it by courier to Mr. Melville, who was then on his way to Bulun. He going by the dog road had missed seeing the commandant, who came by the deer road. The latter had the foresight to send by the same courier a written order to his subordinate to equip Mr. Melville, and also ap- pointed Kumak Surka as a rendezvous. At all subsequent times the commandant of Bulun pro- vided for us in a very practical and efficient manner, and I do not hesitate to say that he is the most intelligent and best balanced man that I met north of Yakutsk. His posi- tion being a very subordinate one, it required great force of 276 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. character and good judgment in controlling the natives and getting from them everything that we needed without an equivalent. His task was a difficult one, and he did admirably. Fourth The two men, Ivan Androsoff and Constantino Mohoploff, are deserving of high reward for the rescue of the two sailors at Bulcour. Fifth The exile, Efim Kopiloff, lived in our house and rendered us important services. Before I left the vil- lage I had him and all the natives render their accounts of all food furnished. Efim was a very good man, and we, one and all, would be very glad to see him rewarded. Sixth In regard to the three fishermen whom we first met, I would state that they attempted to run away because they were afraid of us. We induced the youth, whom we called Tomat, to approach, offered him something to eat, and then the other two approached. They gave us a goose and one fish all they had at the time. They took us to a hut, where we passed the night. The next morning they would not go with us, but seemed very much agitated and sorry to have us go alone. We could not understand them at the time, but afterward learned they had sent for old Wassili and wanted us to wait. These three fishermen, as well as the assistants of Ivan Androsoff, in my opinion, should be suitably rewarded through their chiefs. In conclusion I would respectfully state that we received good treatment from the authorities at Verkhoyansk, and that we are especially indebted to Governor-General G. Tcher- nieff for the kind and fatherly treatment we received at his hands. The moment he was informed of our presence in Siberia he adopted the most prompt and efficient means of relief, and I am safe in saying that we all regard him as our best friend in Siberia." The whale-boat which carried Melville's party safely to the Delta, was subsequently given to the generous exile, Kusinah Eremoff, for services rendered. CHAPTER XXIII. MR. NEWCOMB'S NARRATIVE. A FTER the final arrangements we re completed, our voy- J-JL. age to the frozen North was commenced on Tuesday, July 8th, on which day, at ten minutes past four o'clock P.M., the Jeannette slowly steamed away from San Francisco. The harbor was lively with yachts, tugs, and other craft, many of which accompanied us to the '' Gate." The high parts of the city were thick with interested spectators. The fort at the " Gate," made so golden by the beautiful sun, saluted us as we passed. Soon the captain's wife bade us good-bye, and the yacht Frolic left us amid cheers, and we stood out into the broad Pacific. Our voyage was without interest until nearing the Aleu- tian Islands. Ougalgan Island was the first to strike my attention. Strange, wild, grand scenery burst upon our gaze as the fog lifted on the afternoon of the 1st of August. We were at anchor, and the boat Avas sent ashore to look over the island. I was the first man to land, and as I jumped on the rocky beach between the jagged headlands a scene of indescribable beauty surrounded me. Thousands of birds were in the air and screaming discordantly, for I was invad- ing their nesting-place : glaucous-winged gulls, tufted and Arctic puffins, guillemots, auks and murres. I can never forget the scene. On the right arose great mountains, clad with snow ; on the left another mountain, a volcano, was seen, from the top of which a thin stream of blue smoke was slowly curling. Not a vestige of life save the birds and myself. A great upheaval of nature marked these Aleutian Islands. Central Pacific Railroad scenery (277) 278 THE JEANNETTB ARCTIC EXPEDITION. is nowhere, for these islands combine the picturesqueness of the Alleghanies with the vastness of the Sierra Nevadas. The islands generally are delightfully green. Flowers are found in many varieties. One little kind was much like my own New England buttercup of the meadows dear at home- To the naturalist this is a great field. GLAUCOUS- WINGED GULLS. We made Ounalaska on the 2d of August ; a lovely local- ity, with much of interest. We soon left, and after a short trip reached St. Michael's, Alaska. Here we got our dogs and skin clothes and two Indians. Leaving here, we stood across Bering Sea for St. Lawrence Bay, Siberia. Many birds here; among them the lovely Aleutian tern and Sabines gull both rare. From this place we started on the evening of August 27th for the North, and entering the Arctic Ocean on the 29th, we anchored at five P. M. off Serdze Kamen. The captain, OFF HERALD ISLAND. 279 with Chipp, Collins and Dunbar, took a boat for the shore, but pack-ice prevented their landing. On the 31st, at Kolyutschin Bay, Mr. Chipp and Mr. Danenhower found traces of Nordenskiold pictures, coins, and coat-buttons. I shot a number of herring (Siberian variety of Argentatusi) and glaucous-winged gulls, and saw numerous seals (the "floe-rats" of Lament, Plwca faetida). In the afternoon of this day we left for Wrangel Land, through loose ice which floated from one to ten feet out of water. After some days, on Thursday, September 4th, at six P. M., we sighted Herald Island. Among the creatures seen I enumerate walrus, seals, and bears, and of the birds there were phalaropes in small flocks of six, ten, or twelve. These graceful little creatures were very unsuspicious, swimming quite near and in circles, as is their habit when feeding. They ride very buoynntly in the water, and are so interesting that I could watch them for hours. Then there were mur- res and guillemots, beautiful kittiwake gulls, some burgo- masters (these last very shy), and the lovely ivory gull, in both adult and immature plumage. Its immature white, spotted with black, is very pretty, but the pure whiteness of the adult, with the coal-black feet and legs, makes a very pretty picture. This species, afterward very common, was always very tame. The men were at this time enjoying themselves with foot- ball and skating on the new ice, which was at this time from four to six inches thick. Their skates were made on board for the occasion. Having read and heard much of the fero- cious polar bear, I can never forget my feelings as upon one occasion Mr. Collins and I approached two large ones which we discovered. In my journal I find this note : " I thought they were going to show fight as they came toward us, then stood defiantly awaiting our approach. Loading our rifles we walked toward them, cocking our pieces, but when within some four hundred yards one of them turned and left. We got about one hundred yards 17 280 THE JEANNETTB ARCTIC EXPEDITION. nearer, when the remaining bear turned and started off, shaking his head ominously. We immediately let go a shot each, which made him jump and start off quicker, we in hot pursuit. But he and his companion soon distanced us. At first I thought it was going to be a fight for life between us, but when I saw them turn and run my only sensations were those of disgust and disappointment. I measured the footprints of one of these bears and found them to average 18 inches. This day I saw a raven, the first since leaving Ounalaska ; and Mr. Collins saw a hawk, and from his de- scription I think it was the Iceland falcon. This bird, I re- gret to say, I did not once see during my stay in the Arctic, and my disappointment is great, as I hoped to add further knowledge of its habitat." The first seal, a young " floe-rat," was shot by one of the Indians, when with Mr. Cliipp on his sled trip toward Herald Island. After skinning this seal the Indian cut small pieces off each hind foot to " give good luck ; more seal ; kill urn." Then taking the bladder and gall, he dropped them carefully into the water to " make um more seal." The first bears killed were taken on the 17th of Septem- ber by Mr. Chipp and Mr. Dunbar. Mr. Collins photograph- ed them in fine style. On this day I got seven beautiful young gulls. These birds were attracted by the killing of the bears, and as they invariably came from the leeward I believe it was the scent of blood, and not by sight, that they were drawn around. I have seen birds on the Banks of Newfoundland attracted similarly, and always in those cases from leeward. Among my notes I find the following : " This morning a singular phenomenon occurred. Seaman Mansen described it as follows : ' This night, or early morning, I went aft to look at the compass; going forward again, I noticed a dull red ball of fire on the port bow. It had an oscillating, horizontal motion. In size it looked as big as the moon when full. It lasted for a few minutes, then suddenly dis- appeared ; caused much surprise and discussion among the A SINGULAR PHENOMENON. 281 sailors and others. Mr. Collins called it an electric gaseous formation.' A similar phenomenon was afterward seen by Seaman Dressier, who said this one exploded. He went out where he thought it had fallen, but failed to find any pieces." During this time numbers of seal and walrus were seen. One of the Indians and myself got two walrus ; both had fine tusks. These creatures were dozing on the edge of the ice and partly in the water close beside each other. They were both mortally hurt with the first bullets. The WALRUS. blood spurted out some two feet into the air from each bul- let-hole. After the first fire we sprang forward within three feet and fired five more bullets, finishing them. Their com- bined weight was some 3,600 pounds. The Indian bared one arm, pushed it down the throat of the one he shot, and, pulling it out, wiped the fresh blood on his forehead, after this applying some snow on the place. This, he said, was for " good luck," and " because his father taught it him." Thirty dogs, with a number of the men, dragged my walrus over the ice, some three miles, to the ship. 282 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Snow shoe-traveling on the ice became quite the rage about November 10th, and many were the tumbles got by all. Our snow-shoes were those used by the natives about Norton Sound and upon the Yukon. By the 14th of October, the observatory being put up, telephone communication with the ship, distant some one hundred yards, was established. One day soon after this I got two small gulls. They came along near a lead where I was sitting, and when with- in range I fired, tumbling one down into the water ; the other turned and I got it. They proved to be Ross' gulls {Rodo&tistua rosea), an exceedingly rare species, very buoy- ant and graceful on the Aving, beautiful pearl-blue on the backs, vermilion feet and legs, and lovely tea-rose on the breasts and under parts ; the rosy tint being scarcely a color, yet blending in exquisite harmony with the pearl-blue of the upper parts. They were in full feather. I afterward got three more in adult and immature plumage. This species is the loveliest I ever saw. I saw more birds, seals, and walrus this first autumn than at any subsequent time. Of course, I except our stay at Bennett Island, where there were thousands of murres, guillemots, and gulls breeding. During the last of October and in November light snow fell at intervals, and as it packed hard improved the walk- ing ; also on newly-made ice, after the rime had formed, traveling was very pleasant. I made frequent excursions over the ice in quest of specimens, and though the birds were leaving, I gathered much of interest. The ice this first fall jammed and smashed a good deal. My notes of Novem- ber 7th state : " Ice is in motion as yesterday, cracking fearfully. The pressure is very great. Great pieces are pushed about like toys. The floe upheaves and gives way in a manner one would believe impossible. The ship is all right now, but for how long no one knows. Have gun and knapsack ready to leave at a moment's notice for God knows where." Some beautiful solar halos were seen about this time, and the aurora was very fine. " To-night, November 10th, the GRAND AURORAL DISPLAY. finest I ever saw. Six arches intersected by cirrus clouds near the horizon and extended from west-northwest to east, covering almost half the heavens. Through this the stars were twinkling beautifully. Wonderfully grand ! Some perpendicular rays near horizon, the whole display full of majestic power. With the booming and cracking of the ice, it formed' an incident to be remembered. One could almost feel the electricity. Lights required twenty -four hours through. Soon the sun will leave us." ICE PRESSURE. On the night of November 13th a sound was heard as if of ice relaxing its pressure. A look outside showed an opening on our port, forming an extensive and increasing lead, with quite a current. All hands turned out and stood by for a call. The ship was in a peculiar position open water over the rail port side and gang-plank out on the star- board. She was supposed to be held by a tongue of ice under her, forward. 284 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Herald Island and "Wrangel Land were both in sight at this time. In two days the young ice on our port was strong enough to walk on, so we were held at times, getting heavily nipped, until the morning of November 24th, when we broke away from one floe-piece and drifted in a perilous manner. One heavy " nip" on the Jeannette, listing her to nine degrees, made her creak and groan like s*3me levia- than in death agonies ; weather thick ; no land visible. In the evening, the ice being quiet, we got some tea. A general feeling of thankfulness was apparent on the faces of all. The only perceptible effects of this severe handling were about the joiner-work and a hole stove in the bulwarks on the port side. During these heavy nips and scenes of commotion the dogs, some forty in number, often broke out in choruses of howls most unearthly. On Christmas Day all hands, fore and aft, enjoyed a good dinner, with a bill of fare for the cabin mess. The men came aft dressed for the occasion. They offered seasonable greetings, and then returned to the " deck house," where an impromptu entertainment of singing, dancing, and so on was given, and enjoyed by all. New Year's Day was a pleasant one, being ushered in by the ringing of the ship's bell and cheers. In the evening a nice entertainment was given by the men. A programme of the dinner, which I have saved, reads thus : SOUP. Julienne. FISH. Spiced salmon. MEATS. Arctic turkey (roast seal). Cold ham. VEGETABLES. Canned green peas. Succotash. Macaroni, with cheese and tomatoes. DESSERT. English canned plum pudding, with cold sauce. Mince pie. Muscat dates, figs, almonds, lilberts, English walnuts, raisins, mixed candy from France direct by the ship. NEW-YEAR'S FESTIVITIES. 286 WINES. Pale sherry. BEER. London stout. French chocolate and coffee. "Hard tack." Cigars. ARCTIC STEAMER JEANNETTE, Dec. 25, 1879. Beset in the pack, 72 degrees north latitude. The programme of the entertainment was as follows : THE CELEBRATED JEANNETTE MINSTRELS. PROGRAMME. PART FIRST. Overture . . . , by Orchestra Ella Ree by Mr. Sweetman Shoo Fly by H. Wilson Kitty Wells by Edward Star Mignonette by H. Warren Finale by Company Intermission. PART SECOND. The world-renowned Anequin, of the Great Northwest, in his original comicalities. The great Dressier in his favorite accordion solo. Mr. John Cole, our favorite clog and jig dancer. Wilson as the great Captain Schmidt, of the Dutch Hussars. Violin solo by George Kuehne, Ole Bull's great rival. Intermission. PART THIRD concludes the performance with the side-splitting farce of MONEY MAKES THE MARE GO. Characters. Mr. Keen Sage George W. Boyd Miss Keen Sage W. Sharvell Charles Tilden (a promising young man, in love with Miss Sage) H. W. Leach Julius Goodasgold H. D. Warren Costumer, A. Gortz. Property Man, W. Nindermann. NEW YEAR'S, 1881. 286 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Thus opened the .year, soon to prove eventful. The num- ber of birds shot by all hands during 1879 was 215 ; many more might have been taken, but, like Josh Billings' crow, we did not " hanker arter " them, nor had we learned to value them for fresh food, as was afterward the case. Our first season for collecting was short; still we could enumerate specimens ornithological, botanical, ethnological, osteological and alcoholic, which looked well as a nucleus. As the days began to lengthen the cold began to strengthen. Our coldest weather for this year was in February, when the spirit thermometer indicated 57.8 Fahrenheit. Yery little wind, as a rule, with these low temperatures. One day, soon after New Year's, I was out walking with one of the Indians. Noticing the new moon, he stopped, faced it, and blowing out his breath he spoke to it, invoking success in hunting. The moon, he said, was the " Tyune," or ruler of deer, bears, seals, and walrus. The Indian told me this particular manner of invoking good-will was a secret handed down to him by his father, who got it from a very old Indian for a wolf-skin. The Jeannette was under pressure off and on all winter, and on the 19th of January, in consequence of a crack which made right under her forefoot, she sprung a leak. "The men are at the pumps constantly night and day. I took a spell myself. The ship at this time, by estimate of the carpenter, is leaking between 2,500 and 3,000 strokes per hour. Unless the pressure ceases it is only a question of time how soon we have to abandon the Jeannette. The Siberian coast is some two hundred miles south by compass. A long, tough journey ; but a will to work has helped many a man through a tight place, and, I trust, will yet help us. The quivering of the ship indicates the pressure yet upon her." On the 21st a steam-pump was rigged forward. " This greatly relieves the men, who are working splendidly." From the date of this accident until her being crushed a period of some eighteen months pumping was kept up night and A DANGEROUS EXCURSION. 287 day. "Yesterday evening (January 20tli) one of the Indians made an offering of some tobacco to the moon for the safety of the ship." The effects of the cold at this time when out on the ice was to freeze the moccasin soles and mittens while on feet and hands. Nose-guards were worn Ly many. After walking perhaps an hour or so, a feeling as of lump in the stomach from indigestion would be experienced." Under date of January 24th I wrote : " Ice now about ship is bulged and pushed under her from ten to eighteen feet thick in accumulative masses." For the '25th I find : " The sun was seen to-day for a brief period after an absence of seventy- one days. Wrangel Land is visible." As an illustration showing the danger always attendant upon going any distance from the ship I quote : " February 16th. Off with one of the Indians to the northwest; some twelve miles ; found only old tracks of bears. When about half a mile from the ship, on our way back, we found that where we walked over solid ice in going out there was now a lead or lane of water some forty feet in width. This looked serious, as it was in old heavy ice and increasing. "After taking a smoke we struck off east some three- quarters of a mile, where we found it much narrower, and succeeded in jumping from piece to piece, and thus crossing safely to the floe in which the Jeannette was fast, soon reaching the vessel, and very glad to get out of an awkward situation." Lest some reader may think the above sensa- tional, I would say that the wind, though light, was against us, daylight short, the water widening, and a temperature 45 degrees Fahrenheit. The exception to the rule occurred next day when, at a temperature of S3 degrees Fahrenheit, a gale of wind sprang up, blowing some forty-five miles per hour in squalls, with thick, blinding snow which one could not face. On the morning of February 1st, one of the Indians shot a fine white fox ; we were some fifty miles northwest of Herald Island, and nearly as much from Wrangel Land at the time. This animal is decidedly a rover. On the morn- 288 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. ing of the 2d a large bear made us a visit, walking up the gang-plank with evident intentions of coming on board. The dogs had come in ahead of him and were huddled together on deck, barking furiously. Bruin paid for his temerity with his life, for Mr. D unbar came out with his rifle and soon dis- patched him. Though we received other numerous visits from these huge creatures, none were so bold as he. They would commonly make off at sight, though when cornered showed fight at the dogs. On the 22d of February the ship was dressed with bunting and presented a very gay appearance. American ensigns at the fore and main, and the American yachting ensign at the mizzen. Our soundings at this season averaged about thirty- three fathoms, with a mud bottom. " The returning light shows the effect of its absence in the bleached appearance of all. I notice the cold renders the finger-nails brittle. Mea- surements beside a recent crack show the floe to be about ten feet in thickness. This is ice made this winter." A series of measurements taken after this made the average thickness eight feet. Among the peculiarities of some of the walrus which I saw, I would mention the difference in size and length of the tusks, the left tusk being the longest, the upper teeth much more worn than the lower, and in one skull a singular one-sided development of lower jaw. I believe it has been considered doubtful if the walrus is carnivorous. Without attempting any discussion I would say, I have taken pieces of skin with hair attached from the stomach of one shot by the Indian Alexai. This skin was from a young bearded seal (Phoea barbata). Four bears were the most seen to- gether. During the month of April I took a small sparrow and a small bird (Budytes flava*), stragglers from shore. May 1st saw the first gull a kittiwakc. It was rather dis- tant. During the first part of this month I shot some murres (Z7. Brunnichii) and guillemots (7. grylle), and saw others. " All the birds go west. I think there must be land in that direction where they go to nest." OUR FOURTH OF JULY. 289 By the middle of May one could at midnight see to read in the cabin without lamp or candle. More bears were taken this spring than at any other time. I got a fine old fellow with a beautiful coat. On the 1st of June dredging was be- gun. This day's haul contained some asterias, and one small bivalve. Though the number of birds daily increases they are not yet plenty. The seals are now beginning to sun themselves on the ice, but they are very shy. The ice now MORE FRESH MEAT. wastes perceptibly every day. Under date of June 20th I find written : " To-day I collected nine mosquitoes." These were the first entomological specimens collected after we en- tered the Arctic Circle, though subsequently I got one fly and a spider. During June and July I took Ross', ivory and kittiwake gulls, jagers, murres, guillemots and phalaropes. On the Fourth of July, 1880, the ship was again dressed with flags. In June we had some brief showers, and also in July and August. In June the dogs at times sought the shade of the ship to sleep. Some beautiful asterias were obtained by the dredge this month. I have saved sketches and notes for future study. On July 25th a bearded seal was shot by the Indian Anequin. This, the only one taken, was a fine specimen. The skin made excellent soles for our 290 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. moccasins, and the meat was quite eatable. The stomach contained worms, which were very much like the ascaris lumbricoides of man. On the last day of the month Mr. Collins added a fine jager, species Buffonii, to the collection. On the afternoon of August 3d a smoky haze with a strong smoky smell was very apparent, Its cause I must leave the reader to conjecture. In August, Mr. Chipp shot two sand- pipers {A. metadata) ; these proved an interesting addition to our collection. Fish were never plenty, but a small species of cod ( G-. gradlUs), h-omc six inches long, was fre- quently seen during the brief summer season. During this month I often noticed patches of snow some- times blood-red, at other times nearer a brown ; and, by viewing these deposits from different points, one could readily see exquisite shades of blue, green, purple, and crim- son. These deposits were nearly always on old floe. 1 had not the chance to study it which I desired, but I think it was algae, the same as or allied with Pamclla nivalis. During the first part of September a small flight of phala- ropes (.P. fidicarius') occurred. They seldom stopped, but moved in small flocks of six or eight in a general direction from northeast to southwest. In consequence of the wasting away of the ice, particularly where cracks had been, lanes of water were formed. The lanes connected with the ocean by holes, but were on the average only three feet deep, with the ice between this water and the ocean proper. I often paddled a kayak about these lanes, sometimes several miles, taking the gun with me. Surface ponds, in extent sometimes of several acres, also formed ; to paddle about these was quite enjoyable ; then, too, the possibility of pick- ing up a specimen added to the interest. Though ice had formed over pond-holes, it was not strong enough to bear a man until about September 6th. Among the things found on the ice this season were pieces of wood and parts of trees, both birch and fir, and parts of two skeletons of good-sized codfish. These last evidently had been caught much farther OUR HEAVIEST BEAR. 291 ftouth by seals, and drifted on the ice up to the latitudes where they were found. Throughout the summer much of the time the men were hunting, and thus we had seal at least once a week for din- ner sometimes eatable, often not, but best when roasted and eaten cold. Both bear and seal, in the absence of other fresh meat, will pass, but are not very desirable. None of the bears taken by us came up to the weights I have seen mentioned by other Arctic voyagers. The heaviest one ob- tained by us weighed as shot 943| pounds, and was a fat one. In measurements they were about the same. u CHAPTER XXIV. MR NEWCOMB'S NARRATIVE. (CONTINUED). DURING the summer of 1880 the ice had been compara- tively quiet, but by October it was grinding, smash- ing, and piling up in many places in a manner fatal to any ship caught by it. The mercury fell to 45 degrees by the middle of this month, and the snow would give a metallic ring at each footfall, loud enough to interfere with ordinary conversation. Standing near some of these conflicts be- tween grinding floes, one first would realize the pressure by CONFLICT OF THE FLOES. the humming, buzzing sound ; then a pulsation is felt. Something must give. Bang goes the ice right under foot, with a report like a big gun. Although you are watching, it startles you. It upheaves, lifts you with it, and you must step back to a safer place. I have often taken these rides. There is a wonderful fascination about it. On November 10th the sun was seen by refraction ; on the llth it left us. The temperature this month varied a (292) CHRISTMAS ENTERTAINMENTS. 293 good deal, falling to 33 the first week and rising the last of the month to +8. Whenever the ice opened the tempera- ture would rise by reason of the amount of heat liberated. The lowest temperatures were during clear weather. Seve- ral meteors were observed this month. These were of much interest to Mr. Collins, and were he with us he would have something to say about them in his usual entertaining man- ner. Appetites and sleep were not so good this second winter. During December the ship was shaken up off and on, and much heavy jamming of ice occurred. On Christmas Eve the men gave another very nice enter- tainment in the deck-house, buttonhole bouquets and all. These bouquets (I have nine of them before me as I write) were made of pink and green paper, and handed us by Seaman Johnson with one of his pleasant smiles. Poor fellow, he is now missing! A good man and a tiptop seaman. Of those who on that night contributed for our amusement nine are among the missing. I append a programme of the en- tertainment : JEANNETTE'S MINSTREL TROUPE. PROGRAMME. PART FIRST. Overture Company The Slave Mr. Sweetman Nelly Gray H. Wilson What Should Make You Sad ? G. W. Boyd The Spanish Cavalier E. Star Our Boys H. Warren PART SECOND. The great "Ah Sain " and " Tong Sing " in their wonderful tragic performances. Accordeon solo by the celebrated artist Herr Dressier. Mr. Henry Wilson in his serio-comic songs. Alexai and Anequin still on the role. Violin Solo G. Kuehne Magic Lantern Views. Mr. Sweetman 18 296 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. To conclude with the popular play, "THE SIAMESE TWINS." Characters. Professor G. W. Boyd Agent (in love with the Professor's daughter) H. W. Leach Professor's Daughter W. Sharvell The Twins P. E. Johnson and H. Warren FINALE. "The Star Spangled Banner." Given by all hands. CHRISTMAS EVE, 1880. Friday evening, December 31st, another and the last en- tertainment was given by the boys forward. One of the original programmes is subjoined. [See fac-simile.] Before the fun commenced a poem by Mr. Collins, which he had written for the occasion, was recited. It will now be read with a melancholy interest : A PROLOGUE. On the lone icebound sea we gather here To greet the dawning of another year. The past is full of memories : we recall Thoughts, words and deeds, bright forms and faces, Hopes, blessings, yea, and loved ones' fond embraces; And parting prayers, up offered for us all, By lips from hearts to each of us endear'd, To guard us on the course we've northward steer'd. Now though for merriment we all unite And make the deck-house ring with joy to-night, At intermission, 'twixt the dance and song, How quickly our fleet thoughts will wing To distant lands and scenes, to bring A mystic spell upon each darling throng Of festive friends, who wondering ask each other, " How fares our absent one son, husband, brother ? " And dearer hearts, that beat with tenderest throb, E'en now may yearn for us, and many a sob May echo in a loneliness as drear as ours ; For where stern fate the golden link hath riven, And hearts from hearts beloved afar are driven, A common cioud o'er all the parted lowers; A PROLOGUE. 297 As if a pitying heaven would so decree That parted souls should feel in unity. But while we thus may sentimentalize In manner p'raps the opposite of wise, Mirth will demand the passing moments, too. And though our efforts here may fail to reach The heights of comedy, yet will they teach Our audience that the bound Jeannette's good crew, For Arctic dangers and the floe's worst jam Don't care a single continental damn. Some one remarks, " We have no coal for steaming : " Why, no, but surely, if I am not dreaming, I see quite near me a small pile, 'tis true, But, gentlemen, no better Cole,* 'tis said E'er came aboard. What's more than this, he's red Ready, I mean, to do his duty, too; And though his weight is heavy round New York, In earlier days 'twas found not far from Cork. And not since Adam sinn'd e'er lived a man Who lov'd the Arctic like our Nindermann.f Who can be found among our crew that ran a Risk on the ice like his, as sou'westward floating Upon the floe piece most unpleasant boating ? But I suspect a buxom squaw named Hannah Was very much the reason, if not cause, Why William so admires the Esquimaux. Again regretting that the much lov'd sex Can't grace our festival, or light our decks With eyes far brighter than the night queen's lanterns, We're not so badly off, though, as you think, For Fortune, that our spirits might not sink, Has sent a substitute along, and Sweetman turns Up in our midst, his jolly visage beaming With smiles and lips whence pleasantry is streaming. Here, too, you'll find among us, as you see, The stalwart, bold machinist man called Lee, Whose hand is ready, like magician's wand, To turn an engine shaft or shape a pin, Or put a piece upon a pot of tin. * Jack Cole, the Irish boatswain. t Nindermann was with Tyson on thegreat 1,500 mile drift when separated from the Polaris. 298 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. No better hand e'er crossed the herring pond Since Tubal Cain first hammered into form Iron, for use in battle or in storm. Now also mark that individual there, Whose father must have been a Bartlett pere. Sweetness alone could such a youth produce. Come, don't be modest, lift your head up higher, man ; Every one knows that you're our first class fireman, Who puts his leisure to the best of use, By thinking out full many a thing, worth mention If I was talking up the history of invention. And now, my friends, I think not much you'll marvel If I refer to Lauderback and Shnrvell Two youths who in the fire-room's gloomy deep, At temperature too high for e'en lost souls, Keep feeding hungry furnaces with coals, And faithfully their six hours' vigil keep. Perhaps they cheat old Time, and this between us Tell to each other stories about Venus. Ah, yes, my introduction would be void Of interest if I had forgotten Boyd, The youngest of our number, on whose head The weight of years, and all the sad belongings Of hopes expired and unrequited belongings Have never pressed down heavier than lead. To him is given the future with its bubbles, Its sad successes and its merry troubles. " All hands on deck ! " pipes up my boatswain's whistle, And I sincerely trust, my friends, that this'll Be for our sailor lads the only call To summon them to duties hard and serious Before we leave this region most mysterious, To face the rolling sea and treacherous sqiiall I've noticed often that when making sail, Our boys care little for a breeze or gale. There's Erickson, as tough as well-tanned leather, Worth any common three men rolled together ; And Wilson, too, a very blithesome fellow, Who handles rope or rifle like a sailor, And needle like a first-class Broadway tailor. Then, with a voice at once low, sweet and mellow, Comes one with boat or iron bar a wrestler ; Cooks for our mess in style we call him Dressier. A PROLOGUE. 299 I think that, too, I see, and not so far Off either, quite a brilliant looking Star ; And what I say is really most surprising, He never seems to set ; so keep your eyes on The Star that never sinks below horizon Indeed, he looks to me as always rising. I'm dazzled also and my pulse is dancing From studying up that jolly fellow, Mansen. Mansen, you know, was once caught in a queer snap By stepping unawares into a bear-trap ; But accidents like this will sometimes ruffle Even the most smoothly-running stream of life, Just like a little quarrel with one's wife; And whether stuff of deerskin or of duffel The moral points if e'er you get your pants in A trap don't have you're legs in it, like Manseii. Now, here's another of us. If you want a tune he Can play it like an artist ; call on Kuehne. Or if life's tension you would be relaxin' "We can supply without the least delay- By giving us a fortnight's notice, any way Amusement really that's worth the axiii'. All this may seem to you a stupid riddle, But not so puzzling as to learn the fiddle. If Adam and his mate had had but one son 'Tis certain they'd have named the youngster Johnson, And he'd have died some forty centuries back, Being then, on that account, to us no use. "We have, however, from the laud of spruce And Norway pine, a dapper little Jack, To help us in our work, to haul and steer And celebrate with us the good New Year. If we could only tell what is before us How well we'd know the fortune stored for Noros, Who, like Chief Justice of the Common Pleas, Looks calmly at all dangers of the ocean. But I've thought sometimes have, in fact, a notion That Noros, when he looks so much at ease, Is in reality but calmly thinking About the girls at home now stop your winking. "What would we do if Destiny most dire Had robbed us of a man we all admire, And sent us cruising round this icy place 300 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. Without companionship of our friend Nelse ? Or sent along with us, well some one else ? We ne'er had known stout Iverson's bluff face A man above most others ; you can put your Last dollar on him as an Arctic butcher. Another thought it's contemplation hurts, What would we do, boys, if we hadn't Gortz ? Our drink would lose all taste, our meat all relish ; Our laughter would be silent, and our bones Would give occasion for a thousand groans ; In fact, the situation would be hellish. But luck stood by us ; Gortz is here, and willing Even to fetch water up when Lee's distilling. And now before I lose all power of speech, Oh let me say a little about Leach, Whose very smile would make sour apples mellow, And raise sweet blossoms on a topsail yard ; But ah, kind friends, keep still, be on your guard. A giant form I see who is that fellow ? Gracious ! I thought it was some monster foreign, But really 'tis our messmate, gallant Warren. Before belaying, just a look to leeward Reveals the constellation, cook and steward ; And yet another peep along our decks. See ! That's very like a face I've seen elsewhere, Yes, at St. Michael's, when we anchored there. That is our hunter, which his name's Alexai, And with him, like a lady loved by many, Is our young sylph-like friend, Queen Annie.* On the 5th of February the sun was seen, and a most cheering appearance it had. About this time our drift northwest was rapid. The snow had drifted about the ship so much that fifty or sixty yards away but little more than the boat's smoke-stack and spars were to be seen. In my notes I find these items : " Our floe has been much reduced by recent cracks. It looks as if the Jeannette was in her last dock. Some people have said to me there is little dan- ger in the Arctic. They were evidently not posted. A ship in the pack is ' under fire ' all the time." * Queen Annie was the nickname for Anequin, the Indian hunter. ffi K ONLY A DREAM. 303 During the early spring of 1881 nothing especial occurred. The first bird (7. grylle) was seen April 6th, and more birds were seen this April than during the corresponding month of last year. Among them were no new species. The Arctic is very shoal in these parts. From the 21st to the 23d of this month we shoaled our water 21 fathoms, giving but 18 or 20 fathoms where we had been getting 35 to 40. This was the most sudden shoaling we ever experi- enced. A VISION OF HOME. I suppose the reader will smile if I say that many a de- lightful repast I sat down to in my dreams. Such, however, was the case, and the most provoking part was to wake up finding it only a dream. Visions of pie pumpkin pie, the particular weakness of a New England Yankee always oc- cupied an aggravatingly prominent place. Life under such circumstances as ours was well calculated to make a person sleep with " one eye and an ear open." On the 16th of May, 1881, about seven P. M., seaman Erickson came in the cabin and reported to the captain, say- ing : " Captain, Mr. Chipp reports land in sight on the star- board beam." This news made us all glad. Notwithstand- ing the proximity of land would probably cause the floe to 304 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. crack more dangerously, I could not overcome the sense of security which the sight caused me to feel. This land bore N. 83 deg. 15 min. W. (true) from the ship. Our position at the time was 76 deg. 43 min. N., and 161 deg. 54 min. E. On the 18th, I could see the land from the floe-level. Pre- vious to this I had seen it only from aloft. This land was afterward named Jeannette Island. As illustrating the rap- idity of our drift at this time, I mention the bearing of this island from the ship on the 20th. It was S. 78 deg. 30 min. W. It was much more plainly seen this day than before. This island was not landed upon. On the 24th more land was seen. This afterward was named Henrietta Island. Both islands were in sight this evening. On the morning of May 31st, a party, consisting of Mr. Melville, Mr. Dunbar, with Bartlett, Nindermann, Erickson and Sharvell, left for the last new land. I was to go, but, being taken suddenly ill, was unable to do so. This illness was caused by eating canned tomatoes probably lead poisoning. A number of the crew were similarly affected. Mr. Chipp was thus troubled when the island party left the ship. This party took with them a sled and fifteen dogs, with boat, tent, rifles and provisions. They had a hard time getting to the shore. The party returned on the 4th of June, having landed, planted the Stars and Stripes, and taken possession. Three points were named. The first, Bennett Headlands, are bold and rocky. They form very secure nesting-places for multi- tudes of guillemots and murres. A number of guillemots ( U. grylle) were shot by Sharvell, and Bartlett saw num- bers of eggs, but in inaccessible places. The next place was Cape Melville, so named by the men. Between Bennett Headlands and Cape Melville was Point Dunbar. Near here a cairn was built, and some papers, suitably enclosed, buried beneath. This island is from 2,500 to 3,000 feet high, barren and rocky, with one large and some smaller glaciers on the northern and eastern sides. The jacket of snow and ice ANIMAL AND VEGETABLE LIFE. 305 spread over the high parts was from fifty to one hundred and fifty feet in thickness. Botanical specimens embrace two little mosses, two pretty lichens, and one of grass. Cape Melville is 1,200 feet high. Soundings off here were had in eighteen fathoms, with bold water. Point Dunbar is 600 feet in height. The ice near the land passes northwest, in heavy motion all the time. The number of guillemots about at this time was much increased. These birds often circled about the ship with evident curiosity. On the morning the sled party left for the island I got a fine adult-plumaged snow-bunting (_P. nivalis). I had seen this species before, but this was the first one taken. Every day, while near Henrietta Island, I noticed the guillemots going off in the morning toward the northeast, apparently to feed, and returning in the evening. TlTis I afterward found to be the case, as the stomachs of all those I shot were full of food, crustaceans, and recognizable parts of small fish like Gr. gradlis. I afterward saw this bird (7. grylle) dive, and come up with a live fish of this species in its beak. It proceeded to kill the fish by beating it on the water and shaking it. I did not see it swallow the fish, as, becoming suddenly frightened, the bird flew away. Soon after the return of the island party the ice about the ship cracked in a lively manner, and on the 9th she was afloat. In consequence of the open water about and the prox- imity of land, the shooting improved, and I at times got very good sport. The fresh food thus obtained was very desir- able. On the llth the ice was comparatively quiet. The ship lay alongside the floe with ice-anchors out. On the 12th the ice came together, the ship was heavily nipped, and careened to 16 degrees ; but the pressure relax- ing, she righted again. All hands were on the alert for duty. Between five and six P. M. the pressure was heavy, raising the ship by the bow and settling her by the stern. She again heeled to starboard, and the ship showed the pres- sure, groaning and shaking in the ice-king's grasp. The humming sound throughout the vessel, with the cracking of 306 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. deck seams and the dancing of the whole upper works, was a sad evidence of the situation. I can never forget the manner in which the gang ladders leading to the bridge jumped from their chucks, and danced on the deck like drumsticks on the head of a drum. In the midst of this wild scene a crash was heard. A man came up from below and said : "The ice is coming through the coal bunkers." The old Jeannette was doomed. She had fought a good fight, as her battered sides showed, but this last hug was too much for her. After the smash, no sound save the silent rush of water. This silence, after the unearthly humming, was the saddest part of all. She had been stabbed in her vitals and was settling fast. The men worked with a will ; everybody did ; life hung in the balance. Seaman Star, noble fellow, stood below with the water up to his waist, passing out provisions until ordered out by the captain. To- day I know not where he is. The Jeannette contained many such men in her crew. Good seamen all. But ' silence and oblivion, like the waves, have rolled over them, and none can tell the story of their end.' After getting boats and provisions on the ice, about mid- night, camp was pitched, a watch set and the tired party turned in, soon to be turned out again by the opening of the ice under the sleepers in the captain's tent. All hands helped shift to a safer place, and about 1.30 A. M., June 12th, turned in again. At this time the Jeannette was heeled over, so the yard-arms were against the ice and starboard rail under water. ' About twenty minutes before the watch from our tent was called, I heard a noise which must have been the ship as she went down. I looked out soon after and she was gone, her requiem being the melancholy howl of a single dog. Only a few floating articles marked the place. Insignificant as the Jeannette was in comparison to the ice, her disappearance made a great change in the scene. During her existence there was always something A DREARY BLANK. 307 animated to turn to and look at, but now all is a dreary blank.' I have seen far heavier grinding than that which crushed the Jeannette, but the ship is not yet built that can stand such hugging. CHAPTER XXV. MR. NEWCOMB'S NARRATIVE. (CONTINUED). NEXT morning our camp presented the appearance of a family who had broken up housekeeping in a hurry, as in fact we had. But excellent spirits prevailed. One of the sailors handed some stuffed decoys of mine to the cook for the captain's party. He commenced plucking the feath- ers hefore finding out the joke. Our life for the next week was spent in getting ready for our retreat. Much of the time was spent in sewing, and some droll looking but very sensible costumes were com- pleted. Our tents were numbered, and over the door of ours was the word ' Welcome.' The boats and provision sleds were named. The first cutter was named the Jeannette, and bore a beautiful silk ensign. The second cutter, Mr. Chipp's boat, was named Hiram ; and Mr. Danenhower's boat was named Rosy. Our sleds were named Sylvie, Etta L., Lizzie, and Maud. One other bore the motto, ' In hoc signo vinces.' In consequence of the stronger light during the day, it was decided to march nights and sleep daytime. This was accordingly done and proved a good thing ; and many a comfortable sleep I enjoyed after a hard night's work, either dragging with the men, or afterward with pick and shovel building roads. The ice during the first of our tramp was very bad, often one or two miles being all we could make in a night's work, and during the first week we drifted back twenty-four miles. From this time until I reached the Tunguse settlement I hardly knew what dry feet were, and often was wet through, clothing, sleeping gear and all. During the march over (308) i ts "3 THE ICE IN JULY. 309 the ice I saw a number of gulls (B. rosea), but was not able to secure any. Our Fourth of July this year was passed in hard work, but we were all glad to be able to do it. On the 9th I first saw the land, which afterward was landed on and named Bennett Island. By July 16th most of the floe was old ice, the younger having disappeared both by breaking up and thawing. The proportion of water to ice had much increas- ed. Occasionally a seal was shot by Mr. Collins and Mr. Dunbar, and on the 20th Mr. Collins shot a A SUCCESSFUL HUNTEK. walrus which was afterwards secured by Mr. Dunbar in a very plucky manner. The fresh meat was very acceptable, and the blubber made good fuel. The boiled skin was not unlike tough tripe or, better yet, pig's feet, and with vinegar I think would be very good. As we journeyed toward land the number of birds increased, among them kittiwake and ivory gulls, guillemots ( U. grylle) and ( U. Brunichii). The gulls (72. tridactyla) were most numerous. The ice July 24th was very lively, moving in circles as if the pack was being jammed and pushed by the land. On the 26th, at intervals when the fog lifted, I could with a 310 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. glass see the gulls sitting on the cliffs. Light showers this evening, with the ice churning in every direction. Sound- ings to-day in thirteen fathoms; murres and guillemots were much more numerous, being often seen with food in their beaks flying toward the shore. A good deal of fog prevailed at this time. On Friday, July 29th, after dinner, the fog suddenly lifted, disclosing the high cliffs of the land close at hand. This is ANNEXATION OF BENNETT ISLAND. a magnificent, though desolate, land of rushing torrents, glaciers and huge, impregnable, rocky fastnesses. After lively work we reached grounded ice near the southeast part of the island. Here were high basaltic crags of indescrib- able grandeur. The birds at this place were in great num- bers, the rocks being whitened with their manure. They were coming and going all the time, day and night, cackling, chattering and laughing like parrots. With all this was a buzzing sound, as if from an enormous swarm of bees. A WALK AMONG THE BIRDS. 311 These birds were U. Brunichii. U. grylle were very com- mon, but scatter more when nesting. Our camp at this time was within fifty or sixty yards of the shore on the grounded ice. This evening after supper all hands were called, and headed by the captain, who carried the American ensign, marched ashore. After all were ga- thered about, the captain said : " The land we have been working for so long, is a new dis- covery. I take possession of it in the name of the President of the United States, and name this land Bennett Island. I call for three cheers." They were given. Then the captain, turning to Mr. Chipp, said : " Mr. Chipp, give all hands all the liberty you can on American soil." I took a short ramble. The next day I went off with gun and note-book. Sunshine and fog, with light southerly airs. I noticed a rapid current by the shore here, with a tidcfall of some two feet. The tidal observations were conducted near camp, beside a big rock, which, from its shape, was christened the ' rudder.' My walk was past this rock to try and reach the places where the murres and guillemots were. I climbed up some twelve hundred feet over very treacherous disintegrated rocks. I found the birds in all stages, from the nestling to two-thirds grown. The murres sat in long rows like the citizens of ' Cranberry Centre ' at ' town meeting,' and were very noisy. The guillemots nest very prettily. Fancy some pinnacled rocks of a rich, warm brown cropping out from a mountain side, on top of these small patches of short, beau- tiful green vegetation, and you have the spot. Place a coal black bird with white wing patches and bright red feet on this green cushion, silently watching the intruder, and the picture is complete, unless you can fancy a pure white gull flying past, and its voice echoing from crag to crag. My ascent of this place was comparatively easy, though 312 THE JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. the way was steep ; but the descent was a difficult and dangerous one. I had in many places to dig places for my feet with my hands, and then by burying my sheath-knife to the hilt in this very insecure holding ground, let myself down. In one place I lost my grip and down I went some twenty feet, fortunately bringing up unharmed save torn clothes and hands. In another place when half way down a voice sung. out, ' Look out, sir !' I did so, and saw an ava- lanche of huge rocks and earth coming for me. Seeing a chance of safety behind an out-cropping crag, I hastily avail- ed myself of it, but barely in time, as these missiles of death hurtled down. My companion said he never expected to get out of it alive. That and many other narrow shaves I have since weathered, but my companion of that day is gone. Sharvell was a good fellow, always in excellent spirits, and contributed much toward the welfare of our camp life. The next day the men by throwing stones got 125 murres, which were very acceptable as fresh food. Two days after this I shot forty-one more, shooting from a wild, dangerous place some seven hundred feet above the sea. It seemed as if the vibration of the report must cause the disintegrated rocks to fall. The 1st of August I took another tramp of some seven or eight miles, and visited the most extensive breeding ground I have ever seen of any bird. There were gulls, murres, and guillemots in thousands, and at the report of my gun they came out into the air so thickly as to darken the sun and almost make me think the walls of rocks were falling. Their noise drowned conversation. Kittiwakes were the most common. I got within six or eight feet of some on their nests without their offering to leave. I fairly envied these beautiful creatures their cosy home. The land here sloped at an angle of some fifty degrees, from which rugged rocks cropped out, and above which they towered, high trap ledges with red lichen in masses. One place I passed that was most interesting. It was a rising valley, which receded gradually from the seashore. A fine stream of water was here, clear and cold. About half IN INTERESTING VALLEY. 313 way up this valley a mass of pinnacled rocks arose like some great castle of old. Probably mine was the first human foot ever there, and as I stood looking I almost expected to see some gigantic knight appear and ask how or by what right I dared invade his realm. The results of this trip were some eggs and birds, and a nice lot of scurvy grass. This last added relish to our food. CAIRN ON BENNETT ISLAND. During the night of August 3d a heavy land slide occur- red. Great rocks hurled themselves down the mountain side, and, bounding off into the air, struck the water below, lashing it into foam and sending the spray fifty feet into the air. A cairn was built by Mr. Dunbar and some of the sailors on the southern side of the island. A paddle was stuck on top of it. It is situated about one hundred feet above sea level. On Saturday, August 6th, in the forenoon, we left this place and started south in our boats. In consequence of the 19 314 JEANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. shaking up which the boats got while being hauled over the ice, they leaked badly. Pumping and baling had to be done about every fifteen or twenty minutes. This was kept up until we, in the whale-boat, reached the Tunguse village. On August 16th, Mr. Collins called my attention to land at the southwest. Some birds and seals were seen, also an oc- casional walrus and bearded seal. Soundings were had in nineteen fathoms. On the 17th there was more water in sight than I had seen for two years. On the 20th the land was very plain, and the ice packed as if jammed by some- SEAL AND SEAL-HOLE. thing. This packing afterward caused us to be delayed ten days. From this trying situation we were released on Tues- day, August 30th. On the evening of this day we made a landing on Thaddeus Island, one of the Liakhof group. After eating my scanty supper of pemmican I started out, gun in hand, for a walk. I saw the long tailed duck {H. glacialis} in large flocks, also some eiders ; but glacialis was the most common species I noticed while among these isl- ands. I also saw fresh tracks of reindeer and foxes, and two bones (tibia and fibula) of a mammoth. These 1 C oo 3 P3 w AMONG THK ISLANDS 317 shouldered and carried back to camp. They were all I could carry with my gun, three ducks (//. glacialis) and twelve Band'erling ((7. aroiarla). On September 4th we had to haul out of a bad pocket and over the ice about two miles. Launching again we, after a wet passage, reached a shoal about southeast of Kotelnoi Isl- and. Found plenty of driftwood, so pitched camp and partially dried our clothing. 1 got some birds here, eider ARCTIC DUCKS. ducks, gulls, and paiaropes, which came in handy for food. No seals were seen. The flora of Bennett Island, Thaddeus and Kotelnoi are much the same. Kotelnoi on its south- eastern part is moderately high, with a small beach in places. While passing along the shore would be seen at intervals a large white owl {Nyetea nivca~), sitting silent and alone. After leaving Kotelnoi, on the night of September 7th, we experienced a severe gale, several times shipping very heavy 318 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. seas, one of which all hands thought would swamp us. Sea- nian Leach did noble work that night, so did seaman Wil- son. The night was very dark, and the danger of our posi- tion was, owing to the floating pieces of ice, much increased. We had to bale for our lives. To have struck one of these ice pieces would have been death. Our escape was miracu- lous, as we were running very rapidly. On Saturday forenoon, September 10th, we landed on Semen- offski Island, got some food and fresh water, and, after din- ner, pushed off, some of the party, with rifles, proceeding overland to the southern end of the island. Two reindeer were started, one of which being shot we again landed and remained until Monday forenoon. I shot some gulls, one goose, two golden plover and ten ptarmigan. Previous to this, and between Thaddeus and Kotelnoi, I shot some twenty ducks, all of which were excellent eating. Leaving Semenoffski on the 12th, we ran south, stopping beside an ice piece at noon for dinner. After this we stood on until about four p. M., when, in attempting to run between two pieces of ice, our boat stove a hole in her starboard bilge. Shoving a rag into it we ran for the captain's boat, told him we were in a sinking condition, and hauled along- side an ice piece, pulled out, and, after nailing a piece of wood over the place, filled away for the main land of Siberia, distant perhaps one hundred miles. The wind and sea increased toward night, and at dark we lost sight of the first and second cutters. Those two boats contained twenty-two men. Two of them Noros and Nin- dermann I have seen since, but the others 1 never saw after that night. During the night it blew a gale with a terrible sea. We had to lay ' hove to ' with a drag out for twenty hours. Everybody did his utmost, but it seemed as if every moment would be our last. Starting again next afternoon we ran before a heavy sea ; but though wet, made very good weather. Many of us were about used up with badly swollen feet. No chance to cook anything owing to tossing of the boat. ON LAND ONCE MORE. 319 On Friday, September 16th, after a very hard day amid shoals and bad tide-rips, we succeeded in finding a dilapi- dated hut on one of the mouths of the Lena River. We were wet through, and so stiff as to be scarcely able to walk. But we were ashore again on the big land, and that was enough. Our water gave out about two days be- fore this, thus thirst was added to our hunger ; but after getting into the river we got plenty of this necessary article, and no nectar that I ever quaffed tasted like it. I have had the pleasure of stopping at numerous good hotels since the Friday night above referred to, but not one of them seemed as luxurious as did that old hut, and our meal of pemmican on that night. CHAPTER XXVI. MR. NEWCOMB'S NARRATIVE. (CONTINUED.) SOME of us hobbled around and gathered fire wood, after which, beside a good fire, we discussed the comfort of the situation and obtained a little sleep. We remained here till the next forenoon when, about 11 o'clock, we got things into our boat and started up the river. While here we saw numbers of geese and ducks, but I was so lame I could not get round to shoot any of them. We were very much in need of fresh food, but could not, under the circumstances, procure it, though we afterwards got some ducks and a few gulls. The geese were in flocks together as if about ready to migrate, and there were also some swans on the sand spits as we passed along. On September 19th we turned out before sunrise, and after eating our frugal meal of pemmican we continued up the river. After working all the forenoon we stopped and got a little dinner, landing on a point where we found signs of very recent occupation. Just after this, about one P. M., while Mr. Danenhower was taking some compass observa- tions, three objects were descried or seen appearing around the left bank of the same river. These soon proved to be human beings the first natives seen outside of our crew for over two years. They were a little afraid of us at first, and would not land, stopping in their canoes or veatkas ; but by making signs to them we induced them to come ashore, after which we gave them a little pemmican to eat as an evidence of our good will ; but they would not touch it until I had tasted it and showed them that it was good. I also showed them various other things that I had, and gave (320) FRIENDLY NATIVES. 323 them some little buttons. We then made signs to them that we were very hungry, and they brought us a small piece of reindeer, one old goose, and a iish, which was all the provi- sion that they had with them at that time. There being plenty of drift-wood on the shores of the river, we soon got a fire going and a stew under way. While our stew was in process of cooking we showed the natives our rifles, and shot them off once or twice to show them what they were. I also charged my shot-gun, a breech- loader, and fired at a piece of wood, and they were very much interested to see the manner in which the small shot were distributed ; they seemed to think that it would kill a duck very nicely. The manner of loading was the subject of much discussion. They handled this gun almost rever- ently. Perhaps a short description of these natives will not be out of place. As soon as they came near so that we could hail them, they bared their heads, bowed, and devoutly crossed themselves. In stature they were small, complexion dark and swarthy, with straight black hair. They had very good features, and were of comparatively happy dispositions. Their names, as we afterward learned, were Theodore, Tomat, and Caranie. Tomat was a young fellow and quite a dandy; his clothing seemed to lit neater than that of the others. He had some ornaments about him, including tobacco pouches and a fancy pipe, and little copper ornaments for holding up his leggings : and knee-pads made of loon-skin, which he afterwards told me were of use to protect the knees when crawling over the ground after game. This idea I would recommend to sportsmen. Without waiting for our stew to get as thoroughly cooked as some perhaps would have liked it, we arranged some logs in a semi-circle and sat down without formality. This meal, the first fresh food which we had tasted for a long time, was indeed good, and though the goose was very tough, we rapidly devoured it, and soon the pot was empty. I showed our new-found friends some photographs which 324 THE JE ANNETTE ARCTIC EXPEDITION. I had, and they seemed much interested in them. They ap- peared not to understand how they were made, and evidently took them for pictures of saints, as they crossed themselves at sight of each one. They were, in reality, photographs of friends at home. After we had concluded our meal we, by signs, induced the natives to pilot us up the river, and they conducted us to a point where five huts and a grave-yard were located. This place proved to be a small summer hunting station, and we subsequently discovered that our friends were Tunguses. We hauled up for the night, and the natives set their nets and caught some fish which they gave us. These nets, by the way, are worth describing. They are made of horse-hair, with stones fastened to little hoops of wood for sinkers, and also to keep the net from coming in contact with the rough bottom. They are set like a gill net, anchored at each end, and floated on the surface by means of rolls of birch bark. I afterwards procured one of the same kind of nets, but did not find it necessary to use it. We stayed at this place until the next morning, enjoying an excellent